Industrial Maintenance - College of the North Atlantic Qatar

COLLEGE OF THE NORTH ATLANTIC – QATAR 

Academic Calendar 

2012 – 2013 

CNA-QATAR.COM

Welcome to College of the North Atlantic – Qatar 

The CNA-Q Story 

College of the North Atlantic – Qatar is a partnership 

between the State of Qatar and College of the North 

Atlantic in Canada. We officially opened in September 

2002. CNA-Q fills the State’s need for graduates who 

have hands-on training in their field of study and are 

ready to start work right away. As the second largest 

post-secondary school in Qatar, CNA-Q now has 

2,000 + full-time students. 

CNA in Qatar 

College of the North Atlantic (CNA) was chosen by the 

State of Qatar from top colleges around the world to 

fulfill Qatar’s need for a technical college. With 40 + 

years of success and a long list of program offerings, 

CNA created what is now Qatar’s premier technical 

college – CNA-Q. CNA-Q programs are tailored to 

Qatar’s top industries. Our institution complements 

degree-granting universities in Education City and 

elsewhere in Qatar. When you join CNA-Q, you are 

joining a community of over 20,000 students enrolled 

every year at CNA campuses in Canada and Qatar. 

Our Mission 

College of the North Atlantic – Qatar is committed 

to being a high-quality, student-centered, public 

post-secondary technical institution. This 

commitment will be reflected through world-class 

facilities, accessible and responsive technology 

programs, and its contribution to technological 

development through partnerships with industry. 

The College will prepare individuals to be self- 

sufficient contributors to sustainable social and 

economic development of local communities, 

the State of Qatar, and the Gulf Region. 

Our Vision 

College of the North Atlantic – Qatar will be 

recognized as a world-class educational institution. 

It will reflect quality and innovation in its programs, 

its services to students, and its response to current 

and future needs of individuals, business, industry, 

the State, and the region. Its role in human resource 

development will ensure that people are prepared to 

contribute to a diverse economy and globalization. 

Diploma vs. Degree 

With 17 campuses in Canada 

and one in Qatar, CNA delivers 

full and part-time programs to 

20,000 

students every year 

People ask us all the time why we offer diplomas 

and not degrees. It’s because many jobs require 

specific expertise that you don’t get in a university 

degree program. CNA-Q gives you the education 

you need to qualify for those jobs right away. 

Here’s why a CNA-Q diploma 

works for you: 

Find your place in Qatar’s economy 

CNA-Q programs train you specifically 

for top industries in Qatar 

Graduate sooner 

Diploma programs are often shorter than 

degree programs 

Be a leader in your field 

Our programs are often the first – and 

only – of their kind offered in Qatar 

Transfer your credits 

Apply to universities in Canada, the US 

and the UK through 60 + articulation 

agreements

From the President 

The amazing announcement of the State of Qatar 

as host of the FIFA World Cup 2022 and the ambitious 

and visionary goals of the Qatar National Vision 2030 

illustrate that Qatar is a country on the rise. I am 

proud to say that College of the North Atlantic – Qatar, 

the second largest post-secondary institution in the 

country, continues to play a significant role in the 

State’s progress by preparing individuals for success 

in Qatar’s rapidly changing, increasingly global, 

technology-rich workplace. 

A college education is about transition – occupational 

transition from high school to the workplace; 

educational transition from high school to college to 

university; and personal transition from inexperienced 

youth to confident, highly skilled, technologically 

competent men and women contributing to the 

development of the State of Qatar. When I speak 

to our graduates and their delighted sponsors/ 

employers in business, industry, and government, 

I am constantly reminded that CNA-Q is a bridge 

to success for our students and for the State. Our 

graduates are successful not just because we provide 

them with the knowledge and skills that make them 

capable employees, but because we are committed 

to the development of the whole person – developing 

communication and teambuilding skills and instilling 

the confidence that ensures they will embrace 

leadership roles in their careers. 

We pride ourselves on being responsive to changes 

in our community and the workplace. Therefore, we 

recognize that not all of our students come to us 

directly from high school. The increasing complexity 

workplace of the 21 st century places tremendous 

pressure on those already in the workforce to upgrade 

their skills. CNA-Q leverages our considerable 

resources to provide courses and professional 

certifications that help the existing workforce of Qatar 

stay competitive and on the leading edge. 

CNA-Q’s new Strategic Plan outlines five Strategic 

Directions for the College – none is more important 

than Learners First. We take our commitment to 

students seriously. From the minute you walk through 

our doors or visit our website, we want you to feel 

welcome and supported in your academic, personal, 

and career goals. Our support staff, student services 

personnel and counsellors are always ready to help 

out; and our small class sizes and dedicated faculty 

ensure that students receive the attention they need 

and deserve. 

Join us and see for yourself that College of the North 

Atlantic – Qatar is the place to work, learn, and grow. 

Dr. Ken MacLeod, 

President

Contents 

02 Schedule of Events 

05 List of CNA-Q Programs 

07 Program Articulation and Transfer Credit 

21 Registrar’s Office 

23 Admissions 

26 Academic Terms 

27 Academic Regulations 

30 Academic Status 

31 Attendance Policy and Procedure 

35 Awards and Scholarships 

36 Tuition and Fees 

41 Student Affairs 

45 Academic Preparatory Studies 

49 School of Business Studies 

50 Business Management – Accounting 

55 Business Management – 

Human Resource Management 

60 Business Management – Marketing 

65 Office Administration 

71 School of Engineering Technology 

72 Chemical Laboratory Technician 

74 Chemical Processing Technology 

79 Electrical Engineering Technology 

84 Mechanical Engineering Technology 

(Industrial Maintenance) 

89 Process Automation Engineering Technology 

93 Telecommunications Engineering Technology 

101 School of Health Sciences 

102 Dental Assistant – Level II 

106 Emergency Medical Science 

110 Environmental Health and Safety – 

Food Safety and Inspection 


Occupational Health and Safety 


Public Health 

120 Medical Radiography Technology 

124 Pharmacy Technician 

128 Respiratory Therapy 

135 School of Information Technology 

137 Information Systems – Web Developer 

141 Information Systems – Network and 

Systems Administration 

147 Security 

155 Technician Preparatory Program (TPP) 

155 Electrical Technician 

157 Instrumentation Technician 

160 Mechanical Technician 

163 Process Operator Technician 

167 TPP – Course Descriptions 

167 Electrical Technician 

170 Instrumentation Technician 

172 Mechanical Technician 

176 Process Operator Technician 

179 TPP Language Studies 

181 TPP Math, Science and Computers 

185 Course Descriptions 

185 AC1025 – AC2260 

187 AC2340 – BK1100 

189 BL1010 – CE1210 

191 CE2130 – CE3510 

193 CE3640 – CH2830 

195 CH2860 – CI2300 

197 CI2560 – CM2200 

199 CM2300 – CP3300 

201 CP3320 – CR2440 

203 CR2470 – DA1261 

205 DA1300 – DP2360 

207 DP2460 – EG3100 

209 EN1420 – EV1710 

211 EV1711 – FM2400 

213 FM3200 – HL1650 

215 HL1720 – HM1560 

217 HM2310 – HN2310 

219 HN3110 – MA2400 

221 MA3700 – MN3200 

223 MP1200 – MR1280 

225 MR1500 – MW1710 

227 MW1720 – MX2410 

229 MX2500 – OJ1550 

231 OJ1560 – PC2821 

233 PC3820 – PH2200 

235 PM2160 – PR3211 

237 PR3214 – PR3241 

239 PR3244 – PR3261 

241 PR3520 – RT2440 

243 RT2450 – RX2150 

245 RX2160 – SD1620 

247 SD1621 – SE1610 

249 SE2350 – WT1160 

251 WT1170 – WT1720

1 

Important Notice 

This Calendar is intended to assist readers to 

understand the academic and administrative 

structure, policies, and procedures, and to provide 

information about current course offerings at 

College of the North Atlantic – Qatar (“the College”). 

Various academic and administrative departments 

have submitted the material contained in this 

publication. All general information and course 

references have been checked for accuracy, but 

there may be inconsistencies or errors. If you become 

aware of any, please bring them to the attention of 

the College Registrar. The College reserves the right 

to make changes in the information contained in this 

publication without prior notice. 

Students are responsible for familiarizing themselves 

with the specific information, rules, and regulations 

of the College as well as the specific requirements 

of each diploma, certificate, or other recognition 

sought. While advice and counselling are available, 

it is the responsibility of each student to ensure that 

courses he/she is registered in are appropriate to the 

requirements of the student’s chosen program. 

If there is an inconsistency between the general 

academic regulations and policies published in 

this Calendar, and such regulations and policies as 

established by resolution of the Board of Governors 

or the College’s administration, the version of such 

material as established by the Board of Governors 

or the College’s administration will prevail. 

By the act of registration, each student becomes 

bound by the policies and regulations of College of 

the North Atlantic – Qatar. 

College of the North Atlantic – Qatar disclaims all 

responsibility and liability for loss or damage suffered 

or incurred by any student or other party as a result 

of delays in or termination of its services, courses, or 

classes by reason of force majeure, fire, floods, riots, 

war, damage to College property, financial exigency, 

or other events beyond the reasonable control of 

the College. 

College of the North Atlantic – Qatar disclaims any 

and all liability for damages arising as a result of 

errors, interruptions or disruptions to operations or 

connected with its operations or its campuses, 

arising out of computer failure or non-compliance 

of its computing systems.

2 

Schedule of Events 2012 – 2013 

Note: The dates listed below are accurate at the time of publication; however, as the academic year unfolds, some 

dates may be changed to accommodate College or State requirements. All changes to this schedule are posted 

on the Registrar’s Office page of the College website, www.cna-qatar.com, and on the Registrar’s Office page of 

the College Intranet. You are encouraged to consult these frequently for the most current schedule. 

Fall Semester 2012 

August 30, 2012 Supplementary exams – All programs except TPP, Thursday 8 – 11am 

Male Gym, Building 18 

August 30, 2012 Student registration/orientation – TPP only 

September 2, 2012 Start of classes/student appeal hearings – TPP only 

September 2 – 6, 2012 Student registration/orientation – All programs except TPP (5 days) 

September 9, 2012 Start of classes/student appeal hearings – All programs except TPP 

September 16, 2012 Last day for adding courses – TPP only 

(TPP enrollment requires administrative and sponsor approval) 

September 23, 2012 Last day for adding courses – All programs except TPP 

October 21 – 24, 2012 Midterm evaluation – All programs (4 days) 

October 28, 2012 – 

November 1, 2012 

Eid Al Adha – All programs (5 statutory holidays) 

November 5, 2012 Grade reports available to students – All programs 

November 12, 2012 Last day for dropping courses without academic prejudice – All programs 

December 3, 2012 Last day of TPP Academic classes for Fall Semester 

December 4, 2012 Last day of classes for Fall Semester – All programs except TPP 

December 4 & 5, 2012 Math and English final exams for Fall Semester – TPP only 

TPP – TAFE evidence submitted by December 6, 2012 

December 5 – 12, 2012 Final exams for Fall Semester (6 days, excluding Friday and Saturday) 

December 12, 2012 Last day of TPP Technical classes for Fall Semester 

December 16, 2012 – 

January 7, 2013 

Semester break – All programs (23 days) 

December 18, 2012 National Day – College closed 

December 19, 2012 Grade reports available to students – All programs

3 


Winter Semester 2013 

January 6, 2013 Supplementary exams – All programs except TPP, Sunday 8 – 11am 

Male Gym, Building 18 

January 7, 2013 Student registration/orientation – TPP only 

January 7 – 10, 2013 Student registration/orientation – All programs except TPP (4 days) 

January 8, 2013 Start of classes/student appeal hearings – TPP only 

January 13, 2013 Start of classes/student appeal hearings – All programs except TPP 

January 22, 2013 Last day for adding courses – TPP only 

(TPP enrollment requires administrative and sponsor approval) 

January 27, 2013 Last day for adding courses – All programs except TPP 

February 12, 2013 National Sports Day (statutory holiday) 

February 21 – 26, 2013 Midterm evaluation – All programs (4 days, excluding Friday and Saturday) 

February 28, 2013 – 

March 3, 2013 

February 28, 2013 – 

March 4, 2013 

Mid-semester break – TPP only (4 days) 

Mid-semester break – All programs except TPP (5 days) 

March 4, 2013 Students return from break – TPP only 

March 5, 2013 Students return from break – All programs except TPP 

March 5, 2013 Grade reports available to students – All programs 

March 11, 2013 Last day for dropping courses without academic prejudice – All programs 

April 8, 2013 Last day of TPP Academic classes for Winter Semester 

April 9, 2013 Last day of classes for Winter Semester – All programs except TPP 

April 9 & 10, 2013 Math and English final exams for Winter Semester – TPP only 

TPP – TAFE evidence submitted by April 11, 2013 

April 10 – 17, 2013 Final exams for Winter Semester (6 days, excluding Friday and Saturday) 

April 17, 2013 Last day of TPP Technical classes for Winter Semester 

April 18 – April 29, 2013 Semester break – TPP only (12 days) 

April 18 – May 5,2013 Semester break – All other programs (18 days) 

April 23, 2013 Grade reports available to students – All programs

4 


Intersession Semester 2013 

April 28, 2013 Supplementary exams – All programs except TPP, Sunday 8 – 11am Male Gym, 

Building 18 

April 29, 2013 Student registration/orientation – TPP only 

April 29 – May 2, 2013 Student registration/orientation – All programs except TPP (4 days) 

April 30, 2013 Start of classes/student appeal hearings – TPP only 

May 5, 2013 Start of classes/student appeal hearings – All programs except TPP 

May 7, 2013 Last day for adding courses – TPP only 

(applies to EFL and Academic classes; not applicable to TPP Technical courses) 

May 12, 2013 Last day for adding courses – All other programs 

May 14, 2013 Last day for dropping courses without academic prejudice – TPP only 

June 19, 2013 Graduation 

June 20, 2013 Last day of classes for 7-week semester – All programs except 

TPP Technical classes 

June 20 & 23, 2013 Final exams for EFL and Academic courses – TPP only 

June 23 – 25, 2013 Final exams – All programs except TPP (3 days) 

June 23 – 25, 2013 TPP – TAFE evidence submitted by June 23, 2013 

TPP Technical classes as required to June 25, 2013 

July 2, 2013 Grade reports available to students – All programs

5 

List of CNA-Q Programs 

* Total program length varies depending on language proficiency, academic preparatory courses required for 

entry, and academic performance throughout the program of study. 

School of Business Studies Credential Duration* 

Business Administration Certificate 1 year 

Business Administration – Accounting Diploma 2 years 

Business Administration – Human Resource Management Diploma 2 years 

Business Administration – Marketing Diploma 2 years 

Business Management – Accounting Diploma 3 years 

Business Management – Human Resource Management Diploma 3 years 

Business Management – Marketing Diploma 3 years 

Office Administration Certificate 1 year 

Office Administration (Executive) Diploma 2 years 

School of Engineering Technology Credential Duration* 

Chemical Laboratory Technician Certificate 1 year 

Chemical Processing Technician Diploma 2 years 

Chemical Processing Technology Diploma 3 years 

Electrical Power Systems Technician Diploma 2 years 

Electrical Engineering Technology Diploma 3 years 

Electrical Engineering Technology (Power and Controls) Diploma 3 years 

Mechanical Technician (Industrial Maintenance) Diploma 2 years 

Mechanical Engineering Technology (Industrial Maintenance) Diploma 3 years 

Process Automation Engineering Technician Diploma 2 years 

Process Automation Engineering Technology Diploma 3 years 

Telecommunications Engineering Technician Diploma 2 years 

Telecommunications Engineering Technology Diploma 3 years

6 

List of CNA-Q Programs 

School of Health Sciences Credential Duration* 

Dental Assistant – Level II Diploma 2 years 

Emergency Medical Technician Certificate 1 year 

Emergency Medical Science Diploma 2 years 

Environmental Health and Safety – 





Public Health 

Diploma 2 years 



Medical Radiography Technology Diploma 3 years 

Pharmacy Technician Diploma 2 years 

Respiratory Therapy Diploma 3 years 

School of Information Technology Credential Duration* 

Information Systems – Software Diploma 2 years 

Information Systems – Web Developer Diploma 3 years 

Information Systems – Hardware Diploma 2 years 

Information Systems – Network and Systems Administration Diploma 3 years 

Technician Preparatory Program (TPP) Credential Duration* 

Electrical Technician TAFE Certificate Determined by sponsor 

Instrumentation Technician TAFE Certificate Determined by sponsor 

Mechanical Technician TAFE Certificate Determined by sponsor 

Process Operator Technician TAFE Certificate Determined by sponsor

7 

Memorandums of Understanding for 

Program Articulation and Transfer Credit 

College of the North Atlantic has established specific 

formal Memorandums of Understanding for program 

articulation and transfer of credits from diploma 

programs at CNA-Q to baccalaureate programs 

offered by other institutions. Although CNA-Q 

makes every effort to ensure that the information 

provided here is accurate, other institutions may 

make changes to their policies, regulations or 

admission requirements without notice or after the 

CNA-Q Academic Calendar has been published. In 

such cases, CNA-Q assumes no responsibility for 

the accuracy of the information presented on the 

following pages. 

Students who are interested in pursuing degrees after 

graduating from CNA-Q are encouraged to consult the 

CNA-Q Career Counselling Centre or the Registrar’s 

Office for assistance and advice. They should consult 

websites or most recent calendars of post-secondary 

institutions they wish to attend, and they should have 

a clear understanding of the course, language, and 

academic preparation requirements for admission to 

other colleges and universities. 

The institutions listed on the following pages are 

currently offering admission to CNA-Q graduates 

who meet the entrance requirements as indicated. 

Admitted applicants from CNA-Q can expect to 

receive credit from these institutions as described.

8 

CNA-Q Specific Formal Memorandums 

of Understanding for Program Articulation 

Sending Institution Receiving Institution 

College of North Atlantic – Qatar Athabasca University, Canada 

Diploma Entrance 

Requirements 

Business Administration (2 years) 

• Accounting 

• General Diploma 

• Human Resource Management 

• Marketing 





• Marketing 

Business Management (3 years) 




• Marketing 





• Marketing 

Program 

Length 

Medical Radiography Technology Not specified Not 

specified 

Degree 

Not specified 1 or 2 years Any of the following programs: 

• Bachelor of Management: Post 

Diploma (3-year) 

• Bachelor of Applied 

Management – Accounting 

(BAMAC): Post Diploma 

• Bachelor of Management with 

Major: Post Diploma (4-year) 

• Bachelor of Commerce: Post 

Diploma (4-year) 

• Bachelor of Commerce with 

Major: Post Diploma 

Not specified 1 year Bachelor of Human Resources 

and Labour Relations: Post 

Diploma 

Not specified 1 or 2 years Any of the following programs: 

• Bachelor of Management: 

Post Diploma (3-year) 

• Bachelor of Management with 

Major: Post Diploma (4-year) 

• Bachelor of Commerce: 


• Bachelor of Commerce: 


Not specified 1 year Bachelor of Human Resources 

and Labour Relations: Post 

Diploma 

Bachelor of Science: Human 

Science (4-year Post Diploma)

9 




College of North Atlantic – Qatar Athabasca University, Canada (continued) 


Requirements 

Program 

Length 

Office Administration Certificate Not specified Not 

specified 

Office Administration (Executive) 

Diploma 

Not specified Not 

specified 

Respiratory Therapy Not specified Not 

specified 


College of North Atlantic – Qatar Cape Breton University, Canada 


Requirements 




• Marketing 




• Marketing 

Any Engineering Technology 

program 

CAEL 60 or 

IELTS no band 

below 6.0 

CAEL 60 or 

IELTS no band 

below 6.0 

CAEL 60 or 

IELTS no band 

below 6.0 


Program 

Length 

Normally 

1 calendar 

year 

Normally 

1 calendar 

year 

Degree 

Bachelor of Professional Arts: 

Communications Studies Major 

Bachelor of Professional Arts: 

Communications Studies Major 

Bachelor of Science: Human 

Science (4-year Post Diploma) 

Degree 

Bachelor of Business 

Administration program 

(enter at the appropriate level) 

Bachelor of Business 

Administration program 

(enter at the appropriate level) 

1 year Any Bachelor of Engineering 

Technology degree program 

College of North Atlantic – Qatar Indiana University-Purdue University Indianapolis, USA 


Requirements 


program 

Program 

Length 

Degree 

IELTS 5.5 2 + years Bachelor of Science and a 

Master of Science in any 

Technology program (both 

conferred by Purdue 

University, USA)

10 




College of North Atlantic – Qatar Lakehead University, Canada 


Requirements 


program 

CAEL 60 or 

IELTS no band 

below 6.0 

Program 

Length 

Not 

specified 

Degree 

May be admitted to summer 

bridging program. If successful, 

will be promoted to year three 

of a related Bachelor of 

Engineering program in 

Chemical, Civil, Electrical or 

Mechanical Engineering.

11 



Sending 

Institution 

College of North 

Atlantic – Qatar 

Receiving Institution 


Requirements 

Business Management 

(3 years) 


• Human Resource 

Management 

• Marketing 


Program Diploma 

(3 years) 



Management 

• Marketing 

Any Engineering 

Technology program 

Memorial University of Newfoundland, Canada 

Completion of 

diploma with either: 

• Minimum CAEL band scores 

between 50 and 60 in each of 

the four skills tested 

(Reading, Writing, Listening, 

Speaking), with at least two 

band scores of 60 

• Minimum overall IELTS band 

score of 6.5, with at least band 

6 in each of Writing and Reading 

Completion of 




the four skills tested (Reading, 

Writing, Listening, Speaking), 

with at least two band scores 

of 60 




Engineering Technology 3-year 

accredited diploma program or a 

similar diploma taken from a 

recognized university/college 

and acceptable to the admissions 

committee. Completion of 

Diploma with either: 










Program 

Length 

Not 

specified 

Not 

specified 

Not 

specified 

Degree 

Qualified graduates may be 

admitted to the Bachelor of 

Business Administration program 

on the basis of block transfer 

with course requirements for 

completion of the BBA specified 

for each of the College business 

diploma programs. Diploma 

program graduates will be 

required to complete a minimum 

of 45 credit hours beyond those 

used for their College Diploma. 

Admission is limited and 

competitive and is based on 

overall academic performance. 

May be considered for admission 

to term three of the Bachelor of 

Commerce (Cooperative) program; 

may be considered for admission 

directly into the Bachelor of 

Business Administration or the 

Bachelor of Commerce 

(non-Cooperative) program. If 

admitted, students will be required 

to complete a minimum of 45 

credit hours beyond those used 

towards their College Diploma. 

Bachelor of Technology 

program – entry into the 39 credit 

hour program (subject to meeting 

the language proficiency 

requirement).

12 



Sending 

Institution 





Requirements 

Memorial University of Newfoundland, Canada (continued) 

Health Sciences Health Sciences 3-year 

accredited diploma program or 

a similar diploma taken from a 

recognized university/college 

and acceptable to the admissions 

committee. Completion of 











Program 

Length 

Degree 

1 year Bachelor of Technology 

program – entry into the 39 

credit hour program (subject to 

meeting the language proficiency 

requirement).

13 



Sending 

Institution 




Northwood University, USA 


Requirements 


(3 years) 



Management 

• Marketing (at CNA/ 

Beijing Union 

University) 

Business Management – 

Marketing (3 years) 

(at CNA/Beijing Union 

University) 

Business 

Administration 

(2 years) 


(3 years) 

Business program 

(CNA six semester 

program) 

Program 

Length 

Degree 

IELTS 6.0 2 years Bachelor of Business 

Administration in Management 

(year 3 of 4) 










IELTS 6.0 1 year Bachelor of Business 

Administration (at the 

appropriate level and be eligible 

to complete a BBA normally 

within one calendar year)

14 



Sending 

Institution 




Teesside University, UK 


Requirements 

Banking Completion of Diploma with 

Good Grades, IELTS 6.0 


Accounting 


Accounting 


Human Resource 

Management 



Management 

Electrical Engineering 

Technology 

Instrumentation 

Engineering Technology 

Instrumentation 


Mechanical Engineering 

Technology (Industrial 

Maintenance) 

Telecommunications 




Medical Radiography 

Technology 

Information Systems - 

Hardware 

Completion of Diploma, 

IELTS 6.0 

Completion of Diploma with 



IELTS 6.0 

Completion of Diploma with 



IELTS 6.0 


IELTS 6.0 


IELTS 6.0 


IELTS 6.0 


IELTS 6.0 


IELTS 6.0 


IELTS 6.0 


IELTS 6.0 

Program 

Length 

Degree 

3 years Any Business School 

undergraduate program 

2 years Bachelor of Arts (Hons) in 

Accounting and Finance 

1 year Bachelor of Arts (Hons) in 

Business Management (Finance) 

2 years Bachelor of Arts (Hons) in 


1 year Bachelor of Arts (Hons) in 


(Marketing) 

2 years Bachelor of Engineering (Hons) 

in Electrical and Electronic 

Engineering 



Engineering 


in Instrumentation and Control 

Engineering 


in Mechanical Engineering 


in Instrumentation and Control 

Engineering 



Engineering 

1 year Bachelor of Science (Hons) 

in Diagnostic Radiography 

2 years Bachelor of Science (Hons) 

in Computing

15 



Sending 

Institution 





Requirements 

Information Systems – 

Hardware 


Software 





Teesside University, UK (continued) 


IELTS 6.0 


IELTS 6.0 


IELTS 6.0 


IELTS 6.0 

Program 

Length 

Degree 


in International Business 

Information Technology 


in Computing 


in International Business 



in Computer Science

16 



Sending 

Institution 




University of Bradford, UK 


Requirements 

Program 

Length 

Degree 

Entry Requirements for the School of Engineering, Design & Technology 


Technology 




Technology 

Chemical Processing 

Technology 

Entry Requirements for the School of Management 


Marketing 



Management 

Entry Requirements for the School of Health Studies 


Technology 

Emergency Medical 

Science 

Any of the Environmental 

Health and Safety diplomas 

(Food Safety and Inspection, 

Occupational Health and 

Safety, Public Health) 

GPA 3.0, IELTS 6.0 2 years Bachelor of Engineering in Electrical 

and Electronic Engineering 

GPA 3.0, IELTS 6.0 2 years Bachelor of Engineering in Electronic, 

Telecommunications and Internet 

Engineering 

GPA 3.0, IELTS 6.0 2 years Bachelor of Engineering in one of the 

following: 

• Mechanical Engineering 

• Mechanical and Automotive Engineering 

GPA 3.0, IELTS 6.0 2 years Bachelor of Engineering in Chemical 

Engineering 

GPA 3.0, IELTS 6.0 2 years Bachelor of Science in Business and 

Management Studies 

GPA 3.0, IELTS 6.0 2 years Bachelor of Science in one of the 

following: 


• Business and Management Studies 

GPA 3.0, IELTS 6.0 2 years Bachelor of Science in Diagnostic 

Radiography – Effective from September 

2012. (A maximum number of 

approximately 5 students will be 

admitted. Exact number to be 

confirmed each year by the School.) 

GPA 3.0, IELTS 6.0 2 years Bachelor of Science in Health, 

Wellbeing and Social Care 

GPA 3.0, IELTS 6.0 2 years Bachelor of Science in Health, 

Wellbeing and Social Care

17 

CNA-Q Specific Formal Memorandums of 

Understanding for Program Articulation 





Requirements 

University of Bradford, UK (continued) 

Program 

Length 

Degree 

Entry Requirements for the School of Social and International Studies 


Marketing 

GPA 3.0, IELTS 6.0 2 years Bachelor of Science in Business and 

Management Studies 

Banking GPA 3.0, IELTS 6.0 2 years Bachelor of Science in Business 

Economics and Bachelor of Science 

in Financial Economics (must 

complete a presessional program in 

Macroeconomics at the University 

of Bradford – free of charge) 


Accounting 



Management 

Entry Requirements for the School of Life Sciences 

Dental Assistant Must achieve a 

minimum GPA 3.0 

in any Biology (BL) 

and Chemistry 

(CH) modules 

Any of the Environmental 

Health and Safety diplomas 

(Food Safety and 

Inspection, Occupational 

Health and Safety, 

Public Health) 


Technology 

GPA 3.0, IELTS 6.0 2 years Bachelor of Science in Business 


in Financial Economics (must 

complete a presessional program in 



GPA 3.0, IELTS 6.0 2 years Bachelor of Science in Business 


in Financial Economics (must complete 

a presessional program in 



Must achieve a 



and Chemistry 

(CH) modules 

Must achieve a 



and Chemistry 

(CH) modules 

2 – 3 years Bachelor of Science in 

Biomedical Science 


Biomedical Science 


Biomedical Science

18 







Requirements 

University of Bradford, UK (continued) 

Entry Requirements for the School of Life Sciences (continued) 

Pharmacy Technician Must achieve a minimum GPA 3.0 

in any Biology (BL) and Chemistry 

(CH) modules 

Respiratory Therapy Must achieve a minimum GPA 3.0 

in any Biology (BL) and Chemistry 

(CH) modules 

Program 

Length 

Degree 

2 – 3 years Bachelor of Science 

in Biomedical Science 

2 – 3 years Bachelor of Science 

in Biomedical Science

19 










Requirements 

Business Administration – 

Accounting 

Business Administration 

Any 2 year diploma 

program 

University of Leeds, UK 


Requirements 




Technology 

(Power and Controls) 


Technology 


Technology 


Chemical Processing 

Technology 

GPA 3.2, 

IELTS 6.0 

GPA 3.2, 

IELTS 6.0 

GPA 3.2, 

IELTS 6.0 

GPA 3.2, 

IELTS 6.0 

GPA 3.2, 

IELTS 6.0 

University of New Brunswick, Canada 

GPA 3.0, 

CAEL 60 

GPA 3.0, 

CAEL 60 

Program 

Length 

Program 

Length 

Degree 

2 years Bachelor of Engineering in one of the following: 

• Electronic and Communications Engineering 

• Electronic and Electrical Engineering 

• Electronic Engineering 

• Electronics and Nanotechnology 












• Automotive Engineering 

• Mechanical Engineering 


• Chemical and Energy Engineering 

• Chemical and Materials Engineering 

• Chemical and Minerals Engineering 

• Chemical and Pharmaceutical Engineering 

• Chemical Engineering 

• Energy Engineering 

• Petroleum Engineering 

Degree 

2 years Bachelor of Applied Management in 

Accounting (BAMAC) 

2 years Bachelor of Applied Management (BAM) 

(year 3 of 4)

20 







Requirements 

University of Wales, Newport, UK 

Program 

Length 

Entry Requirements for the School of Health Studies 

Environmental Health and 

Safety – Food Safety 

and Inspection 

Entry Requirements for the School of Management 


Marketing 


Accounting 



Management 

Degree 

GPA 3.0, CAEL 60 2 years Bachelor of Science (Hons) Health, Exercise 

and Nutrition (direct entry into year 2/level 5) 

Proficiency in the 

English language 

at IELTS 6.0 (or 

equivalent) level 









Entry Requirements for the School of Engineering 


Technology (Industrial 

Maintenance) 


Technology 

Process Automation 




















2 years EBA (Hons) Business and Marketing 

BA (Hons) Marketing 

2 years BA (Hons) Business and Accounting 

2 years BA (Hons) Business and Human Resource 

Management 

2 years BEng (Hons) Mechanical and 

Manufacturing Engineering 

2 years BEng (Hons) Electrical Engineering 

2 years BEng (Hons) Electrical Engineering 

2 years BEng (Hons) Electronic and 

Communications Engineering

21 

REGISTRAR’S OFFICE 

Registrar’s Office 

The Registrar’s Office/Student Services administers 

the College’s policies and procedures covering 

admission, academic regulations, academic status 

of students, tuition and fees, and awards and 

scholarships. This section of the Academic Calendar 

provides important information about these functions. 

The following people at the Registrar’s Office 

can assist you: 

Student Information Officer 4495-2003 or 

4495-2005 

Admissions Officer 4495-2011 

Sponsor Coordinator 4495-2010 

Associate Registrar 4495-2025 

Registrar 4495-2013 

Registrar’s Assistant 4495-2008

22 

REGISTRAR’S OFFICE

23 


Registrar’s Office 

Admissions 

Admissions Regulations 

It is the policy of College of the North Atlantic – Qatar 

to maintain and adhere to State admission 

requirements. Students are admitted based on the 

proviso that they meet the minimum educational 

qualifications prescribed. Admission to the 

College is competitive, based on the results of 

the College’s mandatory placement assessment 

examinations. 

Application Deadline 

The College maintains an open admission policy. 

Students will be admitted into a program on a 

first-come, first-served basis as assessed by the 

date of receipt of their application and on the proviso 

that the candidate students meet the minimum 

qualifications prescribed. 

Entry Into Full-Time Programs 

Candidates applying for full-time status must satisfy 

the following requirements: 

• Meet the educational and other requirements for 

entry into the particular program, or meet the 

mature student requirements. 

• Have reached the legal school-leaving age on the 

date of commencement of the course program. 

• Apply in writing on the approved application form 

and provide a photocopy of the National ID Card 

and passport, with picture and ID details. 

• Show evidence of physical qualification in 

accordance with the requirements of the program 

selected, where applicable. 

• Provide an official copy of high school transcript 

(in the case of high school graduates). 

• Complete the College of the North Atlantic – Qatar 

mandatory placement assessment examinations in 

English and Mathematics. 

• Provide further documentation, or report for an 

interview or for testing when required. 

High School Definition 

Senior high school graduation means the successful 

completion of required credit courses as specified 

by the Supreme Education Council, Qatar. Ministry 

validation of secondary grades is required for all 

non-state and private schools. 

Eligibility Lists 

Waitlists will be maintained for each program. 

Candidates will be placed on the waitlist provided 

all entrance requirements are satisfied and all 

necessary documentation is received. 

Selection Process 

1. Applications will be processed provided that: 

a) The application is completed correctly with all 

documentation 

b) All educational and other requirements are met 

c) All applicable fees are paid 

2. Applications will be acknowledged in writing upon 

receipt in the Registrar’s Office. 

3. Applicants enrolled in their final year of high school 

will be accepted conditionally pending receipt of 

final exam results. 

4. When accepted, applicants will be asked to confirm 

their intent to register in writing. 

If applicants fail to confirm within the time specified, 

their places will go to the applicant next on the 

eligibility list. 

Mature Student Requirements 

Qatari applicants who do not meet the educational 

prerequisites for the program they wish to enter may 

be considered for admission on an individual basis 

provided all the following conditions are met: 

• Applicants are at least 19 years of age at the time 

of application 

• Applicants have been out of school for at least 

one year 

• Applicants present a certified copy of grades for 

the highest educational level attained 

• Applicants complete College of the North 

Atlantic –Qatar’s mandatory placement assessment 

examinations in English and Mathematics. 

NOTE: The mature applicant policy applies to Qatari 

applicants only.

24 


Criteria for Awards and Scholarships 

1. Awards administered by the College are awarded 

upon the recommendation of the Awards 

Committee. 

2. Application forms for awards administered by the 

College are available at the Registrar’s Office. 

Unless otherwise stated, applications are not 

required in order to be considered for medals, 

scholarships, or prizes. 

3. No scholarship will be awarded to a candidate who 

holds an award of equal or greater value, unless 

specifically required by the terms of the award. 

Certain conditions apply. 

4. To be eligible for any award, a student must be 

registered as a full-time student in a recognized 

College program. 

5. The eligibility criteria for awarding a scholarship 

will be: 

• Candidates should be in clear academic 

standing with a GPA of at least 2.5. 

• At least 80% of the credits accumulated at 

the point of consideration for awards must 

have been obtained at the College. 

CNA-Q Language Studies Scholarship 

Qatari Nationals seeking acceptance into 

undersubscribed programs at College of the North 

Atlantic – Qatar may qualify for the CNA-Q Language 

Studies Scholarship. Under this program, qualified 

applicants will pay one-half the tuition for a 15-week 

semester (5,000 QR) and the College will pay the 

balance (5,000 QR) for the first year of studies, 

provided that the student passes the level of English 

taken in the first semester. 

The following criteria apply: 

1. Applicants must meet the high school admission 

requirements or the mature applicant requirements 

to any of the College’s undersubscribed programs. 

2. Applicants must achieve a level of FL1030, 

FL1040, FL1050, FL1060, or FL1070 on the CNA-Q 

Academic English Placement Test. 

3. Applicants must have been unable to procure 

sponsorship to attend CNA-Q. 

4. Applicant will complete an application for the 

scholarship as soon as possible after acceptance 

into the College. Incomplete applications will not 

be processed. 

General Studies at CNA-Q 

General Studies at CNA-Q describes an academic 

plan for a student who has not made a final decision 

about admission to a particular technical program, but 

wishes to register in specific courses for the purpose 

of upgrading academic preparation or exploring 

certain career pathways. 

Such applications are evaluated on an individual basis 

and include consultation among the Registrar’s Office, 

program administrators and the applicant. The goal is 

to provide access to full-time programs by permitting 

part-time studies for a limited period of time. The 

major credit programs offered at CNA-Q, which are 

Business Studies, Engineering Technology, Health 

Sciences, and Information Technology, are accessible 

to General Studies applicants. The following 

regulations apply to General Studies applications: 

1. Applications must complete the CNA-Q 

Application for Admission and submit the 

100 QR application fee. 

2. Applicants are required to complete CNA-Q 

placement examination in English and Math. 

(Applicants with a minimum TOEFL score of 550 are 

exempt from the CNA-Q English placement exam.) 

3. Applicants must possess a valid residency permit 

for the State of Qatar. 

4. Applicants must present an official transcript 

from the last post-secondary institution attended. 

5. Applicants will participate in an interview with a 

program representative, who will make a 

recommendation to the Registrar. 

Students who register in a General Studies program 

are subject to the following conditions: 

1. The maximum number of credits that can be 

attained in this program is 15. 

2. Course registration cannot exceed 15 hours per 

semester. 

3. Prior Learning Assessment and Recognition (PLAR) 

evidence, if available, should be submitted to the 

College for evaluation. Consult the Registrar’s 

Office for information about PLAR.

25 


Special Admissions 

Special circumstances may exist whereby applicants 

who fail to meet all the criteria for admission may be 

recommended for acceptance. In such cases, the 

application will be referred to the Registrar. 

Applicants with disabilities will be individually 

assessed to determine admissibility. The assessment 

will include: 

a) Reviewing the applicant’s qualifications 

b) Reviewing the recommendation of the 

sponsoring or supporting group (if applicable) 

c) Summarizing the applicant’s strengths and 

abilities 

d) Determining the need for support staff required 

to facilitate the integration of the applicant 

e) Identifying necessary resources/equipment 

required to facilitate the training 

Entry for Part-Time Students 

Students who apply for part-time status in any 

program must meet all the requirements outlined 

for full-time status and will be considered only if a 

vacancy exists after full-time students have been 

accommodated.

26 


Academic Terms 

Academic Year 

The period from September to July consisting of three 

semesters; two 15-week semesters and one 7-week 

intersession or one 13-week summer semester. 

Access Program 

Developmental programs in English as a Foreign 

Language that students may enter prior to full 

admission into regular certificate/diploma programs. 

Credit Course 

An approved and recognized body of content, 

knowledge and skills assigned a credit value. 

Credit 

The weighted value of a course based on the depth 

and breadth of the learning objectives. 

Diploma Program 

An approved program of study consisting of a 

prescribed combination of courses that must address 

all of the following: 

a) Occupational skill development 

b) Academic or general study 

c) Self-interest or personal growth 

Diploma programs will normally: 

a) Be prescribed over a minimum of a 

four-semester period 

b) Be comprised of a minimum of 80 credits 

c) Consist of a maximum of seven courses 

per semester 

Advanced Diploma 

An approved program of study of in-depth training for 

graduates of a diploma program or equivalent. 

Advanced Diploma programs will normally: 

a) Be prescribed over a minimum of one semester 


Certificate Program 

An approved program of study consisting of a 

prescribed combination of courses that must address 

all of the following: 

a) Occupational skill development 

b) Academic or general study 

c) Self-interest or personal growth 

Certificate programs will normally: 

a) Be prescribed over a two-semester period 


c) Consist of a maximum of seven courses 

per semester 

Continuing Education Studies 

(Certificate of Achievement) 

Many courses are offered through CNA-Q’s 

Department of Corporate Training and Continuing 

Education. Designed to make part-time learning a 

part of the community’s full-time life, courses that 

meet professional development, operational training 

and personal interest needs are offered after hours 

and on weekends throughout the year. 

Certificates or diplomas are awarded for continuing 

education courses depending upon the length of the 

course and whether or not the specific learning or 

performance is formally measured and evaluated. 

For full information about course offerings, credentials, 

times and fees, please visit the website at 

www.cna-qatar.com/continuingeducation or 

call 4495-2123. 

Workplace Development Programs 

These programs/courses are customized to suit the 

needs of clients. The College may enter partnerships 

for the purpose of developing and/or delivering 

courses or programs. Such partnerships will be 

formally recognized on parchments in one of the 

following ways: 

1. College Parchment 

When a course or program is developed by the 

College, either in partnership with or on behalf of 

another institution, agency or industry, a College 

parchment will be issued. This parchment may 

contain the phrase “designed in partnership with...” 

as an additional description of the course/program. 

2. Joint Parchment 

When a course or program is developed and/or 

delivered in partnership with another educational 

institution, a joint certificate formally recognizing 

both institutions may be awarded. This parchment 

would recognize both institutions and may contain 

the signatures of duly authorized officers of 

both institutions.

27 


3. Parchments for Workforce Development 

a) Diploma in Skill Development awarded upon 

completion of a program that is at least two 

years in duration for which learning is measured 

and evaluated 

b) Certificate in Skill Development awarded upon 

completion of a program that is normally one 

year in duration, but not less than one academic 

semester, for which learning is measured and 

evaluated 

c) Certificate of Achievement awarded upon 

successful completion of a program of less than 

one academic semester or upon completion 

of an academic course for which learning is 

measured and evaluated 

d) Continuing Education Certificate (Certificate of 

Attendance) issued upon completion a course, 

workshop, seminar, or program for which specific 

learning or performance is not measured or 

evaluated 

Full-Time Student 

Students who are registered in three or more courses 

and/or 15 hours per week. 

Part-Time Student 

Students who are registered in fewer than 15 hours 

per week. 

Semester 

A 15-week period that includes class/learning time 

as well as administrative and evaluation time. The 

academic year will be divided into three semesters: 

• Fall Semester – Begins in August/September 

• Winter Semester – Begins in January 

• Intersession – Begin in April/May 

Intersession 

A 7- to 10-week period that includes class/learning 

time as well as administrative and evaluation time, 

usually scheduled at the beginning of the Spring 

Semester. 

Student Numbers 

Individual student numbers will be assigned to 

applicants for all College programs, whether full-time 

or part-time. The individual student number will be 

used in all correspondence and/or transactions with 

the College (e.g. registration, exams, requests for 

transcripts). Student numbers must appear on all 

documents to be added to the student’s files, and for 

registration, exams, requests for transcripts, etc. 

Voluntary Withdrawal 

Students who are in good standing and who voluntarily 

withdraw due to extenuating circumstances (confirmed 

by the counsellor or program administrator) will be 

required to reapply to return to the program. These 

students will be admitted into the first available seat. 

Academic Regulations 

It is the policy of the College that upon successful 

completion of a program of studies, students will be 

awarded one of four parchments: 

1. Certificate in (program title) 

2. Diploma in (program title) 

3. Advanced Diploma in (program title) 

4. Certificate in Continuing Education in (program/ 

course title) 

Qualifications for a Certificate, Diploma, 

or Advanced Diploma 

To qualify for a certificate, a diploma, or an advanced 

diploma, students must: 

• Meet all the requirements as prescribed in the 

program of studies 

• Obtain a mark of not less than 50% in every course 

in the program unless otherwise specified 

• Attain a minimum grade point average of 2.0 

• Obtain 25% or more of their credits from the College 

• Obtain an acceptable level on the College’s English 

Language exit assessment – the CAEL test 

Students who do not complete their diploma program 

in the prescribed time frame from first registration 

may complete the program by following the 

regulations in effect at the time of first registration, 

provided the program is completed in not more than 

three years beyond the regular date of completion. 

Students who return to complete a Diploma in 

Technology may not receive credit for courses that 

were completed more than five years prior to the 

date of readmission.

28 


CAEL Requirements to Graduate 

The Canadian Academic English Language (CAEL) 

Assessment is a standardized language test used 

to measure students’ level of English. All graduating 

students must successfully complete the CAEL test in 

order to be granted the diploma or certificate. 

Consult individual program requirements or the 

Graduation Audit Officer in the Registrar’s Office 

to confirm the CAEL score necessary to meet 

graduation standards. 

Program Requirement Details 

All Business Studies 

Diploma Programs 

All Health Sciences 


Select Engineering 

Technician Diploma 

Programs 

Select Engineering 

Technology Diploma 

Programs 



All one-year Certificate 

Programs 

CAEL 40 

No Band < 30 

CAEL 50 

No Band < 40 

CAEL 40 

No Band < 30 

CAEL 50 

No Band < 40 

CAEL 40 

No Band < 30 

CAEL 30 

No Band < 20 

Business Administration Diploma 

Business Management Diploma 

Office Administration Diploma 

Dental Assistant – Level ll 

Emergency Medical Science 

Environmental Health and Safety 

Medical Radiography Technology 

Pharmacy Technician 

Respiratory Therapy 

Chemical Processing Technician and Technology 

Electrical Power Systems Diploma 

Mechanical Technician (Industrial Maintenance) 

Process Automation Engineering Technician 

Telecommunications Engineering Technician 

Electrical Engineering Technology 

Process Automation Engineering Technology 

Mechanical Engineering Technology (Industrial Maintenance) 

Telecommunications Engineering Technology 

Information Systems – Software 

Information Systems – Hardware 

Information Systems – Web Developer 

Information Systems – Network and Systems Administration 


Office Administration 

Chemical Laboratory Technician 

Emergency Medical Technician

29 


CAEL Language Requirement for Graduation 

The writing of the CAEL test will be mandatory in 

the fall and winter semesters of the first year for 

all students who require an exit Band 50 for their 

academic program. Students who fail to obtain a 

Band 50 on this test will be required to take the CAEL 

Preparation Course at Intersession in the first year 

of their program. This test will be scheduled after the 

official drop date each term. It will be optional for 

students requiring a Band 40. 

Recognition of CNA-Q Certificates 

and Diplomas 

College of the North Atlantic has specific formal 

Memoranda of Understanding for program articulation 

with a number of universities in Canada, United 

States and United Kingdom. These agreements allow 

graduates of many CNA-Q programs to be awarded 

credit towards baccalaureate degrees provided they 

meet the entrance and specific credit requirements of 

these institutions. Full information about opportunities 

for transfer and articulation of university programs is 

available from the Registrar’s Office and the Career 

Counselling Centre at CNA-Q. 

Advanced Standing 

Students may receive advanced standing for up to 

75% of the content of the program to which they have 

been admitted on the basis of successful completion 

of this content in the same or similar programs at 

another college and as assessed by the College. 

Applicants who wish to be considered for advanced 

standing should submit an application with the 

following documents: 

• Proof of high school completion 

• Official transcript(s) 

• Calendar description of the courses claimed 

for credit 

The deadline for receipt of applications by the 

Registrar is four weeks following registration date. 

Students seeking advanced standing will not be 

excused from any course until written authority has 

been received from the Registrar’s Office. 

Transfer of Credit Status 

When Transfer of Credit is awarded, the College will 

accept the passing grade awarded by the institution 

and this mark will be used in the calculation of the 

GPA. Transfer of credit is used only if the course 

number and course content are the same. 

Exemption Status 

Exemption status is granted if the course has a 

minimum of 70% equivalency in the course material 

required. When exemption status is awarded, no 

mark is reported on the transcript and the GPA is not 

affected. The College will consider exemptions for 

courses if the student received a passing grade. 

The College will accept any credit course from a 

recognized public post-secondary institution as an 

exemption for a general elective, even if that course 

is not offered at the College. In some programs, 

electives must be chosen from a designated group of 

courses, in which case a general elective cannot be 

used as a substitute. 

Credit for Prior Learning 

It is the policy of the College that students will be 

given every opportunity to receive credit for past 

learning experience through a comprehensive 

systematic process of evaluation referred to as Prior 

Learning Assessment and Recognition (PLAR). 

Credits awarded for PLAR will be recorded on the 

student transcript as an exemption or a mark. The 

maximum number of credits that can be awarded 

through the PLAR process is 75% of the number 

required to complete the certificate/diploma.

30 


Block Transfer Advanced Standing 

The College will recognize coursework completed in 

other programs/courses that fulfill the requirements 

for a designated percentage of the program to which 

the student is now applying. When students are 

granted a block transfer, their academic grades will 

be calculated beginning at the point of entry to the 

program. 

Credit System 

A credit is a weighted value of a course based on the 

depth and breadth of the learning objectives. For the 

purpose of assigning credit values, the measurement 

of learning objectives is usually accomplished by 

equating the value with the period of time scheduled 

to deliver the content in the conventional lecture 

methodology, as follows: 

Learning objectives scheduled for delivery in a 

one-hour period per week per semester constitutes 

a one credit value; therefore, a course that is 

scheduled for three hours per week per semester 

represents a three credit value. 

Grade Point Average (GPA) Marking System 

The percentage mark in any course is converted to a 

grade point according to the following: 

80% and above 4 

70% – 75% 3 

60% – 65% 2 

50% – 55% 1 

Below 50% 0 

The GPA is obtained by multiplying the credit value 

of each course in the program by the grade point 

obtained in that course. The sum of all the products 

is then divided by the total number of credits. Please 

consult the Student Handbook for full instructions 

about how to calculate and track GPA. 

When a course is repeated or a supplementary 

examination is written, the highest mark attained 

will be used in the calculation of the GPA. 

When students complete more than the minimum 

number of electives, they are able to select which 

electives will be used in the calculation of the GPA 

by making application at the Registrar’s Office. 

Without such application, the Registrar will select for 

calculation purposes the required number of electives 

as recorded chronologically on the transcript. 

Academic Status 

Clear Standing 

Students are in Clear Standing when they have 

passed all required credit courses, English for Specific 

Academic Purposes (ESAP) and Academic Preparatory 

courses and have attained a GPA of at least 2.0. 

Conditional Status 

Students are classified as in Conditional Standing 

when: 

• They have a cumulative grade point average between 

1.00 and 1.99 in any semester 

• They must clear course deficiencies in order to 

graduate (e.g. students who must successfully 

complete a failed course through supplementary 

examinations or repetition) 

OR 

• They fail an ESAP or Academic Preparatory course 

Students who are registered in credit courses and/or 

ESAP or Academic Preparatory courses and who fail 

one or more courses will receive conditional standing 

regardless of cumulative grade point average. 

Students are expected to attempt courses from 

previous semesters (if available) before registering 

for any new course and must consult with a faculty 

advisor and/or counsellor upon or before registration. 

Academic Dismissal 

Students will be academically dismissed if their 

cumulative grade point average is less than 1.0 and/or 

they have not passed a minimum of 40% of the credits 

they attempted in the semester. 

All students in credit programs are subject to the 

academic dismissal rules. Consult the Registrar’s 

Office for full details regarding rules and their 

interpretation. The College may waive the academic 

dismissal policy on a one-time forgiveness basis 

with a recommendation from the campus Academic 

Review Committee and in concurrence with the 

following: 

Students who are registered as full time and for the 

first time fail to achieve a cumulative grade point 

average of 1.0 and/or have not passed a minimum 

of 40% of the credits attempted in the semester will 

be given a standing of Academic Warning and will 

be permitted to register for the next semester. 

Students who have been placed on Academic Warning 

and fail a second time to either achieve a cumulative 

grade point average of 1.0 and/or a minimum of 40% 

of the credits attempted in any subsequent semester 

will be academically dismissed from the College.

31 


Students on Academic Warning will be allowed to 

continue under the following provisions: 

1. They are referred to a College counsellor and will 

participate in a review of their career/academic 

goals, developing learning strategies that will lead 

to success. 

2. An appropriate course load will be developed by 

the student in consultation with the academic 

advisor/counsellor. The maximum course load will 

not exceed 20 hours per semester for a student on 

Academic Warning. 

Re-Admission of Academically 

Dismissed Students 

1. Students who are academically dismissed from 

the College must apply for re-admission, and their 

names will be placed at the end of any existing 

waitlist. 

2. Applications from academically dismissed students 

to return to the College will be received at any time 

but students will not be accepted to return on a 

full-time basis until a six-month period from the 

date of dismissal has elapsed. 

3. Students who have been academically dismissed 

from a program on two or more occasions will not 

be eligible for re-admission to that program for a 

period of two years from the date of dismissal. 

Students will be permitted to register only for those 

courses for which prerequisites have been met. 

Students are reminded that for guidance and 

information on proper scholarly behaviour, they 

should seek advice from the counsellors, instructors, 

faculty advisors, or the Registrar’s Office. 

It is the policy of this College that all students will 

register for full-time programs at the beginning of 

each semester including the Intersession. 

Registration 

Date of Registration 

Students will register in person on the date and at 

the time and place prescribed and publicized by the 

College. 

Late Registration 

With permission, late registration may sometimes 

be acceptable up to two weeks after the last official 

registration day. However, students who are permitted 

to register beyond the official registration days 

(usually the first five days at the beginning of the 

semester) will be advised by the Dean as to course 

availability. 

Admission to Classes 

Students will not be admitted to a class until they 

have satisfied the regulations regarding entrance 

and complied with general College regulations. The 

number of courses constituting a normal semester 

workload for a student is determined by their program 

requirements. 

Extended Course Loads 

Students who wish to register for extra courses 

must make application to the appropriate program 

administrator. 

Attendance Policy and 

Procedure 

Students are expected to attend all classes and 

laboratories/workshops associated with courses, 

and attendance will be recorded by the instructor. 

Students who miss classes or labs/workshops 

are required to provide documentation upon their 

return to class. If the absence is due to illness, a 

medical note signed by a doctor and displaying an 

original doctor and hospital/clinic stamp must be 

presented to the Registrar’s Office for validation and 

acceptance not more than two days after the student 

returns to class. If the absence is for other reasons, 

documentation should be presented to the instructor 

when the student returns to class. Absences other 

than those supported by validated medical reports are 

excused at the discretion of the instructor. 

Students who exhibit chronic absenteeism may be 

referred to a counsellor by the instructor. 

Purpose and Scope 

The purpose of an attendance policy for students is 

to ensure they attend classes on a regular basis, as 

regular attendance increases learning opportunities 

and prepares them for the expectations around 

punctuality and attendance in the workplace. 

Advising students via SMS messaging who are not 

meeting the attendance expectations provides 

feedback that their behaviour is not acceptable and 

defines the consequences if the behaviour continues. 

Policy 

1. Students have a right to know, at the beginning 

of the course, the requirements regarding class 

attendance and punctuality in courses in which 

they are registered. 

2. Students are responsible for attending class and 

exercising punctuality.

32 


General Guidelines 

1. Students’ attendance is recorded by instructors 

daily. It is recorded as: 

Present (and can include Tardy and Left Early) 

Absent – excused 

Absent – medically excused 

Absent – unexcused 

2. Students absent for medical reasons must submit 

medical documents to the Registrar’s Office 

no later than two working (class) days after the 

student returns to class. 

3. Registrar’s Office accepts or declines medical 

certificates and records them in the student 

information system. 

4. For the purpose of attendance taking, each 

semester (Fall, Winter, Intersession) will be 

considered a separate block. 

Attendance guidelines 

Students who are absent 10% during the semester 

and who are failing 25% or more of the course hours 

attempted in a semester will be dismissed for one 

semester (upon the Dean’s approval). 

Exceptions and Attendance Probation 

1. Students in their first semester who are absent 

10% during the semester and who are failing 25% or 

more of the course hours attempted in a semester 

will be placed on attendance probation for one 

semester. 

2. Students who for the first time are absent 10% 

during the semester and who are failing 25% or 

more of the course hours attempted in a semester 

will be placed on attendance probation for one 

semester. 

3. Probation status is for one semester and one time 

only and students will not be eligible for probation 

again in subsequent semesters. 

Repeating a Course 

With the permission of the program administrator, 

students may repeat any course for which a passing 

grade has previously been awarded. The original 

passing grade will remain on the transcript and a 

second entry will be recorded with the new grade. 

The highest mark attained will be used in the 

calculation of the GPA. Space limitations and other 

considerations will determine approval. 

Independent Studies 

When required courses are not available in a particular 

semester, full-time students may make application to 

the program administrator to register for such courses 

through independent study. 

Applications must be processed within two weeks 

from the commencement of the term. 

Access to courses through independent study may 

be permitted when resources are available and with 

the permission of the program administrator and 

the program coordinator in consultation with the 

faculty. Strategies to ensure adherence to course 

requirements may be documented in contract format 

to be signed by the student, the course instructor, the 

program administrator and the program coordinator. 

Change of Registration 

Adding Courses 

The last date for adding courses is two weeks from 

the first day of classes in a 15-week semester and 

one week from the first day of classes in a 7-to 

10-week Intersession/Spring session. In extenuating 

circumstances during the 15-week semester, the 

two-week period for adding courses may be extended. 

Dropping Courses 

Courses may be dropped without academic prejudice 

up to the end of eight weeks from the first day of 

classes for a 15-week semester or the end of the 

second week in a 7-to 10-week Intersession/Spring 

session. If a course of 6 or 7 weeks in duration is 

offered in a 15-week semester, the drop date for that 

particular course will be the end of the second week. 

Students must complete the appropriate registration 

change form and all changes must be approved by the 

instructors concerned, the program administration, 

and the sponsors, where applicable. 

Program Transfer 

Students wishing to change their program of studies 

must apply for program transfer. 

• Applications for program transfer are available 

from the Registrar’s Office. Students must discuss 

their request with a counsellor and the program 

administrator and receive written approval from their 

sponsor. 

• Program transfers may be granted if there is space 

available and the appropriate counselling processes 

have been followed.

33 


Examinations and Tests 

Dates for midterms, finals, and supplementary 

examinations will be set in advance. No more than 

two midterm and final examinations will be scheduled 

for a student in a given 24-hour period. 

Student evaluation will be conducted on a continuous 

basis. The method of evaluation will be recommended 

in the official course description. Grades will be 

rounded in units of five. 

Instructors will not be permitted to give quizzes worth 

more than 10% of the total final mark in the two-week 

period prior to the start of semester examinations. As 

well, no previously unassigned work may be assigned 

in the last two weeks of the semester. This regulation 

does not apply to: 

1. Courses with no final semester examination. 

2. Laboratory examinations. 

3. Self-directed and modular courses. 

4. Courses with block teaching. 

5. Assignments given prior to this period that are 

due in the two weeks prior to examinations. 

6. Courses offered in Intersession (i.e. 5- to 7-week), 

for which the time frame will be one week prior to 

the start of examinations. 

Supplementary Examinations 

Supplementary examinations provide an opportunity 

for students in diploma programs to improve their 

standing in a course in which the passing grade is 50% 

and they have achieved a failing grade of 40% or 45% 

in any given semester. If the course passing grade is 

60%, students can write a supplementary examination 

if they have achieved a failing grade of 50% or 

55%. There are no supplementary examinations in 

Academic Preparatory and ESAP courses. 

For upgrading purposes, in their last semester of 

studies, students may be given an opportunity to write 

a supplementary examination for a course in which 

they have attained a passing mark of 50% or 55%. 

The grade attained in a supplementary examination 

will replace only the grade attained in the final 

examination for the course in question and will 

be combined with marks previously attained for 

term work. 

The following conditions must be met in order 

to qualify for supplementary examinations: 

1. Students may be eligible to write one 

supplementary examination per semester. 

2. Supplementary exams will not apply to any course 

in which the final exam is worth less than 30%. 

3. Supplementary exams will be written before the 

first day of registration for credit programs in a 

semester. 

4. Students must apply in writing for supplementary 

Exams as soon as possible after final grades are 

available. The deadline for application for a 

supplementary examination is 4:00pm on the day 

preceding the date of the supplementary exam. 

5. If the mark obtained in the supplementary exam is 

lower than the original mark obtained on the regular 

examination, the original mark will remain. 

6. Where circumstances warrant, supplementary 

examinations may be written off-campus. 

The Registrar’s Office must be contacted for 

permission and guidelines prior to the examination 

period. All costs associated with the administration 

of off-campus supplementary examinations will be 

borne by the student. 

Deferred Exams 

Students who are prevented by illness, bereavement, 

or other acceptable cause from writing a final 

examination, where one is scheduled, may apply 

for permission to write a deferred examination. The 

deferred examination is the final examination for the 

individual concerned. Where possible, deferred exams 

should be completed by the last day of exams/classes 

for that semester, or as soon as feasible thereafter. A 

request for deferred examinations must be submitted 

to the Registrar’s Office as soon as possible after the 

date on which the regular examination was scheduled. 

The request for a deferred exam will be assessed by 

the appropriate program administrator in consultation 

with faculty members. Students should note that 

permission to write deferred examinations is a 

privilege, not a right, granted solely on the basis 

of extenuating circumstances.

34 


Incomplete 

Subject to the approval of the appropriate program 

administrator, an incomplete grade may be assigned 

when the mandatory components of the course are 

not completed. Incompletes must be cleared by 

the end of the third week after the beginning of the 

subsequent semester. If incompletes are not cleared 

by this date, students will receive a failing grade. 

Reassessment of Grades 

Students who feel that they may not have been 

accurately assessed on any assignment, examination, 

term paper, or laboratory or shop exercise should, 

in the first instance, discuss the matter with the 

instructor teaching that course. This should be done 

within three instructional days of the receipt of the 

assessment. If this does not result in a satisfactory 

resolution, students may request that the matter be 

reviewed by the appropriate program administrator. 

If this action is taken, it must be done within five 

instructional days of receipt of the assessment. 

Unsatisfactory resolution of the dispute at this stage 

may enable students to request a review of the 

grade(s) by the Appeals Committee. Such an appeal 

should be made within ten days of receipt of the 

assessment. 

Re-Read of Final Examinations 

Students may apply to have a final examination 

paper re-read. 

An application for re-read must be made in writing 

to the Registrar’s Office within one month following 

the release of the marks. 

The mark obtained in a re-read stands as the official 

mark in the course and is used in all calculations of 

the student’s academic record. 

Aegrotat Standing 

Students who, through illness or other exceptional 

circumstances, have been absent from a scheduled 

final examination, or who have been unable to 

complete all of the required work in a course, may, on 

the recommendation of the counsellor, in consultation 

with the Program Administrator and faculty, be given 

credit for the course. 

Application for Aegrotat Standing with full details duly 

authenticated must be made to the Registrar’s Office 

within two weeks after the last day of examinations 

indicating each course for which the application is 

being made. 

Academic Documentation 

Transcripts, diplomas, and certificates will be 

withheld from a student who is in possession of 

College property such as books, equipment or 

supplies, or who has other obligations to the College. 

Grade Reports 

Grade reports will be issued at the end of each 

15-week semester and after Intersession/Spring 

session. Midterm grade reports will be issued for 

each 15-week semester. 

Transcripts/Records of Achievement 

a) Official transcripts/records of achievement may 

be obtained at any time from the Registrar’s Office. 

b) A transcript depicts the student’s complete 

academic record including awards and honours, 

warnings, suspensions, and dismissals. Questions 

or concerns about an official transcript should be 

directed to the Registrar. 

Academic Misconduct 

Students are reminded that for guidance and 

information on proper scholarly behaviour, they should 

seek advice from the counsellors, instructors, faculty 

advisors, or the Registrar’s Office. 

Student Appeals (Academic) 

All registered students of the College have the right 

to appeal decisions or rulings that affect them and 

that pertain to academic matters. Students wishing 

to appeal an academic decision must complete an 

appeal application (available from the Registrar’s 

Office) with information and documentation 

supporting their appeal. The deadline for submitting 

an appeal is the last day of registration in the 

semester following the academic decision being 

appealed. Appeals will be heard on the first day 

of classes. 

The Appeals Committee is comprised of the 

Registrar and the Dean of Student Affairs, who act 

as co-chairs,plus a student representative, one 

faculty representative from a department other than 

the department of the student who is presenting 

the appeal, and one Dean’s representative from a 

department other than the department of the student 

who is presenting the appeal. 

Student Appeals (Non-Academic) 

Normally, instructors, faculty advisors, and program 

coordinators, in full adherence to current policies and 

regulations, will expend every effort to resolve student 

disputes thereby avoiding the formal appeal process.

35 


The Appeals Committee is comprised of the 

Registrar and the Dean of Student Affairs, who act 

as co-chairs, plus a student representative, one 

faculty representative from a department other than 

the department of the student who is presenting 

the appeal, and one Dean’s representative from a 

department other than the department of the student 

who is presenting the appeal. 

The Registrar will set up the Committee to examine 

the evidence ensuring that all appropriate parties 

to the complaint are given an opportunity to appear 

before the Committee. Minutes of Appeals Committee 

meetings must be recorded and filed. The decision 

of the Committee will be final and must be conveyed 

in writing to the student with a copy to the Vice 

President, Academics within five working days from 

the receipt of the appeal. 

Awards and Scholarships 

The College offers opportunities to students in 

many programs to receive a number of scholarships, 

prizes and awards. Scholarships are monetary 

awards presented in recognition of specific academic 

achievement. Some scholarships do not require an 

application and are determined solely on students’ 

weighted averages. Other scholarships require 

an application and are determined on academic 

performance (weighted averages) coupled with other 

specific criteria determined by the donor such as 

financial need, contribution to College life, faculty 

recommendations, etc. Full information about 

scholarships and awards is available at the 

Registrar’s Office. 

College of the North Atlantic – Qatar Highest 

Achiever Scholarship 

Awarded to the highest academic achiever at the 

College of the North Atlantic – Qatar. The continuation 

of this award for the academic year is contingent upon 

academic performance after each term. 

Quantity: One from all program areas 

Value: Cash award of 20,000 QR paid in two 

installments in Fall and Winter (10,000 QR 

each). The student has to maintain the level 

required for the second payment. 

Award: Crystal and recognition certificate 

College of the North Atlantic – Qatar Highest 

Achiever of School Scholarship 

Quantity: One for the highest achiever in each of the 

following program areas: Business Studies, 

Engineering Technology, Health Sciences 

and Information Technology. 

Value: Cash award of 20,000 QR paid in two 

installments in Fall and Winter (10,000 

each). The student has to maintain the level 

required for the second payment. 

College of the North Atlantic EFL Award 

Quantity: Two – One male and one female 

Criteria: Nominated by faculty for outstanding 

performance in English as a Foreign 

Language 

Award: Plaque and recognition certificate 

Merit Award 

Awarded to the highest academic achiever, one 

female and one male, in Business Studies, Office 

Administration, Engineering Technology, Health 

Sciences and Information Technology programs. 

Quantity: Ten 

Award: Crystal and recognition certificate 

Value: 5,000 QR 

Leadership Recognition Award 

Quantity: One 

Criteria: General nomination for demonstrated 

outstanding leadership qualities 

Award: Recognition certificate 

CNA-Q – Student Representative 

Council Scholarship 

Applicants must use the official application form 

available at the Registrar’s Office. 

Quantity: Three 

Value: Cash award of 10,000 QR annually, 

disbursed in two payments of 5,000 QR 

Glen Cameron Memorial Scholarship 

This scholarship is available to non-national students 

enrolled in full-time studies in the Telecommunications 

Engineering Technology diploma program at College 

of the North Atlantic – Qatar. Candidates must have 

completed at least three semesters in their program 

of study, and be in good academic standing with a 

GPA of at least 2.5. 

Quantity: One 

Award: Cash award of 10,000 QR and recognition 

certificate

36 


ExxonMobil – Qatar Scholarship 

ExxonMobil supports and encourages academic 

excellence in all areas of post-secondary education. 

These scholarships will be awarded on the basis of a 

student’s academic achievements, personal suitability 

and enthusiasm for their fields of study. 

Quantity: Can change from year to year (usually 

between seven and ten awards annually) 

Award: Cash award of 10,000 QR and recognition 

certificate 

Honour Standing and Honour Society Criteria 

Criteria for Honour Standing as follows: 

• Student must be in Clear Standing 

• Student must a term GPA of 4.00 (not cumulative GPA) 

• Student must be enrolled in four or more credit 

courses for 15-week term (Fall and Winter) 

• Student must be enrolled in two or more credit 

courses for 7-week term (Intersession) 

• If the student is enrolled in more than four credit 

courses and one preparatory course in a term, the 

preparatory course must have a grade of at least 

80% since GPA of 4.00 equates to a grade of 80% 

• If the student is enrolled in one credit course plus a 

work term in Intersession, then the work term is also 

considered as a credit course even though the work 

term has no credit value 

• If the student is enrolled in a clinical course 

of 35 hours per week for a 15-week or 7-week 

semester, this is considered to meet the enrollment 

requirement for eligibility in the Honour Society 

President’s Award for Academic Excellence 

The College has established a President’s Award of 

Excellence to be awarded at the annual Graduation 

Ceremony to one student in each program who attains 

the highest academic standing in their program. The 

student will also receive a certificate. 

Weighted Average 

A student’s weighted average can be defined as the 

sum of a course grade multiplied by the course value 

(credit), divided by the sum of the course values (all 

credits). It can be calculated as follows: 

1. Take the final grades achieved in all courses 

and multiply them by the credit values for each 

particular course. For example: 

• Course grade of 80% multiplied by credit value 

of course 4 equals 320 


of 3 equals 210 


of 2 equals 120 

2. Calculate the sum of course grades and course 

credit values. For example, the sum of course 

grades is 320+210+120=650. The sum of the 

course credit values is 4+3+2=9. 

3. Divide the sum of course grades by the total 

number of credits. For example, 650÷9=72.22. 

Courses that are not included in the requirements for 

graduation will not be included in the calculation of 

the weighted average. 

Candidates must have attained a passing grade in 

ALL courses being considered in establishing 

weighted average. Marks obtained in supplementary 

exams will be considered in the calculation of the 

weighted average. 

In cases where the student repeats a course, 

the best earned grade will stand for calculation of 

the weighted average. 

Documentation 

Awards and scholarships administered by the College 

will be recorded on the recipient’s academic record. 

Tuition and Fees 

Regulations Governing Payment of Fees 

and Charges 

Student Fees 

a) All student fees must be paid prior to or at the time 

of registration. Student assistance for payment of 

tuition and fees may be considered upon request. 

b) Should the College cancel a program, all fees will 

be refunded. 

c) Students who have a fee balance owing from 

a previous semester will be required to pay 

the total sum in three equal installments during 

the subsequent semester, including the 

Intersession term. 

d) Students who have not paid all fees within the 

time limits stated in these regulations may have 

their registration cancelled by the College.

37 


Tuition and Fees for Full-Time Students 

Students enrolled for fifteen hours or more are 

considered full-time students. 

Application Processing Fee 

Fee: 100 QR (non-refundable) 

The application fee will be paid by the applicant 

at the time the application is received. 

Entrance and Placement Assessment Testing 

Fee: 200 QR (non-refundable) 

The entrance and placement assessment fee 

will be paid when the applicant writes the 

mandatory entrance examinations. These fees 

are non-refundable. 

Applications received from sponsors will be 

processed and the fees will be charged to the 

sponsor’s account. 

Student Service Fee 

Fee: 150 QR 

This is an annual fee and is payable at the time 

of registration. 

Materials and Supplies Fee 

Fee: 150 QR 

This fee is payable by all full-time students at the 

beginning of each semester for an annual total of 

300 QR. 

Work Term Fee 

A work term fee is charged if the work term is the only 

course enrolled in during the Fall or Winter Semester. 

Different work term fees are paid for different 

programs. Consult the Work Term Coordinator at 

4495-2085. 

If the student has been enrolled on a part-time basis 

during the Fall or Winter Semester, then he/she 

will be required to pay the work term fee during the 

Intersession or Summer Semester registration. 

Tuition for Non-Sponsored Students 

Per year: 20,000 QR 

(10,000 QR per semester) 

Tuition for Intersession/Summer terms: 2,000 QR 

per course to a maximum of 6,000 QR 

Tuition is paid in two equal installments. The first 

installment is due at the time of registration for the 

Fall Semester. The second installment is due at the 

time of registration for the Winter Semester. 

Tuition for Sponsored Students 

Per year: 30,000 QR 

(15,000 QR per semester) 

Sponsored students do not pay tuition fees at the time 

of registration. The College verifies their sponsorship 

at the time of registration and collects the tuition fee 

from the sponsor. 

If the student is full time during Fall and/or Winter 

Semesters and his/her fees were paid in full, 

no payment will be required for courses in the 

Intersession and Summer terms. 

Tuition and Fees for Part-Time Students 

Students who are registered in fewer than 15 hours 

per week are considered part-time students. 

Entrance and Placement Assessment Testing Fee 

200 QR (non-refundable) 

The entrance and placement assessment fee will 

be paid when the applicant writes the mandatory 

examination. These fees are non-refundable. 

Applications received from sponsors will be 

processed and the fees will be charged to the 

sponsor’s account. 

Student Service Fee 

Fee: 150 QR 

This fee is payable at the time of registration. 

Materials and Supplies 

Fee: 25 QR per course 

Tuition 

Non-sponsored students: 2,000 QR tuition per course 

Sponsored students: 3,000 QR tuition per course 

Intersession/Summer Term 

Sponsored students: 

3,000 QR per course (maximum of three courses) 

7,500 QR (EFL course) 

Non-sponsored students: 

2,000 QR per course (maximum of three courses) 

5,000 QR (EFL course)

38 


Refunds 

Students are responsible for initiating their own 

refunds and are required to complete the Student 

Revenue Refund Form. Forms are available from the 

Registrar’s Office. All tuition refunds will be issued 

by cheque. Any refunds will be applied against 

outstanding accounts before any money is returned 

to the student. 

Refunds – 15-Week Semester 

A student who withdraws or drops a course or 

courses within the first two weeks of any 

15-week semester will receive a full refund. If the 

withdrawal/dropping takes place within three to six 

weeks of registration in a 15-week semester, the 

refund will be prorated and the student will be liable 

for the number of weeks enrolled. No refund will be 

made after the sixth week of classes. 

Refunds – 7- to 10-Week Semester 

A student who withdraws or drops a course or 

courses within the first week of Intersession (7 to 10 

weeks) will receive a full refund. If the withdrawal/ 

dropping takes place within two to three weeks in a 

7- to 10-week semester, the refund will be prorated 

and the student will be liable for the number of weeks 

enrolled. No refund will be made after the third week 

of classes. 

Textbooks 

Refunds will be given for returned textbooks under 

the following conditions: 

a) Books are unmarked and in saleable condition 

b) Books are returned within the first three weeks 

after the first day of classes 

c) Original receipts are presented before a refund 

is issued 

Financial Appeals 

Appeals of a financial assessment should be made 

in writing to the Controller. 

Receipts are issued for any financial transactions 

with the College. Students should ensure that they 

obtain and save these receipts for use in resolving 

any financial conflicts. In the absence of such 

documentation, the College financial records will 

provide the basis for decisions.

39 

STUDENT AFFAIRS 

Student Affairs 

The goal of the Department of Student Affairs is to 

ensure student success. With this in mind, the 

professional staff within the department work to 

establish and sustain an environment in which 

students can learn, develop holistically and thrive. 

Several units make up the Department of Student 

Affairs, including Counselling, Student Development, 

Athletics and Recreation, Alumni and Recruitment 

and International Education. 

The following people at the Student Affairs Office 

can assist you: 

Dean of Student Affairs 

Dean’s Assistant of 

4495-2016 

Student Affairs 4495-2015 

Alumni and 

Recruitment Officer 4495-2019 

Career Counselling and 

Resource Centre Coordinator 4495-2432 

Recreation Manager 4495-2131 

Student Life Coordinator 4495-2132 

International Education 

Coordinator 

4495-2370 

Library Manager 4495-2045

40 

STUDENT AFFAIRS

41 


Student Affairs 

Counselling and Personal Development 

We employee nine full-time student counsellors 

who provide personal, academic, and career 

counselling. Our counsellors are also responsible for 

all institutional orientation activities. In addition, they 

provide a wide variety of workshops and awareness 

campaigns that focus on a variety of important issues. 

Student Development 

There are three Student Development Officers 

who work with students to plan special events and 

activities on campus such as Garangaoh, Iftar meals 

and Global Village. This department also works 

closely with the Student Representative Council. 

Students and/or potential students are encouraged 

to contact the Department of Student Affairs at the 

campus to find out more about the services available. 

More detailed information regarding the initiatives 

supported by Student Affairs can be found in the 

Student Handbook. 

Recreation 

We offer students many opportunities to participate 

in a wide variety of athletic and recreational activities 

including football, basketball, volleyball, badminton, 

dance, aerobics, water polo, swimming, martial arts, 

tennis, and weight training. Our facilities include male 

and female gymnasiums, weight rooms, and aquatics 

facilities. 

International Education 

The International Education Office supports the 

College community in developing and assisting with 

administration of international programs; promoting 

cultural awareness; and providing assistance to 

visiting and local students looking for adventure 

abroad. Activities may include but are not limited to: 

full semester exchanges; credit coursework at partner 

institutions; instructor-led short-term study abroad 

programs; work site visits and internships. 

CNA-Q offers opportunities to learn, grow, try new 

things, meet interesting people, and gain a new 

understanding of yourself and the world. It can 

be a life-changing adventure. The benefits of an 

international education experience include: 

• Expanding cultural awareness 

• Strengthening language skills 

• Building confidence 

• Increasing intellectual knowledge in field of study, 

the global work environmental change, and social 

development in a cultural context 

Alumni 

After graduation, our alumni are encouraged to join 

the CNA-Q Alumni Association to continue their 

relationship with the College as graduates. Alumni 

members attend special meetings on campus, 

participate in planning events and activities, and make 

use of various services on campus. 

Library 

The library is managed by professional staff and 

provides research and supplementary resources for 

all programs taught at the College. The collection 

includes a comprehensive selection of print 

and electronic reference and circulating books; 

newspapers; magazines and journals (in both print 

and electronic formats); DVDs; and audiovisual 

materials. Individual and group study rooms with flat 

screen monitors, student computers, and laptops 

for use in the library are available at the library. 

The library provides general and specialized tours, 

workshops, and one-on-one sessions for both faculty 

and students. 

Learning Commons 

The Learning Commons supports student learning 

objectives and achievements across the curriculum 

in an integrated, collaborative environment. The 

Commons provides open and closed group study 

space, student computers, an IT lab, and an electronic 

and print research and reading library collection. 

Services in the Learning Commons include remedial 

help in the areas of mathematics and communication 

skills. These centres also have a wide array of career 

resource materials, including computer interactive 

career education programs. 

Advanced Writing Centre 

The Advanced Writing Centre is an initiative of the 

School of Language Studies and Academics to assist 

all program students at CNA-Q with any of their 

writing needs. 

Math Help Centre 

The Math Help Centre is an initiative of the School of 

Language Studies and Academics to contribute to the 

success of our students by providing extra help for 

those who need it. 

Independent Learning Centre 

The Independent Learning Centre is an initiative of 

the School of Language Studies and Academics to 

assist students at CNA-Q with their English studies by 

providing extra help for those who need it.

42 


Career Counselling and Resources 

The Career Counselling and Resources Centre aims 

to assist students with their career planning process. 

To achieve this goal, the Centre will provide a multitude 

of services that include but are not limited to: 

1 Matching students with careers to which they are 

best suited, based on their interests, aptitudes, 

personality, values etc. 

2. Delivering presentations/workshops on resume/ 

cover letter writing, job search skills and interview 

preparation. 

3. Housing an extensive and up-to-date collection of 

resources related to career development. 

Bookstore 

Textbooks are available at the College Bookstore 

and should be obtained after consultation with your 

instructor. 

Prayer Centre 

Prayer rooms are available to students throughout 

the College. 

Harassment Policy 

It is the policy of the College that all registered 

students have the right to pursue their studies and 

related activities free from personal harassment from 

College employees, agents of the College, or other 

students. See the Student Handbook for the full 

description of this policy. 

Student Handbook 

The College publishes a Student Handbook annually. 

This Handbook includes many useful tips for students. 

A copy of this handbook is provided free of charge to 

each student either in paper or electronic copy. 

Code of Conduct 

CNA-Q Policy SS-201-Q (under review), Articles 3.1.1 

through 3.1.25, identify and define specific rights and 

responsibilities of students. Students are encouraged 

to refer to the Student Handbook for full details. 

Appeal 

All registered students of the College may appeal 

a decision or ruling that affects them as it pertains 

to academic matters, attendance related issues, 

matters of student discipline, and student rights and 

responsibilities. 

The College believes that student complaints and 

concerns should be addressed in a timely and fair 

manner; therefore, a student-initiated grievance 

procedure will be followed. Counsellors, Program 

Chairs, and Deans can provide assistance with this 

process. Consult the Student Handbook for additional 

information. 

Student Parking 

There are many spacious parking lots adjacent to 

all buildings at CNA-Q. Some are shared by faculty 

and students; others are designated specifically 

for students. Failure to park in designated areas, 

or parking in special spaces (such as handicapped 

parking stalls), may result in suspension from the 

College or other penalties as described in the Student 

Rights and Responsibilities Policy.

43 

ACADEMIC PREPARATORY STUDIES 

Academic Preparatory Studies 

Academic Preparatory Studies ensure student 

success in educational programs that meet 

international certification requirements. It also 

ensures that students are eligible for Canadian 

credentials upon completion of their studies. These 

courses are designed to provide secondary school 

graduates who are weak in English language skills, 

mathematics and science with the enhancements 

required to succeed in their program of studies.

44 

ACADEMIC PREPARATORY STUDIES

45 



In Academic Preparatory Studies, students will be 

provided with support that: 

1. Provides academic bridging for students who do 

not meet entrance requirements. 

2. Provides English language proficiency training 

tailored to individual need. 

Academic preparatory courses will be offered in the 

following disciplines: 

• Biology 

• Chemistry 

• English as a Foreign Language 

• Mathematics 

• Physics 

Entrance Requirements 

Students wishing to register at the College are 

required to achieve a designated score on the College 

entrance examinations in English and mathematics. 

CNA-Q Testing Centre 

The CNA-Q Testing Centre conducts all Academic and 

General English and Math Entrance and Placement 

tests, as well as exit testing for the college. 

Guidelines for CAEL Testing at the 1080 Level 

At the end of FL1080, students must: 

1. Pass the FL1080 course with an overall mark of 

70% or above. 

2. Attempt CAEL. 

Students who obtain an overall Band 40 on the exam 

with no band less than 30 achieve advanced placement 

and move directly into the Communications course for 

their Academic Program. 

Students must pass FL1080 with a minimum grade 

of 70% in order to proceed to FL1090. 

Guidelines for CAEL Testing at the 1090 Level 

All students at the FL1090 level will be required to 

obtain an overall Band 40 on the CAEL exam with 

no band less than 30. Students in FL1090 will be 

provided preparation for the CAEL within their course 

instruction and must write this exam as part of the 

requirements for the FL1090 course. 

Students must pass FL1090 with a minimum grade 

of 70% and obtain a Band 40 on the CAEL with no 

band less than 30 in order to proceed to their chosen 

program. Any student who fails FL1090 with no band 

less than 30 must repeat the course. Any student 

who passes FL1090 with no band less than 30 but 

fails to obtain the required Band 40 will be required to 

successfully complete FL1095 with a Band 40 and no 

band less than 30 on the CAEL. 

For further information on these tests, test times, 

and fees, please call 4495-2741 or visit Building 3, 

Floor 2, Room 2.73 between 7:30am and 3:00pm, 

Sunday to Thursday, and between 9:00am and 

3:00pm on Saturdays. 

English Placement 

Based on the program of study, applicants will write 

either the Academic Entrance and Placement (AEP) 

test series or the General Entrance and Placement 

(GEP) test series. Applicants who meet the English 

language entrance requirements may be directly 

admitted to their program of choice, subject to 

availability. Those requiring English language training 

may be placed in Language Studies. 

Math Placement 

Students must write a Math Placement test before 

registering in any mathematics course. Based on their 

program of study, students will be directly placed in 

mathematics courses according to their result on the 

College Math Placement test. 

The Academic Math Placement test (AMP) is completed 

by those entering regular credit programs and the 

General Math Placement test (GMP) is completed by 

those entering the TPP program. 

Academic Dismissal 

Students may attempt a CNA-Q preparatory course 

three times. In accordance with College policy, after 

three unsuccessful attempts, a student will receive 

academic dismissal for a period of one semester. 

A student who returns to the College and fails the 

same preparatory course for a fourth time will be 

academically dismissed for a second time and will 

be eligible to return after a period of one year.

46 


English for Specific Academic Purposes (ESAP) 

College of the North Atlantic – Qatar, through the 

School of Language Studies and Academics, offers 

an English for Specific Academic Purposes (ESAP) 

curriculum. As a bridge between language needs 

and technical programs, ESAP at the College is 

based on students’ needs and the College’s program 

requirements. It is a learning process where students 

acquire both general English and program-specific 

language skills. 

This program was developed in collaboration with 

College departments. ESAP courses focus on 

listening, speaking, reading, writing, and vocabulary 

development and are offered at multiple levels 

and degrees of intensity. Students enrolled in 

ESAP courses at higher levels may take academic 

preparatory and/or program courses concurrently. 

The ESAP courses are intended: 

1. To serve the general language needs of students of 

any nationality. 

2. To support the language needs of students 

destined for specific College programs. 

3. To prepare students for participation in the global 

economy. 

The ESAP streams respond to the needs of each 

program area. The language courses range from 

intermediate to advanced language levels. The ESAP 

streams are: 

• Business Studies 

• Engineering Technology 

• Health Sciences 

• Information Technology 

• Security 

• Technician Preparatory Program (TPP)

47 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS STUDIES 

School of Business Studies 

The School of Business Studies prepares students 

to enter the world of work, equipping them for 

employment with any organization, company or 

government agency. Our programs provide students 

with expertise in a range of business disciplines, 

including office administration, general management, 

business strategy and planning, banking and finance, 

accounting, marketing and human resources. 

Students in Business Studies have the option 

of completing programs in Office Administration, 

Business Administration and Business Management. 

Students pursuing careers as administrative 

professionals can undertake a certificate in Office 

Administration or a diploma in Office Administration 

(Executive). Students who would like to specialize 

in accounting, human resource management, or 

marketing may obtain a diploma in Business 

Administration or Business Management.

48 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS STUDIES

49 


School of Business Studies 


Based on placement test scores on the College 

entrance examinations for English and mathematics, 

students may automatically be placed in preparatory 

business courses in addition to preparatory math 

and language studies courses. These courses are 

designed to provide enhancements required to 

succeed in their business program of studies. 

Accreditation 

The Office Administration (Executive), Business 

Administration and Business Management 

programs at the College have been accredited by 

the Accreditation Council for Business Schools and 

Programs (ACBSP). Founded in 1988 in the United 

States, ACBSP awards accreditation to business 

schools based on the mission of the institution and 

of the business program with an emphasis on 

quality in teaching and learning outcomes. ACBSP 

is recognized by the Council for Higher Education 

Accreditation (CHEA). 

Students in these programs can be assured of the 

quality of the education they receive. Accreditation 

means that these programs have been evaluated 

against an international standard of excellence and 

that the programs maintain relevant and current 

program content taught by well-qualified faculty. 

Baccalaureate Degree Options 

For those wishing to pursue a baccalaureate degree, 

university transfer agreements are in place that 

makes it possible for College diploma graduates to 

attend universities in other countries. A variety of 

options are available. 

These include: 

• Athabasca University, Canada 

• Cape Breton University, Canada 

• Memorial University of Newfoundland, Canada 

• Northwood University, USA 

• Teesside University, UK 

• University of Bradford, UK 

• University of New Brunswick, Canada 

For more information, please refer to the Program 

Articulation and Transfer Credit section in this 

Academic Calendar. 

Program Options 

One Year Certificate* 



Two Year Diploma* 

Business Administration – Accounting 

Business Administration – Human Resource 

Management 

Business Administration – Marketing 


Three Year Diploma* 

Business Management – Accounting 

Business Management – Human Resource Management 

Business Management – Marketing 

* Total program length varies depending on language 

proficiency, academic preparatory courses required 

for entry, and academic performance throughout the 

program of study.

50 



Program 

The Diploma in Business Management – Accounting 

has been developed to achieve competencies 

required in the field of general financial accounting. 

Management now requires personnel with skills 

to provide complex analysis and to produce 

comprehensive reports. 

Upon completion of this program, students will be 

capable of performing most accounting functions in 

small and large businesses and at various levels of 

government. 

Objectives 

1. To prepare and analyze financial statements for 

internal and external decision making. 

2. To develop financial and budgetary plans based 

on varying business objectives, changing 

business environments, and underlying business 

assumptions. 

3. To demonstrate accounting skills for securing 

employment in an entry-level accounting position. 

4. To use current technology to analyze results and 

generate appropriate reports. 

5. To integrate business concepts for effective 

business planning and strategic management. 

6. To demonstrate skills and knowledge that will 

increase their success as entrepreneurs. 

Career Opportunities 

Graduates may obtain employment in a variety 

of businesses, organizations and government 

departments. The following is a brief list of the 

positions that graduates may occupy after successful 

completion of the program: 

• Accountant 

• Comptroller 

• Auditor 

• Business analyst 

• Taxation officer 

• Financial officer 

• Administrative manager 

• Payroll officer 


1. High school graduation certificate with the 

following: 

Average Minimum 60% 

English Language 

(Grade 12 level) 

Academic Mathematics 


OR 

Advanced Mathematics 

(Grade 12 level or equivalent) 

Three additional courses 

at the Grade 12 level 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 50% 

2. Completion of the College of the North Atlantic – 

Qatar mandatory placement assessment 


Note: Applicants who do not meet the entrance 

requirements and are 19 years of age or older, may 

be considered on an individual basis under the Mature 

Student Clause. Page 23 refers to the Mature Student 

Requirements in the Admissions section.

51 



Program Transferability 

The Business Management – Accounting program 

allows exit points after completion of Certificate, 

Administration Diploma or Management Diploma 

levels. 

1. Business Administration Certificate 

Students may complete an initial concentration of 

business courses and a two-week work exposure, 

leading to a Certificate in Business Administration. 

2. Business Administration Diploma 

Students may continue beyond the Business 

Administration Certificate level program by 

selecting an area of specialization from one of the 

following options: Accounting, Human Resource 

Management or Marketing. Upon successful 

completion of this area of concentration, along with 

a six-week work exposure, students may graduate 

with a Diploma in Business Administration. 

3. 

Business Management Diploma 

Students may continue even further in their 

area of specialization by completing additional 

courses beyond the Administration Diploma level. 

Successful completion of these courses will allow 

students to graduate with a Diploma in Business 

Management. 

Accreditation 

The Business Administration – Accounting and 

Business Management – Accounting Diploma 

programs at the College are accredited by the 

Accreditation Council for Business Schools and 

Programs (ACBSP). 

Further Studies 

Graduates of the Business Administration and 

Business Management programs may have the 

opportunity to transfer credits to institutions 

such as: 



• Lakehead University, Canada 



• Royal Roads University, Canada 

• Saint Mary’s University, Canada 



• University of Lethbridge, Canada 


• University of Wales, Newport, UK 




Graduates may also wish to further their studies to 

achieve professional designations with: 

• Association of Chartered Certified 

Accountants (UK) 

• Canadian Institute of Financial Planning 

• Canadian Professional Sales Association 

• Canadian Public Relations Society 

• Certified General Accountants Association 

of Canada 

• Society of Management Accountants of Canada

52 



Level 1 – Business Administration Certificate 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

AC1260 Financial Accounting I 5 4 3 

CM1240 Business Communications I 4 4 0 

HN1230 Human Resource Management I 3 3 1 

MA1400 Mathematics of Finance I 3 3 1 

MC1240 Computer Applications I 3 2 2 

MR1100 Marketing I 4 4 0 

SD1340 Student, Career and Portfolio Development I 1 1 0 

AC2260 Financial Accounting II 5 4 3 

CM1241 Business Communications II 4 4 0 

HN1240 Human Resource Management II 3 3 1 

LW1240 Qatar Business Law 3 3 0 

MA2400 Mathematics of Finance II 3 3 1 

MR2100 Marketing II 4 4 0 

SD1341 Student, Career and Portfolio Development II 1 1 0 

AC2230 Computerized Accounting I 3 2 3 

CM2200 Oral Communications 2 2 0 

MC1241 Computer Applications II 3 2 3 

OJ1100 Work Exposure (Certificate only) 2 weeks 

After the successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Business 

Administration Certificate.

53 



Level 2 – Business Administration Diploma – Accounting 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

AC2220 Intermediate Financial Accounting I 5 3 5 

AC2250 Managerial Accounting I 4 3 2 

AC2231 Computerized Accounting II 3 2 2 

EC1110 Microeconomics 4 4 0 

MA1670 Statistics 4 4 1 

CM2300 Report Writing 2 2 0 

AC2370 Principles of Taxation 4 4 1 

AC3220 Intermediate Financial Accounting II 5 3 5 

AC3250 Managerial Accounting II 4 3 2 

AC2360 Principles of Internal Auditing 3 2 2 

PS2340 Organizational Behaviour 4 4 0 

SD2360 Student, Career and Portfolio 

Development III – Accounting 

2 2 0 

OJ1580 Work Exposure – Accounting 6 weeks 


Administration Diploma – Accounting.

54 



Level 3 – Business Management Diploma – Accounting 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

AC2340 Principles of Auditing 4 3 3 

EP2250 Small Business Development 4 3 2 

FN2110 Business Finance 4 3 2 

MN2600 Strategic Management 3 2 2 

Option course (Minimum 3 credits, selected from list below) 

AC3251 Managerial Accounting III 4 4 1 

EC1210 Macroeconomics 4 4 0 

EP2200 Business Planning 4 2 5 

MA3700 Production and Operations Management 4 4 1 


Development IV – Accounting 

Option course (Minimum 3 credits, selected from list below) 

1 1 0 

Options will be selected from the following list by each campus after consultation with the students and/or local 

industry. Please note that all courses may not be available at each campus. 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

AC2540 Oil and Gas Production Accounting 4 3 2 

FN2111 Business Finance II 4 3 2 

AC2370 Principles of Taxation 4 3 1 

HN2200 Strategic Compensation and Benefits 3 3 1 

MN1520 Supervisory Leadership 4 4 0 

FN2160 Investments – An Overview 4 4 1 

BK1100 Banking Operations I 4 4 0 


Management Diploma – Accounting.

55 




Program 

The Diploma in Business Management – Human 

Resource Management has been designed to provide 

students with insight into the theory and practice 

of effective human resource management. The 

program seeks to provide the student with a broad 

understanding of fundamental business principles 

and practices essential to effective and efficient 

management. The program is designed to provide 

students with an opportunity to pursue a career 

in human resource management, supervision and 

general management. 

Objectives 

1. To provide students with a broad understanding 

of fundamental business principles and practices 

essential to efficient and effective management. 

2. To develop skills in various key areas of human 

resource management such as recruitment, 

selection, training and development, performance 

management, and compensation. 

3. To develop leadership, teamwork and problem 

solving skills. 

4. To introduce various aspects of computerized 

information technology. 

5. To develop an appreciation for the entrepreneurial 

process, particularly as it relates to small business 

development. 

6. To provide students with an opportunity to 

integrate classroom study with relevant work 

experience. 


Graduates of the program may obtain employment 

in a variety of areas, such as private business, 

government, industry, consulting agencies, 

institutions and associations. The following is a brief 

list of the positions that graduates may occupy after 

successful completion of the program: 

• Recruitment/selection officer 

• Personnel officer 

• Training and development officer 

• Compensation/benefits specialist 

• Employee assistance coordinator 

• Labour relations officer 

• Professional development officer 

• Human resource officer 

• Personnel manager 

• Manager of human resources 

• Classification officer 

• Other business-related occupation 



following: 






OR 





Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 50% 









56 





The Business Management – Human Resources 

Management program allows exit points after 

completion of Certificate, Administration Diploma 

or Management Diploma levels. 

1. 

Business Administration Certificate 










completion of this area of concentration along with 



3. Business Management Diploma 






Management. 

Accreditation 

The Business Administration – Human Resource 

Management and Business Management – Human 

Resource Management Diploma programs at the 

College are accredited by the Accreditation Council 

for Business Schools and Programs (ACBSP). 




opportunity to transfer credits to institutions such as: 


























57 





HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 





















58 




Level 2 – Business Administration Diploma – Human Resource Management 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 



OF1400 Managing an Office 3 3 1 

HN2130 Recruitment and Selection 3 3 1 

HN2150 Training and Development 3 3 1 


MR2300 Business Research 4 3 2 

AC2640 Managerial Accounting for Non-Accounting Majors 4 3 2 

SE1130 Workplace Safety for Human Resources 3 3 0 

Business Elective (Minimum 3 credits) 

HN2230 Employee Relations 3 3 1 


SD2340 Student, Career and Portfolio Development III 2 2 0 

Elective (Minimum 3 credits) 

OJ1550 Work Exposure (HRM) 6 weeks 


Administration Diploma – Human Resource Management.

59 




Level 3 – Business Management Diploma – Human Resource Management 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 



HN2140 Attendance and Disability Management 3 3 1 

HN2200 Strategic Compensation and Benefits 3 3 1 




HN2310 Alternate Dispute Resolution 4 4 0 

HN2210 Human Resource Planning 3 3 1 

HN3110 Current Topics in Human Resource Management 

and Industrial Relations 

3 3 1 

MN3100 Business Ethics 3 3 1 

MN3200 Performance Management 3 3 1 


Development IV – Human Resource Management 

1 1 0 


Management Diploma – Human Resource Management.

60 



Program 

The Diploma in Business Management – Marketing 

is designed to give students a background in 

business management, with emphasis on the area of 

marketing. Students acquire a solid understanding of 

the practices involved in marketing and promoting a 

product or service. This includes advertising, market 

research, professional selling, distribution, business 

planning and customer relations. 

Objectives 

1. To provide students with an in-depth understanding 

of activities involved in the management of 

organizations. 

2. To develop skills in selected key areas of 

management activity such as marketing, 

advertising, promotion, retailing and services. 

3. To develop a capacity for leadership, teamwork and 

cooperation in problem solving. 

4. To acquire skills, knowledge and experience that 

complement personal initiative, creativity and 

energy to ensure a successful career. 

5. To relate management studies to the needs of the 

public and private sectors of the economy. 


Graduates may obtain employment in a variety 

of businesses, organizations and government 

departments. The following is a brief list of the 

positions that graduates may occupy after successful 

completion of the program: 

• Advertising manager 

• Account executive 

• Account coordinator 

• Brand manager 

• Sales representative 

• Customer service representative 



following: 






OR 





Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 50% 








Requirements in the Admissions section. 


The Business Management – Marketing program 

allows exit points after completion of Certificate, 

Administration Diploma or Management Diploma 

levels. 

1. Business Administration Certificate 










completion of this area of concentration along with 



3. Business Management Diploma 






Management.

61 



Accreditation 

The Business Administration – Marketing and Business 

Management – Marketing Diploma programs at the 

College are accredited by the Accreditation Council 

for Business Schools and Programs (ACBSP). 






























62 




HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 





















63 



Level 2 – Business Administration Diploma – Marketing 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 




MR1500 Consumer Behaviour 3 3 0 

MR1600 Professional Selling 4 3 2 

MR2300 Business Research 4 3 2 


EC1210 Macroeconomics 4 4 0 

EP2150 Entrepreneurship 3 3 0 

MR2200 Retailing 3 2 3 

MR2350 E-Business 4 3 2 

MR2400 Marketing Communications 4 3 2 

PR2170 Project Management 2 2 1 


Development III – Marketing 

2 2 0 

OJ1560 Work Exposure – Marketing 6 weeks 


Administration Diploma – Marketing.

64 



Level 3 – Business Management Diploma – Marketing 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 




MR2450 Services Marketing 3 2 2 

MR2800 Business-to-Business Marketing 3 2 2 



MR2620 Sales Management 4 4 0 

MR2700 International Marketing 4 4 0 

MR3100 Current Topics in Marketing 3 3 1 



Development IV – Marketing 


1 1 0 


Management Diploma – Marketing.

65 



Program 

Graduates from the Office Administration Certificate 

program acquire knowledge and office skills for 

entry-level employment in the office of today. 

Graduates may obtain employment as an entry-level 

administrative assistant, office clerk, data entry clerk 

or word processing operator. 

The Office Administration (Executive) Diploma 

program is designed to enable students to acquire the 

knowledge and skills needed to work as administrative 

assistants in today’s modern office. 

The major components of the program include 

document production, transcription and office 

management. Related courses include communications, 

computerized accounting, computer applications 

and organizational behaviour. 

Objectives 

1. Demonstrate a positive attitude in a business 

environment to help ensure successful integration 

into the workplace. 

2. Independently organize and manage the activities 

of an administrative workplace environment for 

effective and efficient performance. 

3. Demonstrate effective written and oral 

communication skills for use in the business 

environment. 

4. Utilize effective interpersonal and teamwork skills 

to adapt to various business/community working 

environments. 

5. Conduct research; analyze and present relevant 

data for use in a business environment. 

6. Record financial transactions using generally 

accepted accounting principles for use in a 

business environment. 

7. Utilize and integrate technology to produce 

business documents at an advanced level using 

standard document formatting guidelines. 


Graduates may expect to find employment 

opportunities in the public and private sectors, 

including all levels of government, legal and medical 

offices, accounting firms, hospital and education 

facilities, and general business offices. As well as 

acquiring the skills and knowledge necessary to 

become effective employees in today’s electronic 

office, graduates gain insight into the creation of a 

small business of their own. 

Graduates are trained for the following 

specific positions: 

• Administrative assistant 

• Word processing operator 

• Computerized bookkeeping 

• Data processor or transcriptionist 

• Microcomputer specialist 

• As well as additional employment opportunities 

depending on electives selected 


1. High school graduation certificate 










The Office Administration Program offers exit points 

after the completion of Certificate or Diploma Levels. 

Students may graduate with an Office Administration 

Certificate after the completion of the initial 

concentration of Office Administration courses. 

Accreditation 

The Office Administration (Executive) Diploma 

program at the College is accredited by the 

Accreditation Council for Business Schools and 

Programs (ACBSP).

66 



Level 1 – Office Administration Certificate 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

AC1100 Bookkeeping I 4 3 2 

CM1100 Writing Fundamentals 3 3 1 

DM1200 Document Production I 6 4 6 

EP1110 Introduction to Business 4 4 0 

OF1100 Office Management I 3 3 1 

AC2100 Bookkeeping II 4 3 2 

CM2110 Business Writing Fundamentals 3 3 0 

CP2310 Electronic Spreadsheet Applications 3 2 2 

DM1210 Document Production II 5 3 5 

KB1150 Keyboarding I 1 1 1 

OF1101 Office Management II 3 3 1 

DM1300 Transcription l 3 2 2 

CP2410 Micro Database Applications 3 2 2 

OJ1110 Work Exposure – Office Administration 

(Certificate Only) 

C/l 3 weeks 

After the successful completion of the above listed courses, students may exit with the Office 


67 



Level 2 – Office Administration (Executive) Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 



DM1301 Transcription II 3 2 2 

DM2200 Document Production III 6 4 6 

OF2100 Office Management III 3 3 1 

CP2640 Desktop Publishing 4 3 2 

DM2240 Document Production IV 5 3 5 

KB1151 Keyboarding II 1 1 1 

OF2101 Office Management IV 3 3 1 


OF2700 Capstone Project 2 2 0 

Elective Elective 2 2 0 

Elective Elective 2 2 0 

OJ1900 Work Exposure – 


C/I 6 weeks 

After the successful completion of the above listed courses, students may exit with the Office Administration 

(Executive) Diploma.

68 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS STUDIES

69 

SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY 

School of 


College of the North Atlantic – Qatar’s 

Engineering Technology programs are designed 

to develop a diverse technical background, good 

hands-on aptitude and teamwork. The development 

of practical skills and competencies are enhanced 

through partnerships with industry and world-class 

shops and labs equipped with the latest industrial 

equipment. In addition, technology training 

promotes independent thinking and problem 

solving. These are critical factors when preparing 

individuals for troubleshooting, design, supervision 

and management roles.

70 

SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY

71 


School of Engineering Technology 

Accreditation 

Programs offered at the College prepare individuals 

for maintenance and operator positions at the 

technician and technologist level. The program 

structure allows students to progress from the 

technician diploma to the technologist designations 

in certain disciplines. Disciplines include Chemical 

Processing, Electrical, Mechanical, Process Automation 

and Telecommunications. The requirements for 

operations training are addressed by the Chemical 

Processing Technician and Technology programs. 

Engineering Technology programs are designed to 

meet internationally recognized standards. 



university transfer agreements are in place that makes 

it possible for College three-year diploma graduates 

to attend Canadian universities. A variety of options 

are available. Typically, one additional year of study is 

required to obtain a Bachelor of Technology degree 

(www.mi.mun.ca). 

Articulation agreements have also been signed with 

institutions in other countries that also provide 

avenues for graduates from the three-year Engineering 

Technology programs to complete a Bachelors and/or 

Masters degree. These include: 


• Indiana University-Purdue University Indianapolis, USA 





• University of Leeds, UK 






Chemical Laboratory Technician 


Chemical Processing Technician 

Electrical Power Systems Technician 

Mechanical Technician (Industrial Maintenance) 

Process Automation Engineering Technician 

Telecommunications Engineering Technician 


Chemical Processing Technology 


Mechanical Engineering Technology 








72 


Chemical Laboratory Technician (Certificate) 

Program 

The Chemical Laboratory Technician (Certificate) 

program provides students with the principles 

and techniques currently used in chemical lab 

environments. These include fundamental chemical 

principles, basic lab techniques and determinations 

for both wet and instrumental methods, and a 

practical approach to modern lab instrumentation 

techniques. A practical focus allows program 

graduates to adapt to the ever-changing industrial 

environment. The focus is on lab safety; recording, 

reporting and analyzing results; and techniques 

to ensure precision and accuracy while working in 

industry. 

Objectives 

1. To provide graduates with the technical knowledge 

and hands-on skills needed to assist in the daily 

operation of industrial, environmental, research and 

industrial chemistry laboratories. 

2. To provide graduates with an appreciation for the 

team approach in the workplace. 

3. To provide graduates with good problem solving 

skills by giving students the opportunity for 

application of problem solving methodologies to 

real-life situations in the classroom and laboratory 

environments. 

4. To provide graduates with the chemical 

terminology, concepts and computer skills that 

are fundamental to successful interaction with 

chemists, chemical engineers, technologists, 

technicians and other colleagues within the 

chemical field. 


Graduates of the Chemical Laboratory Technician 

(Certificate) program may become employed in either 

government, environmental or industrial laboratories, 

as well as in the educational sector. Graduates will 

be able to work with chemists, chemical engineers, 

technologists and technicians in a wide variety of 

areas related to research and development, quality 

control and assurance, and technical services. 

With today’s narrowed focus on quality control and 

assurance, there is an increased demand for Chemical 

Laboratory Technicians to fill this need. 

Curriculum 

General education consists of an introduction to 

chemistry, safety and quality assurance. Specific 

education focuses on developing laboratory 

techniques and providing hands-on training in the 

fields of analytical, organic, environmental and 

industrial chemistry. A key emphasis is on chemical 

analysis using instrumentation and proper sampling 

techniques. 



following: 






OR 



Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 50% 

Two Science courses selected from: Biology, 

Chemistry, Geology, Physics. One must be Grade 

12; the other may be Grade 11 level. 

Chemistry and Physics are highly recommended. 









Important Notes 

• This program may not be suitable for applicants 

who do not have normal colour perception. 

• Employers will normally demand that all applicants 

undergo a physical capabilities assessment prior 

to hiring.

73 


Chemical Laboratory Technician (Certificate) 

Level 1 – Chemical Laboratory Technician Certificate 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

CH1120 Chemistry 4 3 2 

CH2230 Analytical Chemistry 4 3 3 

CM1430 Technical Communications 3 3 0 


MC1220 Productivity Tools 2 1 2 

SE1120 Workplace Safety 3 3 0 

CH2540 Chemical Laboratory Techniques I 2 1 3 

CH2370 Organic Chemistry 5 4 3 

CH2460 Industrial Chemistry 2 2 0 

CH2541 Chemical Laboratory Techniques II 2 1 3 

CH2770 Environmental Chemistry 3 2 3 

CH2830 Instrumental Analysis 3 2 3 

SP2300 Quality Assurance 3 3 0 

CH2860 Analysis and Sampling Techniques 5 3 6 

WT1480 Chemical Laboratory Technician Practicum 0 0 30 

After the successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the 

Chemical Laboratory Technician Certificate.

74 



Program 

The Diploma in Chemical Processing Technician and 

Technology programs provides graduates with the 

knowledge and skills needed to work safely in plant 

operations and the ability to deal with the increasing 

complexity of equipment and control systems found 

in modern processing industries. The program 

emphasizes safe practices, process operations, 

process stream analysis, instrumentation and process 

control, mechanical systems and maintenance, 

operating engineering training, chemical engineering 

principles, and regulatory processes. 

Graduates could be employed by oil and gas 

companies, refineries, petrochemical plants, power 

plants and manufacturing plants. The program offers 

two exit points and the student can graduate with 

a Chemical Processing Technology technician-level 

diploma after two years. Students compleating the 

third year of the program will receive the Chemical 

Processing Technology Diploma. 

Objectives 

1. To provide graduates with the technical knowledge 

and the applied hands-on skills needed to assist 

in the design, operation, troubleshooting and 

maintenance of chemical process equipment. 

2. To provide graduates with an appreciation for the 

team approach in the workplace. 

3. To provide graduates with problem solving 

skills by giving students the opportunity for the 

application of problem solving methodologies to 

real-life situations in the classroom and laboratory 

environments. 

4. To provide graduates with the communication 

and computer skills required for successful 

correspondence with chemists, engineers, 

technologists, technicians and other colleagues. 

5. To provide graduates with the potential to 

supervise, train and advise technicians and 

tradespeople. 


The Chemical Processing Technologist is involved 

in the design, operation and troubleshooting of 

various chemical processing units. Graduates will find 

employment in various chemical processing industries 

such as oil and gas production, petrochemicals, 

fertilizers and other manufacturing operations. The 

student may exit the program as a graduate of the 

Chemical Processing Technician diploma program. 

This graduate would be involved in the routine 

operation of chemical processing facilities. 

Curriculum 

The Chemical Processing Technology program 

incorporates core courses common to other 

Engineering Technology programs, as well as 

discipline-specific laboratory-based courses that 

focus on the hands-on operating and troubleshooting 

skills that graduates must possess. During the first 

year, students learn the primary theories required 

to understand the various aspects of the field of 

engineering technology and are also introduced to 

fundamental areas specific to chemical processing. 

Intermediate and advanced courses expand on this 

knowledge of chemical processing and continue 

with the acquisition of the hands-on skills that the 

graduate will need for operating and troubleshooting 

chemical process units. The curriculum provides the 

theory of process unit design and advanced chemical 

processing systems. An applied research project is 

required for successful completion of the technology 

program. 



following: 






OR 



Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 50% 













75 




Graduates of the Chemical Processing Technology 

program may have the opportunity to transfer credits 

to institutions such as: 















to hiring.

76 



Level 1 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

MA1700 Mathematics 4 3 2 


PH1100 Physics 4 3 2 

CM1400 Technical Report Writing I 3 3 0 

EG1110 Engineering Graphics 3 2 2 

SD1170 Technology Awareness I 0 1 0 

ET1100 Electrotechnology 4 3 2 


CM1401 Technical Report Writing II 3 3 0 

EG1430 AutoCAD Essentials 3 2 2 

SD1171 Technology Awareness II 2 1 0 



CH2430 Industrial Process Overview 2 2 0 


EN2470 Environmental Awareness 3 3 0 

CI1180 Basic Instrumentation 3 2 2 

PO1100 Process Equipment 3 2 4

77 



Level 2 – Chemical Processing Technician Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 


CI1660 Introduction to Control Systems 4 3 3 

CI2560 Process Analyzers 3 2 4 

CH2420 Hydrocarbon Chemistry 4 3 3 

MH2320 Power Plant Components 4 3 2 

SD2210 Workplace Professionalism 2 2 0 


PE2460 Plant Electrical Systems 3 2 4 

PM2560 Facilities Engineering I 4 3 2 

MH3340 Power Plant Systems 4 4 1 

PO2100 Process Systems Operations and Maintenance 2 0 6 

PO2200 Process Troubleshooting 3 2 2 

PM2561 Facilities Engineering II 4 3 2 

MH4500 Prime Movers 4 3 2 

After the successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Chemical Processing 

Technician Diploma.

78 



Level 3 – Chemical Processing Technology Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 



EC1700 Engineering Economics 2 2 0 

TD3130 Applied Thermodynamics 3 2 2 

CF2520 Strength of Materials 4 3 2 

PO2400 Process Unit Design 4 4 1 

PR3214 Capstone Project I (Chemical Processing) 0 3 0 



FM3300 Applied Fluid Mechanics 3 2 2 

PO2480 Process Simulation 2 1 3 

PO2500 

PO2560 

Liquid Natural Gas (LNG)/Gas to Liquid (GTL)* 

OR 

Desalination Processes* 

PR3215 Capstone Project II (Chemical Processing) 5 5 0 

After the successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Chemical Processing 

Technology Diploma. 

*Optional courses (one must be completed) 

4 

4 

3 

3 

2 

2

79 



Program 

The Electrical Engineering Technology program is 

committed to providing students with the skills 

and knowledge necessary to become competent 

and effective members of an electrical engineering 

team in the Middle East. Students will gain technical 

knowledge and skills in maintenance, troubleshooting 

and design of electrical power systems with a focus 

on utility, large industry, institutional and commercial 

facilities. Early program studies stress the fundamental 

knowledge and skills necessary to complete 

installation, maintenance and troubleshooting tasks. 

Later studies provide the skills and knowledge tools 

necessary to undertake analysis and design tasks. 

The program features an exit point at the end of Level 

2 where successful graduates can opt to receive an 

Electrical Power Systems Technician Diploma. The 

technician-level program is embedded as the first 

two years (six semesters) of the three-year (nine 

semesters) Electrical Engineering Technology program 

at the College. The program shares a common 

first year with the Process Automation Engineering 

Technology program. Many second- and third-year 

courses are also shared, allowing for a reduced 

time to obtain a dual qualification. Graduates of the 

three-year program are eligible for advanced standing 

in engineering and technology programs at Canadian, 

American and British universities through existing 

articulation agreements. 

Objectives 

Upon successful completion of the three-year 

program, graduates will have the knowledge and 

skills to: 

1. Function successfully as entry-level technicians 

or engineering technologists in the Middle East 

electrical power industry. 

2. Design, analyze and maintain electrical systems. 

3. Install, troubleshoot and maintain heavy electrical 

equipment, including transformers, motors, 

generators, and related control and protective 

equipment. 

4. Use specific computer software in the design of 

building electrical systems. 

5. Communicate with customers and fellow members 

of the engineering team. 

6. Recognize the importance of continuing education 

and professional affiliations. 


Graduates of the Electrical Technology program can 

find employment with a large variety of companies 

involved in the electrical industry. Typical GCC 

employers include public and private sector power 

and water utilities, large petrochemical refining and 

production facilities, and government departments. 

Curriculum 

General education consists of English (oral and 

written), mathematics, physics, electrotechnology 

and computer-aided design and drafting (CADD). 

Specific technical training focuses on various aspects 

of the electrical power discipline including electrical 

system design, protection and control systems, 

basic instrumentation, and power system analysis. 

Practical oriented activities include wiring, installation 

and maintenance of electrical equipment using 

appropriate local codes. 



following: 






OR 



Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 50% 













80 




Graduates of the Electrical Engineering Technology 


to institutions such as: 













• This program may not be suitable for applicants who 

do not have normal colour perception. 

• Students should be aware of the strenuous physical 

dexterity required in this training program. 



to hiring.

81 



Level 1 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 


PH1140 Applied Physics 4 3 2 

ET1130 Fundamentals of Electricity I 4 3 2 

CM1190 Technical Reading 3 3 0 


CI1140 Introduction to Electrical and 

Instrumentation Technology 

3 2 2 

EG1230 Electrical and Instrumentation CAD 3 2 2 

ET1131 Fundamentals of Electricity II 4 3 2 


AE1260 Power Electronics 3 2 2 

CE1210 Basic Communication Networks I 4 3 3 

MP1200 Electrical Motors 4 3 2 

CI1350 Basic Process Automation 2 1 2 

CI1310 Electrical/Electronic Fabrication Techniques 3 2 3

82 



Level 2 – Electrical Power Systems Technician Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

CM2180 Technical Reporting I 3 3 1 

MP2220 Transmission and Distribution Systems 5 4 3 

MP2370 Power System Transformers 4 3 2 

MP2160 Electromechanical Motor Controls 4 3 3 

PE2510 Electrical Practices 2 1 3 

CM2181 Technical Reporting II 3 3 1 

MP2250 Electric Power Generation Facilities 4 3 2 

MP2260 Solid State Motor Controls 4 3 2 

DP2520 Programmable Logic Controllers 4 3 2 

PE2511 Electrical Practices II 2 1 3 

PE3120 Facilities Electrical Systems I 4 3 2 

PE2300 HV Equipment Testing and Maintenance 3 2 3 

After the successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Electrical Power 

Systems Technician Diploma.

83 



Level 3 – Electrical Engineering Technology Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 


CM2800 Oral/Written Communication Skills 3 3 0 

PR3220 Technical Thesis I (Electrical) Pass/Fail 3 0 

PE3121 Facilities Electrical Systems II 4 3 2 

CI2100 Pressure and Level Measurement and Control 4 3 3 


PR3221 Technical Thesis II (Electrical) 5 5 0 

MP3120 HV Systems Protection and Coordination 4 3 2 

CI2230 Flow and Temperature Measurement and 

Control 

4 3 3 

PR3150 Project Management and Financial Analysis 4 4 0 

MP2230 Power System Harmonics 2 2 1 

MP3330 Transmission and Distribution Systems 

Operational Analysis 

4 3 2 

DP3450 Advanced Programmable Logic Controllers 4 3 2 

After the successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Electrical Engineering 

Technology Diploma.

84 




Program 

The Mechanical Engineering Technician and 

Technology (Industrial Maintenance) programs equip 

graduates with the technical knowledge and hands-on 

skills required to install, operate, maintain, design and 

manage mechanical systems. Specific areas of study 

include: rotating equipment, pumps, piping systems, 

CNC machining, hydraulics, pneumatics, refrigeration 

and building systems, 3-D modelling, preventive and 

predictive maintenance, and non-destructive testing. 

Upon completion of specified courses in the program, 

students may graduate with a technician diploma. or 

Upon completion of all courses in the program the 

student will receive a technology diploma. 

Objectives 

Through this program of study, graduates are 

equipped with the technical knowledge and hands-on 

skills required for: 

1. The design, implementation, installation, operation, 

maintenance and management of petroleum 

production equipment, power generation systems 

and general mechanical support systems. These 

skills are required for most petroleum refineries 

and production plants, processing plants, 

manufacturing facilities and refrigeration systems. 

2. The development of mechanical working drawings 

and computer-based models of mechanical systems 

using related engineering analysis software. 


Given the broad base of the mechanical field, 

graduates have employment opportunities in 

numerous industries including oil and gas production, 

refining, petrochemical plants, manufacturing plants, 

engineering firms and government departments. 

Curriculum 

The Mechanical Engineering Technology (Industrial 

Maintenance) program incorporates core courses 

common to other Engineering Technology programs 

as well as discipline-specific laboratory-based courses 

that focus on the hands-on and troubleshooting skills 

that graduates must possess. Students learn the 

fundamental theories required to understand many 

aspects of the field of engineering technology. 

The intermediate and advanced curriculum expands 

on this knowledge of mechanical engineering and 

continues with the acquisition of the skills that the 

technician and technologist will rely on in helping 

implement preventive maintenance programs, 

troubleshooting system malfunctions and completing 

system repair. 



following: 






OR 



Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 50% 













85 





Graduates of the Mechanical Engineering Technology 

(Industrial Maintenance) program may have the 
















to hiring.

86 




Level 1 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 





SD1170 Technology Awareness I 0 1 0 

EG1110 Engineering Graphics 3 2 2 

MH1110 Mechanical Systems 4 4 1 



SD1171 Technology Awareness II 2 1 0 



EG1430 AutoCAD Essentials 3 2 2 


CF1160 Materials Practices 3 2 2 

PF1180 Piping Fabrication and Rigging 2 1 2 

ND1150 Non-Destructive Testing 3 2 3 

WD1420 Welding Fundamentals 2 1 3 


MW1700 Industrial Mechanics: Power Transmissions, 

Seals and Bearings 

MH2400 Installation and Operation of Rotating 

Equipment 

2 1 4 

2 1 3

87 




Level 2 – Mechanical Technician (Industrial Maintenance) Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

CF1120 Materials and Processes 3 3 1 

MH2320 Power Plant Components 4 3 2 


FM2160 Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics 5 4 2 

MW1710 Condition Monitoring 2 1 3 

PM2160 Preventive and Predictive Maintenance I 2 1 3 

FM2400 Hydraulics and Pneumatics 3 2 2 

SP1200 Machine Shop Practice 1 0 3 

MH2810 Process Systems – Petroleum Processing 

Facilities 

3 3 1 

MH4410 Refrigeration Systems 2 1 3 

SD2210 Workplace Professionalism 2 2 0 

MW1720 Conveyor Systems 2 1 2 

MH4425 Maintenance of Rotating Equipment 2 1 2 

MH4500 Prime Movers 4 3 2 

After the successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Mechanical Technician 

(Industrial Maintenance) Diploma.

88 




Level 3 – Mechanical Engineering Technology (Industrial Maintenance) Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 





EG3100 3-D Modelling/CAD 3 2 3 

CF2240 Mechanics of Solids 4 3 2 



TD3130 Applied Thermodynamics 3 2 2 

FM 3300 Applied Fluid Mechanics 3 2 2 

FM3230 Machine Design 3 3 1 

PM2161 Preventive and Predictive Maintenance II 5 5 0 

PR3244 Capstone Project I (Mechanical) 0 3 0 

SP2700 Computer Numerical Control / Computer 

Aided Manufacturing 

6 5 3 

PR3245 Capstone Project II (Mechanical) 5 5 0 

After the successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Mechanical 

Engineering Technology (Industrial Maintenance) Diploma.

89 



Program 

The Process Automation Engineering Technology 

program offers two exit points. Students can graduate 

with a Process Automation Technician Diploma after 

Level 2. Students completing Level 3 of the program 

will receive the Process Automation Engineering 

Technology Diploma. The program combines technical 

problem solving abilities, an appreciation for working 

in a team environment and an aptitude for hands-on 

work. Graduates will work closely with engineers, 

technologists, technicians and tradespersons. 

Process Automation Engineering Technologists rely 

on strong technical knowledge of the design and 

operation of process instrumentation and control 

systems and hands-on skills in the repair and 

maintenance of a variety of these systems, including 

microprocessor-based process field instrumentation 

and programmable control systems. 

Objectives 

Upon successful completion of the three-year 

program, graduates will have the knowledge and 

skills to: 

1. Function successfully as entry-level technicians 

or engineering technologists in the Middle East 

processing industry. 

2. Design, analyze and maintain process automation 

systems. 

3. Install, troubleshoot and maintain process 

automation field and control room devices and 

systems such as programmable logic control, 

distributed control and emergency shutdown 

systems. 

4. Use specific computer software in the 

implementation, calibration and design of 

process automated systems. 


Process Automation Engineering Technology has 

very diverse applications. A Process Automation 

Engineering Technologist will find employment in 

production plants, hospitals, oil and gas facilities, 

private sector, government and non-profit sectors. 

Curriculum 

General education consists of English (oral and written), 

mathematics, physics, electrotechnology and 

computer-aided design and drafting (CADD). Specific 

technical training focuses on various aspects of the 

process automation discipline, including process 

control system design incorporating programmable 

control systems (PLC/DCS/ESD) and machine 

condition monitoring and control. 

Practical oriented activities include wiring, installation 

and maintenance of process field, and control room 

instrumentation using applicable codes. 

Graduates of the Process Automation Engineering 

Technology diploma program will possess the 

knowledge and skills needed to fill a dynamic role 

in industry. They will also be well prepared for 

continuing education. Those graduates who want to 

work in industry will have the background necessary 

to undertake specialized training as their career 

progresses. The program model is designed so that 

graduates who wish to continue their formal education 

towards an undergraduate degree or professional 

designation will have a smooth transition given the 

academic rigour incorporated within this program. 

The PAET program is designed to meet internationally 

recognized standards. This will allow for articulation 

with university programs both in Qatar and in other 

locations. 



following: 






OR 



Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 50% 













90 




Graduates of the Process Automation Engineering 

Technology program may have the opportunity to 

transfer credits to institutions such as: 
















to hiring. 

Level 1 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 


ET1130 Fundamentals of Electricity I 4 3 2 


CI1140 Introduction to Electrical and Instrumentation 

Technology 

3 2 2 




ET1131 Fundamentals of Electricity II 4 3 2 

EG1230 Electrical and Instrumentation CAD 3 2 2 

AE1260 Power Electronics 3 2 2 

CE1210 Basic Communications Networks I 4 3 3 

MP1200 Electrical Motors 4 3 2 

CI1350 Basic Process Automation 2 1 2 

CI1310 Electrical/Electronic Fabrication Techniques 3 2 3

91 



Level 2 – Process Automation Engineering Technician Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 


CI2300 Advanced Control Strategies 4 3 3 

DP2360 Function Block Programming 4 3 3 

CI2100 Pressure and Level Measurement and Control 4 3 3 

CI2120 Final Control Elements and Instrument Air 

Systems 

3 2 2 


MP2160 Electromechanical Motor Controls 4 3 3 

PE2720 Industrial Instrumentation Practices 2 1 3 

CI2230 Flow and Temperature Measurement and 

Control 

4 3 3 

DP2520 Programmable Logic Controllers 4 3 2 

PE2230 Hazardous Area Training 3 2 3 

MP2260 Solid State Motor Controls 4 3 2 

After successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Process Automation 

Engineering Technician Diploma.

92 



Level 3 – Process Automation Engineering Technology Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 



CH3100 Chemistry for Process Analyzers 4 3 2 


CI3110 Safety Shutdown and Machine Monitoring 

Systems 

4 3 2 

PR3230 Technical Thesis I (Process Automation) Pass/Fail 3 0 


DP3240 DCS (Distributed Control Systems) 

Configuration 

4 3 2 

CI3160 Introduction to Process Analysis 4 3 2 

CI3230 Advanced Process Control Applications 4 3 2 

PR3231 Technical Thesis II (Process Automation) 5 5 0 

CI3310 Process Optimization and Asset Management 4 3 2 

CI3320 Foundation Fieldbus 4 3 2 

CI3330 Process Analyzers 1 1 1 

After successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Process Automation 

Engineering Technology Diploma.

93 



Program 

CNA-Q’s Telecommunications program is committed 

to providing students with the skills and knowledge 

necessary to become competent and effective 

members of a telecommunications engineering 

team in the Middle East. Students will gain technical 

knowledge and skills in maintenance, trouble shooting 

and design of telecommunications systems with 

a focus on public and private telecommunications 

corporations, IT, and large industrial, institutional 

and commercial facilities. Early program studies 

stress the fundamental knowledge and skills 

necessary to complete installation, maintenance 

and troubleshooting tasks. Later studies provide the 

skills and knowledge tools necessary to undertake 

analysis and design tasks, preparing students 

for entry into the essential skills and knowledge, 

beginning with electronics fundamentals and 

leading up to the current state-of-the art wireless 

and related telecommunications technologies. The 

program features an exit point at the end of Level 

2, where successful graduates can opt to receive a 

Telecommunications Engineering Technician Diploma. 

Graduates of the three-year program are eligible for 

advanced standing in engineering and technology 

programs at many Canadian, American, and British 

universities through existing articulation agreements. 

Objectives 

1. To demonstrate a basic knowledge and 

understanding of the general field of 

telecommunications including current systems, 

instrumentation, and electronics. 

2. To operate, test, and maintain telecommunications 

systems while applying a high level of skill and 

knowledge of basic electronic principles. 

3. To design, deploy, and manage information systems 

infrastructure. 

4. To demonstrate an acceptable level of workplace 

safety practices and procedures. 

5. To communicate effectively with customers and 

fellow members of the engineering team. 

6. To recognize the importance of continuing 

education and professional affiliations. 


Graduates of the Telecommunications Engineering 

Technology program can find employment with 

a large variety of companies involved in the 

telecommunications industry. Typical GCC employers 

include public and private sector telecommunications 

companies and IT providers. 

Among the types of work environments that may use 

the services of graduates with these skills include, 

among others, data and telecommunications service 

providers, TV and satellite services organizations, 

computer network sales and services organizations, 

electronic systems R&D facilities and entertainment 

industries. 

Curriculum 

General education consists of technical reading, 

technical reporting, communication skills (oral and 

written), mathematics, physics, and circuit analysis. 

Specific technical training focuses on various aspects 

of analog communication systems and digital/data 

communications systems. Practical oriented activities 

include cabling, circuit board fabrications, splicing, 

and the installation, configuration and maintenance 

of telecommunications equipment/systems used 

in industry. 



following: 






OR 



Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 50% 













94 




Graduates of the Telecommunications Engineering 

Technology program may have the opportunity to 

transfer credits to institutions such as: 













• This program may not be suitable for applicants who 

do not have normal colour perception. 





to hiring.

95 



Level 1 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 


ET1150 Circuit Analysis I 5 4 3 


CE1140 Network Computer Essentials 4 3 2 


EG1140 Electronic Circuit Simulation 2 1 2 

ET1151 Circuit Analysis II 5 4 3 


CE1210 Basic Communications Networks I 4 3 3 

DP1130 Digital Electronics 4 3 3 

CI1320 Electrical/Electronic Fabrication Techniques 3 2 3 


CE3430 Network Cabling 4 3 3

96 



Level 2 – Telecommunications Engineering Technician Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 


CE2270 Electronic Analog Communications 4 3 2 

DP1170 Digital Microprocessors 5 4 3 

CE2730 Electromagnetics for Electronic Communications 4 3 2 

AE2350 Analog Electronics I 5 4 3 


CE2130 IP Routing 5 4 3 

CE2300 Telecommunications Networks 5 4 3 

AE2351 Analog Electronics II 6 5 3 

After successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Telecommunications 

Engineering Technician Diploma.

97 



Level 3 – Telecommunications Engineering Technology Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 



DR2440 Electronic CAD 3 2 3 

CT2300 Applied Programming 4 3 2 

ET2150 Circuit Analysis III 5 5 0 

PR3260 Capstone Project I (Telecommunications) Pass/Fail 3 0 

DP2230 Microcontrollers 4 3 3 

CE2400 Switching and Wireless 4 3 3 


PR3261 Capstone Project II (Telecommunications) 5 5 0 

CE2500 Accessing the WAN 5 4 3 

DP2460 Digital Signal Processing 4 3 2 

CE3640 Unified Communications 5 4 3 

CE3140 RF Communication Systems 4 3 2 

CE3510 

CE3230 

CE3240 

Microwave Circuit Design* 

OR 

IP Network Security* 

OR 

Broadcast Engineering Technology* 

*Optional courses (one must be completed) 

After successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Telecommunications 

Engineering Technology Diploma. 

4 

4 

4 

3 

3 

3 

2 

2 

2

98 

SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY

99 

SCHOOL OF HEALTH SCIENCES 


Health Sciences 

The School of Health Sciences offers education 

in a variety of health professions designed to 

meet Canada’s rigorous health standards, while 

recognizing and respecting local cultural attributes. 

The programs include comprehensive didactic 

sessions, hands-on skills training and clinical 

field rotations. Emphasis is placed on developing 

effective communication skills, promoting 

professional and ethical behaviour, and maintaining 

up-to-date knowledge of the profession. Graduates 

will be equipped with the knowledge and skills 

necessary to provide world-class medical care not 

only within Qatar, but globally as well.

100 

SCHOOL OF HEALTH SCIENCES

101 


School of Health Sciences 

Objectives 

1. To provide education in the health sciences 

professions as considered necessary by the State, 

the College and the community. 

2. To graduate well-trained professionals who can 

serve their employers and the community with the 

highest degree of competence. 

3. To develop in students the ability to effectively 

communicate with the healthcare team in the 

health sciences professions. 

4. To promote professionalism and a high level of 

responsibility in the student. 

5. To impress on students the vital importance of 

maintaining a high level of competence, at all times, 

in the performance of their duties. 

6. To foster in students the importance of maintaining 

up-to-date knowledge in their profession. 

Accreditation 

The School of Health Sciences actively seeks 

international accreditation for its programs. Currently, 

the following programs have been accredited: 

• Medical Radiography Technology – accredited by the 

Canadian Medical Association (CMA) 

• Pharmacy Technician – accredited by the Canadian 

Council for Accreditation of Pharmacy Programs 

(CCAPP) 

• Respiratory Therapy – accredited by the Council 

on Accreditation for Respiratory Therapy Education 

(CoARTE) 



university transfer agreements are in place that make 

it possible for College diploma graduates to attend 

international universities. A variety of options are 

available, including: 





• University of Wales, UK 






Emergency Medical Technician 


Dental Assistant – Level ll 








Environmental Health and Safety – Public Health 






program of study. 


Note: Course Pass Mark – Students must obtain 

a minimum of 50% in all academic courses and a 

minimum of 60% in all program-specific courses. 

All students in Health Sciences programs must 

complete a medical assessment and immunization 

requirements specific to the program of study as 

indicated in each course calendar description. Any 

student not deemed to be medically fit to complete 

the program will be required to withdraw. Any costs 

associated with completing the medical assessment 

will be the student’s responsibility. Students sponsored 

by Hamad Medical Corporation will have the medical 

completed as part of their contract obligations 

with HMC. The College will assist other students to 

complete the process during the first semester. 

Students must possess a valid Standard First Aid 

certificate and Cardiopulmonary (Level C) certificate 

to be eligible for a Diploma from the School of 

Health Sciences. 

All students in Health Sciences programs will be 

required to use a handheld device for competency 

tracking in labs/clinical courses. Any costs associated 

with this device are the students’ responsibility. For 

more information regarding device requirements and 

costs please visit http://www.studentlogbook.com/ 

home or contact the School of Health Sciences at 

4495-2728.

102 


Dental Assistant – Level II 

Program 

CNA-Q’s Dental Assistant – Level II Program is 

consistent with the mission and vision of the College 

in that it provides a quality program to ensure lifelong 

learners are educated and highly skilled, and are 

able to meet the demands of the labour market and 

contribute to the social, economic and cultural 

well-being of their communities. The Dental Assistant 

program is committed to providing students with the 

skills and knowledge necessary to become competent 

and effective members of the healthcare team to 

meet the needs of employers as determined by the 

Commission on Dental Accreditation of Canada (CDAC). 

CDAC goals encompass the attainment of the Domain 

Description for Dental Assistant developed by the 

Canadian Dental Assistants’ Association and the 

National Dental Assistant Examination Board. Each 

course in the revised Dental Assistant program is 

outlined with accompanying objectives, and learning 

outcomes are incorporated into the curriculum. 

The program includes coursework, team-oriented 

projects, clinical experience and a final 15-week 

work term at different sites focusing on areas of 

technical learning, interpersonal skills, team building, 

communications and professionals practice. This 

provides diverse opportunities for students to gain 

confidence and improve competencies and enhance 

skills in all facets of the dental assistant’s role. 

Objectives 

The goal statement and objectives are a 

comprehensive list of job responsibilities for a 

dental assistant and the learning required to 

successfully carry out each job responsibility. 

1. To provide the academic knowledge and 

technical skills to meet the Commission on 

Dental Accreditation of Canada’s standards 

for accreditation. 

2. To graduate individuals who will function 

successfully as entry-level dental assistants. 

3. To provide graduates with the skills to communicate 

with patients and healthcare professionals 

effectively, within the scope of their practice. 

4. To prepare the graduates for employment in various 

healthcare facilities, such as hospitals and private 

dental clinics. 

5. To give graduates the tools required to practice 

competently and safely within a legal and ethical 

framework. 

6. To provide graduates with the ability to access 

the latest technologies available. 

7. To encourage graduates to recognize the 

importance of continuing education and 

professional affiliations. 

8. To prepare graduates to contribute to the 

application of effective business principles in the 

dental practice setting. 

9. To provide graduates with the skills to operate 

dental software programs so they may assist in 

providing optimal dental practice management 

services. 

10. To enable graduates to contribute to the working 

environment, quality assurance and quality 

improvement processes within the scope of 

practice for dental assistants. 


Program graduates may obtain employment in a 

variety of dental practice areas such as: 

• Hospital dental clinics 

• Private dental and poly clinics 

• Corporate dental units 

• Dental health agencies 

The work is extremely rewarding with emphasis on 

patient interaction and care.

103 


Dental Assistant – Level II 



following: 






OR 



* Two Science courses selected 

from: Biology, Chemistry, 

Geology, Physics 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 50% 

Minimum 60% 

* Applicants who do not meet the Science requirement 

may be admitted to the Pre-Health Sciences 

curriculum, which is designed to provide upgrading 

in the basic skills required for successful completion 

of allied health training programs. 









Immunization Requirements: 

1. Completed medical assessment by physician to 

include past and present health history 

2. Proof of current immunity to following diseases: 

• Measles, Mumps, Rubella 

• Varicella 

• Hepatitis A, B (include all dates) 

3. Proof of tetanus/diphtheria booster 

(required every 10 years) 

4. Hepatitis C and HIV screening 

5. TB screening and BCG history – Mantoux 2-step 

skin testing if status unknown 

6. Chest x-ray if indicated by Mantoux skin test 

7. Yearly seasonal flu vaccination strongly 

recommended 

Note: Students will be denied access to clinical 

placements without medical verification of complete 

immunization/screening requirements. 


Graduates of the Dental Assistant program may have 

the opportunity to transfer credits to institutions such 

as the University of Bradford, UK. 



Academic Calendar.

104 


Dental Assistant – Level II – Diploma 

Level 1 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

BL1200 Biology I 4 3 3 

BL1250 Orofacial Anatomy 5 5 0 



MR1280 Customer Service 2 2 0 

SD1330 Professional Ethics of Dental Assisting 2 2 0 

BL1280 Microbiology and Infection Control 3 2 2 

DA1230 Dental Materials I 2 1 2 

BL1210 Biology II 4 3 3 


DA1300 Medical Emergencies Pass/Fail 1 1 

MX2170 Dental Radiography I 4 3 3 

DA1320 Emergencies and Pharmacology 3 3 0 


LS1000 CAEL Preparation 0 3 2 

DA1260 Clinical I 6 4 6

105 


Dental Assistant – Level II – Diploma 

Level 2 – Dental Assistant – Level ll – Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

DA1231 Dental Materials II 2 1 2 

DA1350 Preventative Dentistry 4 3 2 

DA1261 Clinical II 6 4 6 

HL2120 Dental Health Education 3 3 0 

MX2171 Dental Radiography II 4 3 3 

DA2261 Clinical III 4 0 12 

DA2310 Dental Specialties 4 3 3 

FH1130 Nutrition for Dental Assistants 2 2 0 

OF2600 Dental Practice Management 4 3 2 

Elective Unspecified 3 3 0 

WT1720 Clinical Placement Pass/Fail 15 weeks 

Note: The course and lab hours per week are based on a 15-week semester. In Intersession, the course 

and lab hours will be increased to reflect the shorter semester length. 

After successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Dental Assistant 

Level ll – Diploma.

106 



Program 

The Emergency Medical Science program will prepare 

students to work internationally. The program is 

modelled on the U.S. Department of Transportation’s 

National Standard Curriculum. Two exit points 

provide flexibility. Students exiting after successful 

completion of the first level will receive a Certificate 

in Emergency Medical Technician – Basic. Students 

successfully completing both levels of the program 

will receive a Diploma in Emergency Medical Science. 

Objectives 

1. To equip the student with the knowledge and life 

support skills necessary to assess and treat the 

sick and injured in a pre-hospital emergency care 

setting. 

2. To foster feelings of respect and genuine concern 

for all individuals. 

3. To develop in students the ability to communicate 

and function cooperatively with team colleagues. 

4. To develop problem solving skills that promote 

logical thinking and independent decisions for 

appropriate patient care. 

The aims of the clinical training portion of the 

program are: 

1. To ensure that the student can accurately and 

confidently perform the many and varied 

examinations and procedures that are carried 

out on a daily basis by the paramedic. 

2. To ensure that the student has performed 

the number and variety of examinations and 

procedures required to complete the course. 

3. To discipline the student to the working conditions 

of the paramedic. 

Students will receive instruction by the clinical 

instructors in emergency medical procedures that can 

best be demonstrated and observed under clinical 

conditions. Students will review lectures and will be 

evaluated academically and clinically. 



following: 






OR 






Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 50% 

Minimum 60% 









3. Passing mark and suitability interview conducted 

by Health Sciences Emergency Medical Science 

faculty and HMC representatives (when available) 

prior to admission to the program. 






107 



Immunization requirements: 





• Varicella 









recommended 





Graduates of the Emergency Medical Science 


to institutions such as the University of Bradford, UK. 



Academic Calendar.

108 



Level 1 – Emergency Medical Technician Certificate 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 


CM2180 Technical Reporting l 3 3 1 

CM2181 Technical Reporting ll 3 3 1 

PC1420 Emergency Medical Technician – 

First Responder 

4 3 2 

MC1080 Introduction to Computers 2 2 0 

BL1500 Biology 4 3 3 

PC1320 Health and Wellness 2 1 3 

PC1820 Clinical I 0 0 6 


PC1460 Emergency Medical Technician – Basic I 9 9 0 

PC1470 Emergency Medical Technician – Basic II 3 0 8 

PC1821 Clinical II 0 0 6 

PC2820 Clinical III 11 0 42 


After successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Emergency Medical 

Technician Certificate.

109 



Level 2 – Emergency Medical Science Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

CM1800 Technical Communication for Paramedics 3 3 0 

PC2110 Emergency Medical Technician – Intermediate: 

Preparatory 


Trauma 

4 3 3 

6 5 4 


PC2821 Clinical IV 0 0 6 



Cardiac 


Medical 


Special Considerations 

6 5 4 

3 2 3 

4 3 3 

PC3820 Clinical V 0 0 6 

PC3821 Clinical VI 11 0 42 

After successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Emergency Medical 

Science Diploma.

110 




Program 

Food safety inspectors play a vital role in promoting 

the health and safety of the public food supply in 

the country. Food safety officers utilize their skills to 

assess and control foodborne hazards in the public 

food service sector through inspection, enforcement 

and health promotion activities. The objectives of 

any national food safety program is to develop food 

safety culture and to ultimately implement measures 

which will reduce the risk associated with foodborne 

illness in the community. Graduates are trained in the 

application and enforcement of State legislation and 

in the use of education as a means to promote safe 

food handling. Food safety inspectors need strong 

investigative skills, persuasion and negotiation skills, 

together with good technical knowledge about safe 

food handling and preparation. 

Objectives 

Upon successful completion of the program, students 

will be able to: 

1. Apply the knowledge and skills to effectively 

inspect and assess public food service sector 

facilities for potential health hazards. 

2. Interpret and effectively apply government 

legislation and policies with the goal of correcting 

existing or potential health hazards. 

3. Prepare and implement educational programs 

designed to reduce the risk of foodborne illness in 

the community. 

4. Develop and promote food safety culture in the 

food retail sector. 

5. Demonstrate professionalism and responsibility. 

6. Obtain FoodSafe Level I and II certification. 


Graduates of this program are expected to gain career 

opportunities primarily with government agencies 

as food safety inspectors/officers or as health 

promoters. However, employment opportunities 

potentially exist with private consulting firms, the 

hospitality industry and the healthcare sector as 

quality assurance food safety supervisors. 

In addition, this program provides a solid foundation 

should students wish to pursue further education in 

Food Sciences/Nutrition or Public Health. 


1. High school completion with an overall 60% 

average in: 




Academic Mathematics – 

Grade 12 level 

OR 

Advanced Math – 


* Two Grade 12 level Science 

courses selected from: Biology, 

Chemistry, Geology, or Physics 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 



curriculum which is designed to provide upgrading 












Graduates of the Environmental Health and Safety – 

Food Safety and Inspection Diploma program may 

have the opportunity to transfer credits to institutions 

such as the University of Wales - Newport, UK. 



Academic Calendar.

111 




Level 1 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 





MC1240 Computer Applications l 3 2 2 

HL1140 Principles of EHS 4 4 0 


BL1130 Microbiology 4 3 3 

CH1210 Chemistry ll 4 3 3 

BL1210 Biology ll 4 3 3 


SE1160 Principles of OHS 3 2 2 

HM1300 Food Safety l 3 3 1 

HL1910 FSI Practicum l 1 7 weeks 

(2 days/ 

week) 

1

112 




Level 2 – Environmental Health and Safety – Food Safety and Inspection Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

FH1380 Health and Wellness 3 3 0 

EN2310 Environmental Health Law 3 3 0 

HL1310 Communicable Disease Control I 5 4 3 

EN1420 Environmental Sanitation 4 3 2 

HM1301 Food Safety II 4 3 3 

HL1210 Epidemiology 3 3 0 



SE1350 Toxicology 4 3 2 

HL1650 Health Education and Promotion 3 3 0 

HL1430 Food Safety Inspection and Investigation 4 3 4 

HM2310 Food Equipment and Processing 4 3 2 

HL1911 FSI Practicum ll 3 7 weeks 0 

After successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Environmental Health and 

Safety – Food Safety and Inspection Diploma.

113 




Program 

Occupational health and safety professionals play 

a vital role in preventing injuries and illnesses to the 

workforce. The foundation of occupational health and 

safety is to identify hazards in the workplace, assess 

the risk of those hazards, and implement control 

measures to minimize the risk of those hazards. 

Students are trained in the application of this process, 

through legislative requirements, international 

standards and guidelines, and local company policy 

and procedures. Occupational health and safety 

professionals need effective investigative and 

analytical skills, and good interpersonal skills. 

Objectives 

Upon successful completion of the program, 

students will be able to: 

1. Apply the knowledge and skills to effectively 

inspect and assess workplace facilities for potential 

occupational health and safety hazards. 

2. Interpret and effectively apply government 

legislation and policies. 

3. Identify and rectify existing or potential 

occupational health and safety hazards, perform 

accident investigations and conduct risk 

assessment. 

4. Evaluate and monitor health and safety hazards. 

5. Develop strategies for controlling risks and create 

safety training programs for workers and for 

handling and storage of hazardous substances in 

the workplace. 

6. Demonstrate professionalism and responsibility. 


OHS professionals are employed in a variety of private 

industries, including construction, manufacturing, 

health care, and oil and gas. In private industry, OHS 

professionals are responsible for preventing injuries 

and illnesses by effectively identifying, assessing 

and controlling OHS hazards and complying with 

OHS legislation. Alternatively, OHS professionals 

can be employed by government ministries who 

are responsible for enforcing OHS legislation. In 

both sectors, OHS professionals play a vital role in 

protecting the health and safety of workers, which 

ultimately leads to a more productive and effective 

workforce. As industry continues to rapidly expand, 

the need to protect workers from occupational risks 

has never been greater. 



average in: 






OR 






Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 















Graduates of Environmental Health and Safety – 

Occupational Health and Safety will also receive an 

International Diploma from the National Examination 

Board in Occupational Safety and Health (NEBOSH). 

Graduates of Environmental Health and Safety – 

Occupational Health and Safety Diploma will also 

receive a International Diploma from the National 

Examination Board in Occupational Safety and 

Health (NEBOSH). 



Academic Calendar.

114 




Level 1 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 









CH1210 Chemistry II 4 3 3 





HL1720 Emergency Management 5 5 0

115 




Level 2 – Environmental Health and Safety – Occupational Health and Safety Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 



SE1610 Workplace Hazards and Controls 3 3 0 

SE2420 Inspection and Investigation 2 2 0 

SE2350 Measurement and Analysis l 3 2 4 

SE2360 Hazardous Material Management 3 3 0 

SE2520 OHS Management Systems 4 4 0 




SE2450 Ergonomics 3 3 0 

SE1520 Fire Protection 3 3 0 

SE2351 Measurement and Analysis II 3 2 4 


HL1900 OHS Practicum 3 7 weeks 0 

After successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Environmental 

Health and Safety – Occupational Health and Safety Diploma. Graduates of Environmental Health and 

Safety – Occupational Health and Safety Diploma will also receives an International Diploma from the 

National Examination Board in Occupational Safety and Health (NEBOSH).

116 



Program 

Public health is a field of applied science that requires 

practitioners to monitor, control, manage, promote 

and manipulate environmental factors that have an 

impact on human health. 

The environmental health officer/public health 

inspector protects individual and community wellness 

through health promotion activities, risk assessments, 

inspections and the enforcement of State regulations. 

Graduates of the Public Health program will provide 

leadership and technical expertise in the development 

of strategic plans to protect and improve public health 

in the State of Qatar. 

The curriculum is multidisciplinary, emphasizing 

both academic and theoretical training. General and 

specialized subject matter are integrated as much 

as possible. Didactic training is supplemented with 

practical laboratory sessions and supervised field 

trips. Students are required to spend two semesters 

in an approved field practicum, working closely with 

a qualified environmental health officer. 

Objectives 

Upon successful completion of the program, students 

will be able to: 

1. Apply the knowledge and skills necessary to 

conduct food, air, water, soil and infection control 

health risk assessments, with the goal of identifying 

and correcting potential health risks. 

2. Identify health-related issues requiring public 

awareness and prepare and implement educational 

programs to specifically address 

these issues. 

3. Evaluate the effects of intervention strategies in 

reducing health risks. 

4. Provide a link between the general public and 

State officials regarding environmental issues 

that impact human health. 

5. Obtain FoodSafe Level I and II Certification. 


Graduates of the Environmental Health and 

Safety – Public Health program are eligible for a 

wide range of jobs in preventative health. Tougher 

legislation regarding public health issues and a 

recognized need for better trained professionals in 

the field have created diverse and growing career 

opportunities. Career possibilities exist with State 

public health agencies as Environmental Health 

Officers / Public Health Inspectors or with the 

oil and gas sector as Health, Safety, Security and 

Environment (HSEE) Officers. 



average in: 






OR 






Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 
















Articulation and Transfer Credit section in this Academic 

Calendar.

117 



Level 1 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 









CH1210 Chemistry ll 4 3 3 





HL1720 Emergency Management 5 5 0

118 



Level 2 – Environmental Health and Safety – Public Health 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

EY2120 Basic Ecology 5 4 2 


HL1310 Communicable Disease Control I 5 4 3 

EN1420 Environmental Sanitation 4 3 2 

EN1545 Water Quality I 4 3 2 


CH2770 Environmental Chemistry 3 2 3 


HL1650 Health Education and Promotion 3 3 0 

HM1560 Food Safety 7 6 2 

HL1920 Public Health Practicum l 3 7 weeks 0

119 



Level 3 – Environmental Health and Safety – Public Health Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 


EV1830 Land and Sustainable Development 5 4 2 

HL1610 Public Health Administration 3 3 0 

EN1551 Water Quality II 4 3 2 

EV1710 Indoor Air Quality 4 3 2 



HL1301 Communication Disease Control ll 4 3 2 

HL1410 EH Inspection and Investigation 4 3 4 

HL1800 Environmental Health Research 3 2 2 

EV1711 Ambient Air Quality 3 2 2 


HL1921 Public Health Practicum ll 3 7 weeks 0 

After successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Environmental Health 

and Safety – Public Health Diploma (High Diploma).

120 



Program 

Medical radiography technologists play a vital role 

in the diagnosis and treatment of many injuries 

and illnesses. At a physician’s request, medical 

radiographers operate equipment that emits x-rays to 

produce images of a body part or system. Their work 

involves a broad variety of procedures and specialties 

including: plain film radiography, mammography, 

angiography, fluoroscopy and computed tomography. 

The first phase of the program is academic, combining 

general and specialized subject material. The second 

phase is specialized, with emphasis upon medical 

radiography. Classroom and laboratory sessions 

are supplemented by weekly assignments at Hamad 

Medical Corporation premises. The third phase of 

the program is designed to train the student in all 

the practical aspects of medical radiography and to 

discipline the student to the working conditions of the 

radiology department. This portion of the course is a 

clinical training period during which the student will 

apply, under supervision, the theories and principles 

learned during the previous years of training. During 

this portion students will be required to spend some 

evenings and weekends at the training site. 

The aims of this portion of the program are: 

1. To ensure that the student can accurately 

and confidently perform the many and varied 

examinations that are carried out on a daily basis 

in a radiology department. 

2. To ensure that the student has performed the 

number and variety of examinations required to 

complete the course. 

The clinical phase is conducted at sites of Hamad 

Medical Corporation. Students will follow a rotation 

schedule designed to provide broad clinical exposure. 

Objectives 

1. To provide the theoretical knowledge necessary 

for the professional competencies for entry into 

practice as outlined by the Canadian Association of 

Medical Radiation Technologists (CAMRT). 

2. To provide technical proficiency in all aspects of 

medical radiography. 

3. To develop a sense of professionalism and 

responsibility. 

4. To provide comprehensive knowledge of the 

hazards involved and appropriate protection 

methods. 

5. To provide the community with trained personnel 

who can serve their employers and patients with 

the highest degree of competence. 


Graduates of the Medical Radiography Technology 

program are valued members of the paramedical 

team. They are employed in hospitals and clinics, 

where they operate sophisticated machinery to 

produce and develop x-rays while providing quality 

care to patients. Job opportunities also exist in 

research centres, educational institutions and 

medical equipment sales and services. Additionally, 

advancement within the field is possible into specialized 

imaging modalities such as magnetic resonance 

imaging, ultrasound and echo cardiography.

121 





following: 






OR 






Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 50% 

Minimum 60% 















1. Completed medical assessment by physician 

to include past and present health history 



• Varicella 









recommended 



immunization/screening requirements 

Accreditation 

The Medical Radiography Technology Diploma 

program at the College is accredited by the Canadian 

Medical Association (CMA). 


Graduates of the Medical Radiography Technology 

Diploma program may have the opportunity to 

transfer credits to institutions such: 







Academic Calendar.

122 



Level 1 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 














PS1100 Psychology I 2 2 0 


PS1420 Health Care Organization and Structure 3 3 0 

SD1680 Ethics in Healthcare 3 3 0 

CM2200 Oral Communications 2 2 0

123 



Level 2 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

MX2102 Radiographic Anatomy and Pathology 4 4 0 

MX2110 Radiographic Technique 5 4 2 

MX2200 Image Recording 4 3 2 

MX2310 Apparatus and Accessories 3 3 0 

MX2410 Patient Care and Safety 3 3 0 

PH2200 Radiation Physics 3 3 0 

SD1620 Clinical Orientation Pass/Fail 0 3 

MX2103 Radiographic Anatomy and Pathology 5 5 0 

MX2120 Radiographic Technique 5 4 2 

MX2201 Image Recording 4 3 2 

MX2301 Apparatus and Accessories 5 4 4 

MX2500 Radiation Protection and Radiobiology 3 3 0 


Level 3 – Medical Radiography Technology Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

MX1510 Clinical Radiography Orientation 16 35 hrs/week for 16 weeks 

MX3250 Clinical Radiography 16 35 hrs/week for 16 weeks 

MX3260 Clinical Radiography 16 35 hrs/week for 16 weeks 

Students rotate through the sites of Hamad Medical Corporation. Night, evening and/or weekend shifts may be 

required. Students must wear a uniform during clinical experiences. 

After successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Medical Radiography 

Technology Diploma.

124 



Program 

The Pharmacy Technician program meets the mission 

and vision of the College by providing a quality 

program to ensure lifelong learners are educated 

and highly skilled, able to meet the demands of 

the labour market, and able to contribute to the 

social, economic and cultural well-being of their 

communities. The Pharmacy Technician program 

is committed to providing students with the skills 

and knowledge necessary to become competent 

and effective members of the healthcare team and 

to meet the needs of employers as determined by 

the Canadian Council for Accreditation of Pharmacy 

Programs (CCAPP). 

CCAPP’s goals encompass the attainment of 

National Association of Pharmacy Regulatory 

Authorities (NAPRA) Professional Competencies for 

Canadian Pharmacy Technicians at Entry to Practice 

and Canadian Pharmacy Technician Educators 

Association (CPTEA) standards. Each course in 

the Pharmacy Technician program is outlined with 

accompanying objectives, and learning outcomes 

are incorporated into the curriculum. The program 

includes coursework, team-oriented projects and 

a final 15-week clinical placement at different sites 

focusing on areas of technical learning, interpersonal 

skills, teambuilding, communications and professional 

practice. This provides diverse opportunities 

for students to gain confidence and improve 

competencies and enhance skills in all facets of the 

pharmacy technician’s role. 

Objectives 

1. To provide the academic knowledge and technical 

skills required to meet the criteria stated in the 

Canadian Council for Accreditation of Pharmacy 

Programs. 

2. To graduate individuals who will function 

successfully as entry-level pharmacy technicians. 

3. To provide graduates with the skills to communicate 

with patients and healthcare professionals 

effectively, within the scope of their practice. 

4. To prepare graduates for employment in various 

healthcare facilities, such as hospital and 

community pharmacies, home healthcare 

agencies, research facilities and pharmaceutical 

manufacturing facilities. 

5. To give graduates the tools required to practice 

competently and safely within a legal and ethical 

framework. 

6. To provide graduates with the ability to access the 

latest technologies available. 

7. To encourage graduates to recognize the 

importance of continuing education and 

professional affiliations. 

8. To prepare graduates to contribute to the application 

of effective business principles in the pharmacy 

practice setting. 

9. To provide graduates with the skills to operate 

pharmacy computer software programs and other 

technological tools so they may assist in providing 

optimal pharmaceutical care and pharmacy 

services. 

10. To enable graduates to contribute to the working 

environment, quality assurance and quality 

improvement processes within the scope of 

practice for pharmacy technicians. 


Program graduates may obtain employment in a 

variety of pharmacy practice areas such as: 

• Hospital pharmacy in a government or private setting 

• Community pharmacy in a retail pharmacy or 

government/private clinic 

• Pharmaceutical manufacturing site (following 

additional company training) 

• Home healthcare agency 

• Research facility

125 





following: 






OR 






Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 50% 

Minimum 60% 



















• Varicella 









recommended 




Accreditation 

The Pharmacy Technician Diploma program at the 

College is accredited by the Canadian Council for 

Accreditation of Pharmacy Programs (CCAPP). 


Graduates of the Pharmacy Technician Diploma 


to institutions such as the University of Bradford, UK. 



Academic Calendar.

126 



Level 1 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 







MC1830 Fundamental Computer Applications 4 3 2 


MA1730 Mathematics for Pharmacy Technicians 4 4 1 

BL1210 Biology II 4 3 3 

CH1210 Chemistry II 4 3 3 

RX1100 Pharmacy Regulations and Professionalism 3 3 0 

RX1140 Pharmacy Management and Inventory Control 3 3 1 

RX1210 Pharmaceutical Calculations 4 3 2 

RX1250 Pharmacy Computer Systems 4 3 2

127 



Level 2 – Pharmacy Technician Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 


RX2100 Prescription Processing I 3 2 4 

RX2120 Pharmacy Fundamentals 3 3 0 

RX2160 Pharmacology I 4 3 2 

RX2200 Community Pharmacy 4 3 2 

MR1280 Customer Service 2 2 0 


RX2101 Prescription Processing II 3 2 3 

RX2121 Pharmacy Fundamentals Application 4 3 2 

RX2161 Pharmacology II 3 3 1 

RX2230 Hospital Pharmacy 4 3 3 

RX2300 Aseptic Technique 3 2 3 


WT1660 Community Pharmacy Clinical Placement Pass/Fail 4 weeks 

WT1670 Hospital Pharmacy Clinical Placement Pass/Fail 11 weeks 

After successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Pharmacy 

Technician Diploma.

128 



Program 

Respiratory therapists are healthcare professionals 

who contribute to the diagnosis and treatment of 

lung disorders. Most respiratory therapists work in 

hospitals in neonatal nurseries, operating rooms, 

intensive care units, general wards, pulmonary 

function labs and emergency departments. 

Respiratory therapists may also work in community 

settings such as homecare, asthma clinics, 

research, and medical equipment sales and service. 

Respiratory therapists need good judgment, excellent 

interpersonal skills and the ability to maintain their 

composure in critical medical situations. 

The first phase of the program is academic, combining 

general and specialized subject material. The second 

phase is specialized with emphasis upon respiratory 

therapy. Classroom and laboratory sessions are 

supplemented by weekly assignments at Hamad 

Medical Corporation premises. 

The third phase of the program is designed to train 

the student in all the practical aspects of respiratory 

therapy and to discipline the student to the working 

conditions of the respiratory therapist. This portion 

of the course is a clinical training period during which 

the student will apply, under supervision, the theories 

and principles learned during the previous training. 

The aims of this portion of the program are: 

1. To ensure that the student can accurately 

and confidently perform the many and varied 

procedures that are carried out on a daily basis by 

the respiratory therapist. 

2. To ensure that the student has performed the 

number and variety of procedures required to 

complete the course. 

Objectives 

1. Explain the theory behind all procedures as outlined 

by the current National Alliance of Respiratory 

Therapy Regulatory Bodies (NARTRB) National 

Competency Profile. 

2. Apply theoretical knowledge to clinical practice. 

3. Perform all procedures outlined in the syllabus. 

4. Use all equipment related to procedures outlined in 

the syllabus. 

5. Demonstrate understanding of the therapist’s role 

in healthcare, and function with responsibility and 

empathy as members of the healthcare team. 


Most respiratory therapists work in hospitals, 

where they perform a variety of functions such 

as providing life support for patients who cannot 

breathe on their own, assisting in high-risk births, 

assisting anesthesiologists in the operating room and 

conducting tests to measure lung function. In addition 

to the hospital setting, job opportunities exist within 

the community, in asthma clinics, sleep disorder labs, 

research centres, homecare clinics and educational 

institutions.

129 





following: 






OR 






Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 50% 

Minimum 60% 



















• Varicella 









recommended 




Accreditation 

The Respiratory Therapy Diploma program at the 

College is accredited by the Council on Accreditation 

for Respiratory Therapy Education (CoARTE). 


Graduates of the Respiratory Therapy Diploma 


to institutions such: 







Academic Calendar.

130 



Level 1 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 















PS1100 Psychology I 2 2 0 


PS1420 Health Care Organization and Structure 3 3 0

131 



Level 2 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

BL2330 Cardiopulmonary Physiology 4 4 0 

BL2340 Cardiopulmonary Pathophysiology 4 4 0 


RT2200 Gas Supply and Control 5 4 3 

RT2300 Pharmacology 3 3 0 

RT2450 Respiratory Therapy Procedures 4 3 3 


RT2230 Mechanical Ventilators 4 3 3 

RT2220 Mechanical Ventilation 4 3 3 

RT2310 Anesthesia 3 3 0 

RT2451 Neonatal/Pediatric Respiratory Care I 3 2 2 

RT2500 Cardiopulmonary Diagnostics 4 3 4 


RT3401 Comprehensive Respiratory Care 2 2 0 

SD1680 Ethics in Healthcare 3 3 0 

RT2452 Neonatal/Pediatric Respiratory Care II 3 2 2 

RT3450 Clinical Skills III 3 8 hrs/week for 

15 weeks

132 



Level 3 – Respiratory Therapy Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

RT1610 Respiratory Therapy Clinical Orientation 0 35 hrs/week for 

1 week 

RT3510 Clinical Practicum I 15 35 hrs/week for 

15 weeks 

RT3520 Clinical Practicum II 15 35 hrs/week for 

15 weeks 

RT3530 Clinical Practicum Elective 7 35 hrs/week for 

7 weeks 

The clinical phase is conducted at sites of Hamad Medical Corporation. Students will follow a rotation 

schedule designed to provide broad clinical exposure. Night, evening and/or weekend shifts could be included. 

Students must wear a uniform during clinical experiences. 

After successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may exit with the Respiratory 

Therapy Diploma.

133 

SCHOOL OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY 



Graduates of the Information Systems 

diploma programs will play an integral role 

in the continued growth of the information 

technology industry in Qatar.

134 

SCHOOL OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY

135 


School of Information Technology 

The courses in these programs have been carefully 

selected and developed to assure learning outcomes 

address technical and academic skills, and also 

employability and soft skills specific to the information 

technology industry. 



Information Systems – Web Developer 

Information Systems – Network and Systems 



Information Systems – Software 

Information Systems – Hardware 





136 

SCHOOL OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY

137 


Information Systems – Web Developer (IS-WD) 

Program 

The Information Systems – Web Developer Diploma 

program provides students with the knowledge 

and skills needed for a career in web development. 

The program begins with an emphasis on systems 

analysis and design, programming languages, and 

database management. When combined with work 

experience, this skill set prepares students for a 

career in information systems. The final stage of the 

program teaches students to design, implement and 

maintain advanced web applications. Students gain an 

in-depth knowledge of web server management, web 

security tools and techniques, and web application 

development environments. This skill set, when 

consolidated through the completion of a capstone 

project, prepares students for an exciting career in a 

web development environment. 

Objectives 

Upon successful completion of the Information 

Systems – Web Developer program, the student will 

be able to: 

1. Analyze, design, implement and maintain secure 

web sites and web applications based on user 

requirements. 

2. Develop, maintain and deploy database 

applications in an N-tier environment. 

3. Interpret and effectively apply industry policies and 

procedures. 

4. Utilize social and interpersonal skills to function as 

an effective team member in a web development 

environment. 

5. Communicate effectively with clients. 


Given the current growth of the Internet, the 

widespread use of computers in the workplace 

and the advancement of information systems 

technologies, Information Systems – Web Developer 

graduates may find employment with informationbased 

businesses in both the public and private 

sectors. Many businesses, schools, the oil and 

entrepreneurial organizations, as well as the oil and 

gas sector, need graduates from the Information 

Systems – Web Developer program. Opportunities for 

self-employment also exist. 



following: 






OR 

Advanced Mathematics (Grade 

12 level or equivalent) 



Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 50% 










The Information Systems – Web Developer program 

allows an exit point after completion of two years of 

study with an Information Systems – Software Diploma. 


Graduates of the Information Systems – Web 

Developer (IS-WD) program may have the opportunity 

to transfer credits to other academic institutions.

138 



Level 1 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 


SD1570 Effective Learning 4 4 0 

EP1130 Business for Information Systems 3 3 0 

MA1900 Problem Solving for Information Technology 4 4 1 

CP1810 Fundamental Programming Constructs 5 4 4 



CP1880 Computer Systems Architecture 4 4 1 

CP3230 Object Oriented and Event-Driven Programming I 5 3 5 

CP1932 Systems Analysis 5 4 3 

MA1910 Introduction to Numerical Problem Solving 4 3 2 

CR1260 Client Service for the Computer Industry 2 2 1 


MC1820 Computer Applications 3 2 2

139 



Level 2 – Information Systems – Software (IS-S) Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

CR1510 Website Development 3 2 3 

CP1953 Object Oriented Systems Analysis with UML 4 3 3 

CP3231 Object Oriented and Event-Driven Programming II 5 3 5 



MM1950 Workplace Professionalism 3 3 0 

CP3450 Database Design and Implementation 4 3 3 

CP3300 Data Structures 4 3 3 

EP1140 Business Operations in Information Systems 3 3 1 

CP2870 Website and Database Project using Microsoft 

Technology 

4 3 3 

WT1170 Work Term P/F 8 weeks 

After successful completion of the above listed courses, the student may graduate with the Information 

Systems – Software (IS-S) Diploma.

140 



Level 3 – Information Systems – Web Developer (IS-WD) Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

CP3320 Web Application Development I 5 3 5 

CP3630 Web Server Management 3 2 3 

CP4120 N-Tier Systems and Architecture 4 3 3 

CP3170 Multimedia for the Web 4 3 3 

CP3700 Web Application Architecture and Design 4 3 2 

CP3351 Web Application Development II 5 3 5 

CP4480 Emerging Trends in Web Development 3 2 2 

CP3271 Web Security 3 2 2 

CP3360 Web Application Development with ASP.NET 4 3 4 

PR3520 Web Developer Capstone 5 3 7 


Systems – Web Developer (IS-WD) Diploma.

141 



Network and Systems Administration (IS-NaSA) 

Program 

The Information Systems – Network and Systems 

Administration program provides students with 

the knowledge and skills needed for a career 

in deployment and management of major IT 

infrastructure installations. 

The program begins with an emphasis in computer 

hardware, troubleshooting, and basic networking 

concepts. At the end of two years of study, when 

combined with work experience, this skill set 

prepares students for a career in information systems 

hardware. The final stage of the program teaches the 

students to design, deploy and maintain advanced 

IT infrastructure projects. Students gain an in-depth 

knowledge of LAN/WAN administration, server 

room management, infrastructure security tools and 

techniques, and enterprise computing environments. 

This skill set, when consolidated through the 

completion of a capstone project, prepares the 

student for an exciting career in network and systems 

administration. 

Objectives 

The goal of the Information Systems – Network and 

Systems Administration program is to develop a 

graduate with the ability to: 

1. Design, deploy and manage information systems 


2. Interpret and effectively apply industry policies and 

procedures. 

3. Function as an effective member of a team. 

4. Provide computer technical assistance, support, 

and advice to customers and other users. 

5. Support local-area networks (LAN), wide-area 

networks (WAN), network segments, and Internet 

and intranet systems. 

6. Plan, coordinate, and implement the organization’s 

information security policy. 

7. Deploy and manage a help desk environment. 

8. Maintain a server room environment. 


Given the current growth of the Internet, the 

widespread use of computers in the workplace and 

the advancement of information systems technologies 

and mobile computing, Information Systems – 

Network and Systems Administration graduates may 

find employment with information-based businesses 

in both the public and private sectors. Opportunities 

for self-employment also exist. 



following: 






OR 





Minimum 60% 

Minimum 60% 

Minimum 50% 










The Information Systems – Network and Systems 

Administration program allows an exit point after two 

years of study with an Information Systems – Hardware 

Diploma. 


Graduates of the Information Systems – Network 

and Systems Administration program may have the 

opportunity to transfer credits to other academic 

institutions.

142 




Level 1 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

CM1400 Technical Report Writing l 3 3 0 

SD1570 Effective Learning 4 4 0 

EP1130 Business for Information Systems 3 3 0 

CP1990 Computer Hardware 4 3 2 

MA1900 Problem Solving for Information Technology 4 4 1 


CM1401 Technical Report Writing ll 3 3 0 

CR1101 Network Foundations 4 3 3 

CR2350 Introduction to Systems Analysis 4 3 2 

CP1360 Programming for Computer Systems and 

Networking 

4 3 2 

CR2510 Linux Server Administration I 3 2 3 

CR1260 Client Service for the Computer Industry 2 2 1 


MC1820 Computer Applications 3 2 2

143 




Level 2 – Information Systems – Hardware (IS-H) Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

CR2700 Network Operating System Administration 4 3 3 

CR2470 Wireless Networks 4 3 3 

CP2921 Hardware and Software Troubleshooting 5 4 2 



MM1950 Workplace Professionalism 3 3 0 

CR2210 Enterprise Mail Systems 5 4 2 

CR2440 Network Implementation 5 4 2 

CR1270 Hardware Security 4 3 2 

CR2950 Emerging Trends in IT Infrastructure 3 2 2 

WT1160 Work Term Pass/Fail 8 weeks 


Systems – Hardware (IS-H) Diploma.

144 




Level 3 – Information Systems – Network and Systems Administration (IS-NaSA) Diploma 

HRS/WK 

CR LEC LAB 

CR3100 Advanced Networking I 4 3 3 

CR3230 Enterprise Technology I 4 3 3 

CR3320 Advanced IT Hardware 3 2 3 

CR3420 Infrastructure Security 4 3 2 

CR3450 Scripting 2 1 2 

CR3101 Advanced Networking II 4 3 4 

CR3231 Enterprise Technology II 4 3 4 

CP4490 Emerging Trends in Network and Systems 


3 2 2 

CR3160 IT Service Management 4 3 2 

Elective (minimum 3 credits) 3 3 0 

PR3530 Network and Systems Administration Capstone 6 4 6 


Systems – Network and Systems Administration (IS-NaSA) Diploma.

145 

SECURITY ACADEMY 

Security 

The Security training programs at the College 

provide students with the opportunity to acquire 

and develop the skills that will allow them to work 

as security officers in a wide range of businesses, 

organization and government departments and 

agencies. We have the ability to address all security 

specialization fields in our training offerings.

146 

SECURITY ACADEMY

147 


Security 


The aim of the Security program is to provide pathway 

opportunities for students wishing to pursue careers 

as security professionals and practitioners in the 

security industry. The program is supported by 

modern facilities for instruction, highly qualified 

instructors and leading-edge technology. Our 

teaching strategies are student centered and enhance 

the learning experience. We emphasize student 

participation in all aspects of classroom activities. 

Our programs are in the field of: 

1. Security Operations 

2. Emergency Management 

3. Maritime Security 

4. Aviation Security 

5. X-ray Image Interpretation, Baggage and People 

Screening 

6. Security Control Room Operations 

7. Other Specialization courses 

The Security programs presented are based on best 

emerging security industry practices and technologies. 

We maintain a close relationship with the various 

security stakeholders in Qatar to ensure that we meet 

their training requirements and needs. 

Course Development 

We pride ourselves on our ability to develop 

tailor-made training programs to meet the special 

needs of Qatar’s security stakeholders. We have 

developed training courses in the field of guard force 

management, maritime and aviation security as well 

as emergency management. We have also developed 

a series of courses tailored specifically for law 

enforcement agencies. 

Objectives 

1. To provide students with specific knowledge and 

skills at the different required performance levels, 

ensuring professional execution of duties and 

responsibilities in the security industry. 

2. To assist the student in development of personal 

skills that are in demand by employers, including 

the ability to manage information, solve problems, 

be professional workers, work well in teams and 

produce quality work. 

3. To assist the student in developing the personal 

leadership and management skills in order to be 

highly successful in security management. 

4. To provide an internationally recognized security 

training program. 

5. To provide students with the opportunity to follow 

a career path in security. 

6. To demonstrate the team skills necessary for being 

part of a security contingent. 

7. To provide students with the knowledge and 

skills necessary for further continuation in 

post-secondary studies. 

The security studies programs prepare candidates 

from entry level up to be able to enter into diploma 

and degree levels. All career possibilities are catered 

to. Courses are generic but application and 

instructional activities can be made applicable to 

the roles and responsibilities of the client’s scope 

of security activities.

148 


Security 

Equipment 

The Security Academy has state-of-the-art training 

facilities and equipment. We have four specialized 

training classrooms. Two are dedicated to security 

control room operations and emergency management 

training. We provide training in basic security control 

room operations such as dispatch protocols and 

practices. Both rooms have a disaster management 

software program to provide training in managing 

the response and the consequences of a critical 

incident. The other rooms are dedicated to x-ray 

image interpretation and baggage and people search 

using x-ray technology. One room is equipped with a 

Computer-Based Training (CBT) program to simulate 

baggage search to develop the ability of security 

personnel to detect threat and prohibited items. The 

last room has three x-ray machines as well as a 

Walk-Through Metal Detector (WTMD) and Hand-Held 

Metal Detectors (HHMDs) for practical training. 

We have a series of simulated threat items and 

components of their items to insert into bags to make 

the training as real as possible. We have invested in a car lift so that security 

personnel assigned to search vehicles are able 

to examine and familiarize themselves with the 

underside of various vehicles.

149 


Security 

Certificate I – Security Operations 

CPPSEC2001A Communicate Effectively in the Security Industry 

CPPSEC2002A Follow Workplace Safety Procedures in the Security Industry 

CPPSEC2003A Work Effectively in the Security Industry 

Certificate II – Security Operations 

CPPSEC2001A Communicate Effectively in the Security Industry 

CPPSEC2002A Follow Workplace Safety Procedures in the Security Industry 

CPPSEC2003A Work Effectively in the Security Industry 

CPPSEC2004A Respond to Security Risk Situation 

CPPSEC2005A Work as Part of a Security Team 

CPPSEC2006A Provide Security Services to Clients 

HLTFA301B Apply First Aid 

CPPCMN2001A Control and Direct Traffic 

CPPSEC2007A Screen People 

CPPSEC2008A Screen Items 

CPPSEC2011A Control Access To and Exit From Premises 

CPPSEC2015A Patrol Premises 

TLIB407C Carry Out Vehicle Inspection 

TLIE707B Use Communication Systems

150 


Security 

Certificate III – Security Operations 

BSBFLM303C Contribute to Effective Workplace Relationships 

BSBWOR301A Organize Personal Work Priorities and Development 

CPPSEC3001A Maintain Workplace Safety in the Security Industry 

CPPSEC3002A Manage Conflict Through Negotiation 

CPPSEC3003A Determine Response to Security Risk Situation 

CPPSEC3005A Prepare and Present Security Documentation and Reports 

CPPSEC3006A Coordinate a Quality Security Service to Customers 

CPPSEC3007A Maintain Security of Environment 

CPPSEC3004A Lead Small Teams in the Security Industry 

CPPSEC3012A Store and Protect Information 

CPPSEC3017A Plan and Conduct Evacuation of Premises 

CPPSEC3020A Monitor Security from Control Room

151 


Security 

Certificate IV – Security and Risk Management 

BSBWOR401A Establish Effective Workplace Relationships 

BSBWOR402A Promote Team Effectiveness 

BSBWOR404A Develop Work Priorities 

CPPSEC4001A Manage a Safe Workplace in the Security Industry 

CPPSEC4002A Implement Effective Communication Techniques 

CPPSEC4003A Advise on Security Needs 

CPPSEC4004A Monitor and Review Security Operations 

CPPSEC4005A Facilitate Workplace Briefing and Debriefing Processes 

CPPSEC4006A Assess Risks 

CPPSEC4007A Assess Threat 

CPPSEC4012A Identify and Assess Security of Assets 

BSBCUS401A Coordinate Implementation of Customer Service Strategies 

BSBINN301A Promote Innovation in a Team Environment 

BSBMGT403A Implement Continuous Improvement 

CPPSEC4010A Manage Monitoring Centres

152

153 

TECHNICIAN PREPARATORY PROGRAM 

Technician Preparatory 

Program 

The Technician Preparatory Program (TPP) at College 

of the North Atlantic – Qatar is designed to prepare 

students to work at the technician (certificate) level 

in the industries of Qatar. Emphasis is placed on 

developing practical skills and competencies, 

problem solving skills, technical communication 

skills and the ability to work as part of a team. The 

College has world-class shops and labs equipped 

with the latest industrial equipment to deliver the 

TPP training at the highest possible level. 

The Technician Preparatory Program options are 

delivered in an alternating model consisting of six 

semesters of College learning and five semesters 

of on-the-job workplace learning. The students will 

complete Certificate l and ll, over a three semester 

period, at the College before going to the workplace. 

The Technician Preparatory Programs presented 

are part of a Technical and Further Education (TAFE) 

training package endorsed by the Australian 

Qualification Framework. 


• Electrical Technician 

• Instrumentation Technician 

• Mechanical Technician 

• Process Operator Technician

154

155 


Technician Preparatory Program 

Electrical Technician 

Program 

This program is designed to prepare students for 

entry into an electrical environment. Further training 

in the electrical field would qualify the student as an 

electrical technician in Qatar’s oil and gas industry. 

An electrical technician installs, maintains, tests, 

troubleshoots and repairs electrical equipment and 

other types of electrical and electronic controls on 

various types of equipment. Electrical technicians 

generally work in the maintenance departments of 

factories, plants, refineries, petrochemical plants 

and other industrial establishments. This program is 

designed to cover theory and practical components 

necessary for a student preparing to become an 

electrical technician. Emphasis will be on developing 

the relevant hands-on skills necessary to perform the 

duties associated with this occupation. The training 

consists of alternating semesters of in-class and 

shop training at the College and workplace learning 

assignments. 

Objectives 

1. To develop the basic knowledge and practical skills 

required to meet initial performance standards 

needed by the electrical industry. This would 

include knowledge and practical skills in: 

• Reading and interpreting drawings, blueprints and 

schematics 

• Installing, examining, replacing or repairing 

electrical wiring, receptacles, switch boxes, 

conduits, feeders, fibre-optic and coaxial cable 

assemblies, etc. 

• Testing electrical and electronic equipment 

• Maintaining, repairing, installing and testing 

switchgear, transformers, switchboard metres, 

regulators, reactors, electric motors, generators, 

alternators, hydraulic and pneumatic electrical 

control systems 

• Troubleshooting, maintaining and repairing 

industrial, electrical and electronic control 

systems 

• Conducting preventative maintenance programs 

• Installing, maintaining and calibrating industrial 

instrumentation and related devices 

2. To develop an awareness of, and concern for, good 

safety practices and procedures in the workplace. 

3. To develop skills to work independently or as 

a memeber of a team on a variety of different 

projects and tasks and to communicate effectively 

with co-workers and supervisors. 


Electrical technicians find employment with oil 

refineries, petrochemical and chemical companies, 

electrical power companies, oil and natural gas 

companies, electrical construction firms and primary 

steel producers. 

Curriculum 

The curriculum is designed to reflect competencies 

throughout the program. 

Support units will include language studies, 

communications, mathematics, science and 

computer applications. 

Discipline-specific courses include hand tools, power 

tools, fasteners, electrical theory, electrical codes, 

single-phase and three-phase theory, conduit, tubing 

and fittings, wiring, protective devices, distribution 

equipment, raceways, wireways and busways, lighting 

and controls, instrumentation, motor starters and 

controllers, power supply and rectifiers, solid state 

devices, programmable logic controller, fundamental 

programming, AC units, fibre optics, occupational 

health and safety, and technical drawing. 

Workplace learning semesters alternate with College 

shop and classroom semesters as part of the training 

program. These semesters provide students the 

opportunity to gain valuable related work experience.

156 



Certificate I 

MEM05001B Perform manual soldering/de-soldering – electrical/electronic components 

MEM12002B Perform electrical/electronic measurement 

MEM12024A Perform computations 

MEM13014A Apply principles of occupational health and safety in the work environment 

MEM14004A Plan to undertake a routine task 

MEM15024A Apply quality procedures 

MEM16007A Work with others in a manufacturing, engineering or related environment 

MEM18001C Use hand tools 

MEM18002B Use power tools/hand-held operations 

MSAENV272B Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices 

Certificate II 

MEM09002B Interpret technical drawing 

MEM10002B Terminate and connect electrical wiring 

MEM12023A Perform engineering measurements 

MEM15002A Apply quality systems 

MEM16008A Interact with computing technology 

MEM18055B Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering components 

Certificate III 

MEM10003B Install and test electrical wiring and circuits up to 1000 volts AC and 1500 volts DC 

MEM10004B Enter and change programmable controller operational parameters 

MEM12004B Perform precision electrical/electronic measurement 

MEM14005A Plan a complete activity 

MEM16006A Organize and communicate information 

MEM17003A Assist in the provision of on-the-job training 

MEM18011C Shut down and isolate machines/equipment 

MEM18046B Fault find/repair electrical equipment/components up to 1000 volts AC/1500 volts DC 

MEM18048B Fault find and repair/rectify basic electrical circuits 

MEM18049B Disconnect/reconnect fixed wired equipment up to 1000 volts AC/1500 volts DC 

MEM18051B Fault find and repair/rectify complex electrical circuits 

MEM18057B Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment

157 


Instrumentation Technician 

Program 

This program is designed to prepare students for entry 

into an instrumentation environment. Further training 

in the instrumentation field would qualify the student 

as an instrumentation technician in Qatar’s oil and 

gas industry. 

An instrumentation technician repairs, maintains, 

calibrates, adjusts and installs industrial measuring 

and controlling instrumentation. This instrumentation 

makes sure that all machines in a plant are safe and 

running correctly. This program is designed to cover 

theory and practical components necessary for a 

student preparing to become an instrumentation 

technician. Emphasis will be on developing the 

relevant hands-on skills necessary to perform the 

duties associated with this occupation. The training 



assignments. 

Objectives 

1. To develop the basic knowledge and practical skills 

required to meet initial performance standards 

needed by the oil and gas, petrochemical, and 

power generation industries. This would include 

knowledge and practical skills in: 

• Reading and interpreting drawings, blueprints 

and schematics 

• Consulting manufacturers’ manuals to determine 

testing and maintenance procedures 

• Using pneumatic, electrical and electronic testing 

devices to inspect and test instrument and 

system operation, and diagnose faults 

• Consulting with and advising of process operators 

• Repairing, maintaining and adjusting of system 

components or remove and replace 

defective parts 

• Calibrating and maintaining of components 

and instruments used to control or measure 

level, temperature, pressure, flow, or chemical 

composition 

• Installation and maintainance of instruments on 

new or existing plant equipment and processes 

• Theory of operation of pneumatic devices, 

final control elements, digital logic devices and 

computer based process control systems and 

the fundamentals of level, pressure, flow and 

temperature 

• Conducting preventative maintenance programs 


With industry becoming increasingly automated, 

instrumentation technicians are needed virtually 

anywhere there are control and metering systems. 

They are employed in the following industries: 

petrochemical, oil and natural gas companies, 

industrial chemicals manufacturers, electricity power 

generating companies, primary steel producers, 

industrial instrument and other manufacturing 

companies, fertilizer production companies, and 

industrial instrument servicing. 

Curriculum 

The curriculum is being designed to reflect 

competencies throughout the program. 


communications, mathematics, science and 


Discipline-specific courses include hand tools, 

power tools, fasteners, electrical theory, instrument 

measurement, process systems and equipment, 

controls, digital automation, occupational health 

and safety, electronics and analyzers. 





158 



Certificate I 

MEM05001B Perform manual soldering/de-soldering – electrical/electronic components 

MEM12002 B Perform electrical/electronic measurements 









MSAENV272B Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

159 





MEM12004B Perform precision electrical/electronic measurement 




MEM18018C Maintain pneumatic system components 

MEM18055B Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering components 

MEM18064B Maintain instrumentation system components 


MEM10004B Enter and change programmable controller operational parameters 

MEM10005B Commission programmable controller programs 



MEM18054B Fault find, test and calibrate instrumentation systems and equipment 

MEM18057B Maintain/service analog/digital electronic equipment 

MEM18060B Maintain, repair control instrumentation – single and multiple loop control systems 

MEM18062B Install, maintain and calibrate instrumentation sensors, transmitters and final control elements 

MEM18067B Tune control loops – multi controller or multi element systems 

MEM18069B Maintain, repair instrumentation process control analyzers

160 


Mechanical Technician 

Program 


entry into a mechanical environment. Further training 

in the mechanical field would qualify the student as a 

mechanical technician in Qatar’s oil and gas industry. 

A mechanical technician installs, maintains, 

troubleshoots and repairs stationary industrial 

machinery, mechanical equipment, and automated 

and robotic systems. Mechanical technicians are 

most often involved with installing, maintaining, 

repairing, and removing machinery and equipment 

in industrial plants and factories. This program is 

designed to cover theory and practical components 

necessary for a student preparing to become 

a mechanical technician. Emphasis will be on 

developing the relevant hands-on skills necessary to 

perform the duties associated with this occupation. 

The training consists of alternating semesters of 

in-class and shop training at the College and 

workplace learning assignments. 

Objectives 

1. To develop basic skills and knowledge required for 

work as a mechanical technician focusing on areas 

such as: 

• Installing, aligning, dismantling and moving 

stationary industrial machinery and mechanical 

equipment 

• Operating hoisting and lifting devices 

• Inspecting, adjusting, maintaining and 

troubleshooting machinery, power transmission, 

vacuum, and hydraulic and pneumatic systems 

• Assembling machinery and equipment using hand 

and power tools and welding equipment 

• Constructing foundations for machinery 

• Operating machine tools such as lathes and 

milling machines 



3. To develop skills to work independently or as a 

member of a team on a variety of different projects 

and tasks and to communicate effectively with 

co-workers and supervisors. 


The competencies acquired in this program will 

prepare the graduate for careers in a wide variety 

of occupational settings such as oil refineries, 

petrochemical and chemical companies, electrical 

power companies, oil and natural gas companies, 

industrial processing plants, primary steel producers, 

and machinery and equipment manufacturers. 

Curriculum 

The curriculum is being designed to reflect 

competencies throughout the program. 


communications, mathematics, science, and 


Discipline-specific courses include hand tools, power 

tools, power transmission, lubrication, bearings, 

rigging, welding, thermal cutting, prime movers, 

layout and machine foundations, alignment, pumps 

and valves, seals and gaskets, hydraulics, pneumatics, 

compressors, maintenance planning and scheduling, 

material handling systems, occupational health and 

safety, and technical drawing. 





161 



Certificate I 

MEM11011B Undertake manual handling 








MSAENV272B Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

162 




MEM05005B Carry out mechanical cutting 

MEM05006B Perform brazing and/or silver soldering 

MEM06007B Perform basic incidental heat/quenching, tempering and annealing 

MEM07001B Perform operational maintenance of machines/equipment 







MEM07032B Use workshop machines for basic operations 

MEM10010B Install pipework and pipework assemblies 

MEM11022B Operate fixed/moveable load shifting equipment 

MEM12006B Mark off/out (general engineering) 



MEM18003C Use tools for precision work 

MEM18004B Maintain and overhaul mechanical equipment 

MEM18005B Perform fault diagnosis, installation and removal of bearings 

MEM18006B Repair and fit engineering components 

MEM18007B Maintain and repair mechanical drives and mechanical transmission assemblies 

MEM18009B Perform leveling and alignment of machines and engineering components 

MEM18011C Shut down and isolate machines/equipment 

MEM18012B Perform installation and removal of mechanical seals 

MEM18013B Perform gland packing 

MEM18033B Perform engine bottom-end overhaul 

MEM18034B Perform engine top-end overhaul 

MEM18055B Dismantle, replace and assemble engineering components

163 


Process Operator Technician 

Program 


entry into a process operations environment. 

Process operators monitor, adjust, operate, and 

maintain processing units and equipment in a variety 

of industrial plants. They diagnose and solve problems 

related to systems operations in petroleum and 

natural gas processing, pipeline and petrochemical 

companies, and industrial, agricultural and specialty 

chemical and pharmaceutical companies. This 

program is designed to cover theory and practical 

components necessary for a student preparing to 

become a process operator. Emphasis will be on 

developing the relevant hands-on skills necessary to 

operate and maintain processing units. The training 



assignments. 

Objectives 

1. To develop skills to operate electronic or 

computerized control panels, read a variety 

of instruments to gauge pressure, flow, level, 

concentration, density, etc., adjust equipment, 

valves, pumps and controls, and troubleshoot 

process operations. 

2. To provide a basic knowledge of chemistry and 

chemical reactions. 

3. To develop operator skills to monitor and 

troubleshoot process operations. 



5. To develop skills to work independently or as a 

member of a team on a variety of different projects 

and tasks and to communicate effectively with 

co-workers and supervisors. 


The competencies acquired in this program will 

prepare the graduate for careers in a wide variety of 

industries where manufacturing and processing are 

key elements in their operations. Companies involved 

with petroleum, petrochemical, gas producing, and 

industrial and agricultural manufacturing processes 

have an ever-increasing need for skilled process 

operators. 

Curriculum 

The curriculum is designed to reflect competencies 

throughout the program. 


communications, mathematics, science, and 


Discipline-specific courses include hand tools, 

piping, pipe fittings and valves, process static 

equipment, process rotating equipment, electricity, 

instrumentation, oil, gas, GTL processes, utilities and 

operator duties, occupational health and safety, and 

technical drawing. 





164 




MSAENV272B Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices 

MSAPMOHS100A Follow OHS procedures 

MSAPMOHS110A Follow emergency response procedures 

MSAPMOHS200A Work safely 

MSAPMPER200B Work in accordance with an issued permit 

MSAPMSUP100A Apply workplace procedures 

MSAPMSUP102A Communicate in the workplace 

MSAPMSUP172A Identify and minimize environmental hazards 

MSAPMSUP292A Sample and test materials and products 

PMAOPS101C Read dials and indicators 

PMAOPS201B Operate fluid flow equipment 

PMAOPS204B Use utilities and services 

PMAOPS205B Operate heat exchangers 

PMAOPS216B Operate local control systems 

PMAOPS221B Operate and monitor prime movers 

PMAOPS222B Operate and monitor pumping systems and equipment 

PMAOPS280A Interpret process plant schematics

165 




MSAPMSUP240A Undertake minor maintenance 

PMAOPS223B Operate and monitor valve systems 

PMAOPS300B Operate a production unit 

PMAOPS301B Produce product by distillation 

PMAOPS302B Operate reactors and reaction equipment 

PMAOPS303B Operate furnaces to induce reaction 

PMAOPS304B Operate and monitor compressor systems and equipment 

PMAOPS305B Operate process control systems 

PMAOPS307B Transfer bulk fluids into/out of storage facility 

PMAOPS308B Organize storage and logistics of general materials 

PMAOPS309B Operate particulates handling/storage equipment 

PMAOPS312B Undertake ship loading/unloading operations 

PMAOPS320B Conduct artificial lift 

PMAOPS321B Undertake well management 

PMAOPS323A Operate and monitor heating furnace 

PMAOPS324A Operate a gas turbine 

PMAOPS325B Generate electrical power 

PMAOPS326B Produce product using gas absorption 

PMAOPS327B Produce product using fixed bed dehydration 

PMAOPS329B Produce product using liquid extraction 

PMAOPS330B Communicate pipeline control centre operations 

PMAOPS335A Conduct pipeline pigging 

PMAOPS340B Operate cryogenic process

166

167 


Technician Preparatory Program (TPP) 

Course Descriptions 


MEM05001B PERFORM MANUAL SOLDERING/ 

DE-SOLRDERING – ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC 

COMPONENTS 

Students will learn to perform manual soldering/ 

disordering for the installation and fabrication of 

electrical/electronic components. 

MEM09002B INTERPRET TECHNICAL DRAWINGS 

Students will learn to interpret technical drawing 

relating to any of the full range of engineering 

disciplines. Technical drawings may utilize perspective, 

exploded views or hidden view techniques. 

Interpretation may require guidance particularly 

in respect to any geometric tolerancing. 

MEM10002B TERMINATE AND CONNECT 

ELECTRICAL WIRING 

Prerequisite: MEM18001C 

This unit applies to the connection of wiring and 

includes termination and connection of all types 

of cords and cables, excluding specialist cables. 

All testing is undertaken on completed circuits 

where these are not connected to main supply, 

using appropriate methods such as continuity and 

resistance checks. Specifications are obtained from 

electrical/electronic circuit drawings and data sheets. 

MEM10003B INSTALL AND TEST ELECTRICAL 

WIRING AND CIRCUITS UP TO 1000 VOLTS AC 

AND 1500 VOLTS DC 

Prerequisite: MEM18049B 

Students will cover the installation of electrical 

wiring/systems and/or enclosures, including 

specialist cables, using the full range of installation 

materials and technique to any wiring circuits that 

are directly or indirectly connected to a power 

supply system. The scope of work includes electrical 

installation work and electrical equipment work. 

MEM10004B ENTER AND CHANGE 

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OPERATIONAL 

PARAMETERS 

Prerequisite: MEM16008A 

This unit covers entering and changing programmable 

controller operational parameters, including 

specifications and procedures gained from a range of 

circuit drawings, engineering data sheets, step 

print out, manufacturers’ procedure and data books. 

Students will undertake work autonomously or as part 

of team environment using predetermined standards 

of quality, safety and workplace procedures. Work 

is generally undertaken at location of programmable 

controller but could be undertaken with data link 

offsite. Programmable controllers include PLC and 

DCS or similar devices. 

MEM12002B PERFORM ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC 

MEASUREMENT 


This unit applies to the measurement of voltage, 

current, resistance, power, frequency etc. and DC 

circuits up to 1000 volts, using appropriate measuring 

devices and for a range of general applications. 

MEM12004B PERFORM PRECISION ELECTRICAL/ 

ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENT 

This unit applies to the identification of measuring 

requirements, the selection of appropriate measuring 

devices, and calibration and care of devices to obtain 

accurate, precision measurements. 

MEM12023A PERFORM ENGINEERING 

MEASUREMENTS 

Students will use a variety of measuring tools and 

measuring techniques appropriate and necessary 

to make non-precision and precision measurements 

in either imperial or metric standard in a range of 

manufacturing, engineering and related environments. 

It includes, where required, adjustment of measuring 

devices through simple means and typically includes 

zeroing or scale adjustment. 

MEM12024A PERFORM COMPUTATIONS 

This unit covers estimating approximate answers 

to arithmetical problems, carrying out basic 

calculations involving percentages and proportions, 

and determining simple ratios and averages. The unit 

includes producing and interpreting simple charts 

and graphs.

168 




MEM13014A APPLY PRINCIPLES OF 

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY IN THE 

WORK ENVIRONMENT 


This unit covers following occupational health and 

safety procedures in an engineering or similar work 

environment. This unit and these standards do 

not cover the skills of emergency teams such as 

firefighting, first aid officer etc. 

MEM14004A PLAN TO UNDERTAKE A 

ROUTINE TASK 


Co-requisite: MEM18001C 

This unit covers a person planning their own work 

where tasks involve one or more steps or functions 

and are carried out routinely on a regular basis. 

It includes the concepts of following routine 

instructions, specifications and requirements under 

supervision. 

MEM14005A PLAN A COMPLETE ACTIVITY 

This unit covers planning activities that, while 

following established procedures, may require a 

response and modification of procedures or choice 

of different procedures to deal with unforeseen 

developments. Activities are normally performed 

by the individual undertaking the planned activity, 

and associated reports are completed as required. 

Planning will be related to familiar work tasks and 

environments and performed to standard operating 

procedures. 

MEM15002A APPLY QUALITY SYSTEMS 

Co-requisite: MEM12023A 

This unit covers working within a quality improvement 

system, either individually or in a team situation in a 

manufacturing, engineering or related environment. 

Application may include quality inspection of one’s 

own or another employee’s work up to the level of the 

employee’s technical competence. 

MEM15024A APPLY QUALITY PROCEDURES 


Co-requisite: MEM18002B 

This competency covers applying established quality 

procedures to an employee’s own work within a 


It includes concepts of meeting customer needs 

to achieve outcomes that are ‘fit for purpose.’ This 

includes following quality procedures to conform to 

specifications and requirements. 

MEM16006A ORGANIZE AND COMMUNICATE 

INFORMATION 

Students will organize and communicate information 

related to production, maintenance or associated 

processes in manufacturing, engineering and related 

environments. Information may be drawn from a 

variety of sources. Students will demonstrate the 

ability to communicate using common workplace 

terminology. 

MEM16007A WORK WITH OTHERS IN A 

MANUFACTURING, ENGINEERING OR RELATED 

ENVIRONMENT 

This unit applies to work-related group activities 

that typically occur in and between sections or 

departments of an enterprise. Employees would 

normally be working together to achieve a common 

purpose, e.g. manufacture of a product, maintenance 

of plant and equipment. 

MEM16008A INTERACT WITH COMPUTING 

TECHNOLOGY 

This unit covers accessing, inputting and storing 

information used in manufacturing, engineering or 

related environments, using computing technology. 

MEM17003A ASSIST IN THE PROVISION OF 

ON-THE-JOB TRAINING 

This unit covers assisting in the provision of 

on-the-job training to others while undertaking normal 

duties. This may involve the replacement of normal 

duties with training duties for limited periods of time. 

Typical applications could include the provision of on 

the job guidance by a production workers/trainees. 

MEM18001C USE HAND TOOLS 



Students will develop basic hand skills that are the 

foundation for becoming a mechanical technician. 

They will complete shop projects using metal cutting 

tools, holding tools, striking tools and assembling 

tools. The course will help students develop 

knowledge and skill in tool identification, tool 

selection, tool maintenance and tool use.

169 




MEM18002B USE POWER TOOLS/HAND-HELD 

OPERATIONS 

Prerequisite: MEM13014A • Co-requisite: MEM15024A 



They will complete shop projects using power hand 

and pedestal tools, such as drills, grinders and 

saws used in industrial applications. The course will 

help students develop knowledge and skill in tool 

identification, tool selection, tool maintenance and 

tool use. 

MEM18011C SHUT DOWN AND ISOLATE 

MACHINE/EQUIPMENT 

Students will learn how to appropriately shut down 

and isolate machines/equipment in situations that 

require extensive system knowledge that exclude 

the straightforward starting/stopping of machinery/ 

equipment through the use of simple switching, 

including use of emergency switches. Shut-down/ 

isolation is undertaken autonomously or as part of 

teamwork. 

MEM18046B FAULT FIND/REPAIR ELECTRICAL 

EQUIPMENT/COMPONENTS UP TO 1000 VOLTS 

AC AND1500 VOLTS DC 


Students will locate and rectify faults in equipment 

and components using up to 1000 volts AC/1500 

DC single and multi-phase power where these are 

disconnected from the electrical supply. This course 

includes basic mechanical disconnection, dismantling 

and re-assembly of equipment components, 

enclosures, drives etc. 

MEM18048B FAULT FIND AND REPAIR/RECTIFY 

BASIC ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS 


Students will find fault and repair/rectify basic 

electrical circuits. In this course, students will work on 

basic circuit, which is defined as a single circuit with 

a single output. A single circuit may be controlled by 

one or more devices and the output may control one 

or more devices. 

MEM18049B DISCONNECT/RECONNECT FIXED 

WIRED EQUIPMENT 


Students will learn and practice appropriate ways 

of connecting and disconnecting equipment, which 

applies to all voltage levels up to 1000 volts AC/1500 

volts DC. Students will learn disconnection of 

equipment including electric motors, modular sensing 

devices and limit switches. Work may include the 

original connection of fixed wire equipment. All work 

and work practices are undertaken to local regulatory 

and legislative requirements. 

MEM18051B FAULT FIND AND REPAIR/RECTIFY 

COMPLEX ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS 

Prerequisites: MEM18049B 

Students will fault find and repair/rectify complex 

electrical circuits covering interconnected electrical 

circuits where electrical equipment and or 

components are connected electrically. The course 

addresses multiple electrical power supplies or 

sources, voltages or circuits that are found in the 

control or switching of the circuit. 

MEM18055B DISMANTLE, REPLACE AND 

ASSEMBLE ENGINEERING COMPONENTS 


This unit covers dismantling and identifying faulty 

components, selecting replacements, and 

assembling engineering components into assemblies 

or sub-assemblies in accordance with standard 

operating procedures. 

MEM18057B MAINTAIN/SERVICE ANALOG/ 

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 

Prerequisites: MEM18001C 

Students will maintain/service analog/digital 

electronic equipment and carry out the testing and 

maintenance of electronic equipment and systems, 

where a series of checks and pre-determined tests 

is applied in accordance with workshop manuals, 

testing procedures etc. Checks, tests and calibrations 

apply to a wide range of electronic systems and 

sub-assemblies used in engineering environments 

including telecommunication, process control, 

computer systems, security monitoring and alarm 

systems etc. This course also covers the replacement 

of faulty components identified during these tests.

170 




MSAENV272B PARTICIPATE IN ENVIRONMENTALLY 

SUSTAINABLE WORK PRACTICES 

This competency covers the outcomes required to 

effectively measure current resource use and carry 

out improvements including those reducing negative 

environmental impacts of work practices. 


MEM05001B PERFORM MANUAL SOLDERING/ 

DE-SOLRDERING – ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC 

COMPONENTS 

Student will learn to perform manual soldering/ 

desoldering for the installation and fabrication of 

electrical/electronic components. 

MEM09002B INTERPRET TECHNICAL DRAWING 



disciplines. Technical drawings may utilise perspective 

exploded views or hidden view techniques. 

Interpretation may require guidance particularly in 

respect to any geometric tolerancing. 

MEM10004B ENTER AND CHANGE PROGRAMMABLE 

CONTROLLER OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS 

Prerequisites: MEM16008A 

This unit covers entering and changing programmable 

controller operational parameters, including 

procedures gained from a range of circuit 

drawings, engineering data sheets, step print out, 

manufacturers’ procedure and data books. 

MEM10005B COMMISSION PROGRAMMABLE 

CONTROLLER PROGRAMS 


This unit covers adjusting and commissioning the 

programmable controller program to specification only. 

MEM12002B PERFORM ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC 

MEASUREMENT 


This unit applies to the measurement of voltage, 

current, resistance, power, frequency etc. on a.c. 

circuits up to 1000 volts, using appropriate measuring 

devices and for a range of general applications. 

MEM12004B PERFORM PRECISION ELECTRICAL/ 

ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENT 

This unit applies to the identification of measuring 

requirements, selection of appropriate measuring 

devices and calibration, and care of devices to obtain 

accurate, precision measurements. 


MEASUREMENTS 

This unit covers performing measurement skills 

requiring straightforward use of mechanical 

measuring devices and associated calculations. 





and determining simple ratios and averages. The 

unit includes producing and interpreting simple 

charts and graphs. 


OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY 

IN THE WORK ENVIRONMENT 



safety procedures in an engineering or similar 

work environment. This unit and these standards 

do not cover the skills of emergency team such as 


MEM14004A PLAN TO UNDERTAKE A 

ROUTINE TASK 




and are carried out routinely on a regular basis. 


instructions, specifications and requirements under 

supervision. 










environments and be performed to standard 

operating procedures.

171 






system, either individually or in a team situation in a 















INFORMATION 



processes in manufacturing, engineering or related 




terminology. 



ENVIRONMENT 








TECHNOLOGY 







on-the-job training to others while undertaking 

normal duties. 





They will complete shop projects using metal 

cutting tools, holding tools, striking tools, and 

assembling tools. The course will help students 

develop knowledge and skill in tool identification, tool 

selection, tool maintenance and tool use. 


OPERATIONS 






and pedestal tools, such as drills, grinders and 

saws used in industrial applications. The course will 



tool use. 

MEM18018C MAINTAIN PNEUMATIC SYSTEM 

COMPONENTS 


This unit covers checking pneumatic system 

components, and identifying and repairing or 

replacing faulty components. Pneumatic system 

components are identified, inspected and assessed 

using fluid power principles to predetermined 

specifications interpreted from data sheets and 

circuits diagrams. Correct operational function 

of equipment components is confirmed and 

commissioned in conformance with specification, 

using standard operating procedures. 

MEM18054B FAULT FIND, TEST AND CALIBRATE 

INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 


This unit covers testing instrumentation systems and 

equipment; applying data collection techniques and 

localizing fault conditions; analyzing and reporting 

test results; and calibrating instrumentation systems 

and components.

172 









components, selecting replacements, and assembling 

engineering components into assemblies or 

sub-assemblies in accordance with standard 

operating procedures. 

MEM18057B MAINTAIN/SERVICE ANALOG/ 

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 

Prerequisites: MEM18001C 

This unit covers maintaining/servicing analog/digital 

electronic equipment. 

MEM18060B MAINTAIN, REPAIR CONTROL 

INSTRUMENTATION – SINGLE AND MULTIPLE 

LOOP CONTROL SYSTEMS 


This unit covers determining control loop 

characteristics, monitoring and recording the 

operation of a control loop, localizing the fault 

condition, and replacing or repairing the faulty 

condition. 

MEM18062B INSTALL, MAINTAIN AND CALIBRATE 

INSTRUMENTATION SENSORS, TRANSMITTERS 

AND FINAL CONTROL ELEMENTS 


This unit covers selecting and installing appropriate 

sensors and signal transmitters, maintaining and 

diagnosing correct operation of sensors and signal 

transmitters, and completing fault documentation. 

MEM18064B MAINTAIN INSTRUMENTATION 

SYSTEM COMPONENTS 


This unit covers maintaining instrument system 

components of a primarily mechanical nature. An 

understanding of instrumentation principles is 

required. 

MEM18067B TUNE CONTROL LOOPS – MULTI 

CONTROLLER OR MULTI ELEMENT SYSTEMS 


This unit covers determining and recording control 

loop characteristics, tuning control loops and 

completing service records. 

MEM18069B MAINTAIN, REPAIR 

INSTRUMENTATION PROCESS CONTROL 

ANALYZERS 


This unit covers performing preventative maintenance 

on process control analyzers; completing fault 

documentation; planning corrective action; repairing, 

replacing, overhauling, calibrating and testing; and 

re-installing and decommissioning process control 

analyzers. 








MEM05005B CARRY OUT MECHANICAL CUTTING 


This unit applies to sawing, shearing, cropping and/ 

or holing and includes setting up and operating a 

range of equipment. Examples of machines that could 

be covered include guillotines, croppers, cold saws, 

band saws, automatic saws etc. Typical applications 

of this unit include cutting ferrous and non-ferrous 

metals and non-metallic products in a maintenance 

environment. 

MEM05006B PERFORM BRAZING AND/OR 

SILVER SOLDERING 


Students will learn and practice procedures, 

terminology and appropriate safety precautions, as 

applied to oxy-acetylene use in brazing and soldering 

processes. Work includes the preparation of materials 

and equipment and the inspection of the 

completed work. 

MEM06007B PERFORM BASIC INCIDENTAL HEAT/ 

QUENCHING, TEMPERING AND ANNEALING 


This unit covers performing straightforward heating/ 

quenching, tempering and annealing of ferrous and 

non-ferrous metals to specifications.

173 




MEM07001B PERFORM OPERATIONAL 

MAINTENANCE OF MACHINES/EQUIPMENT 


This unit covers carrying out programmed safety 

and maintenance checks on machines/equipment 

including manual, semi-automatic and automatic 

machines of a stand-alone continuous production or 

process nature. 

MEM07032B USE WORKSHOP MACHINES FOR 

BASIC OPERATIONS 


This unit covers basic machining in a maintenance 

or jobbing environment and applies to machines that 

include but are not limited to lathes, radial arm drills, 

mills etc., and covers the sharpening of tools 

as required. 

MEM09002B INTERPRET TECHNICAL DRAWING 



disciplines. Technical drawings may utilize 

perspective, exploded views or hidden view 

techniques. Interpretation may require guidance 

particularly in respect to any geometric tolerancing. 

MEM10010B INSTALL PIPEWORK AND PIPEWORK 

ASSEMBLIES 

This unit applies to installation of ferrous, non-ferrous 

and PVC pipes and fittings. Pipework and installation 

is performed to established practices and standards. 

MEM11011B UNDERTAKE MANUAL HANDLING 


This unit covers lifting and moving materials manually 

and/or using basic manual handling equipment in a 

wide range of environments. 

MEM11022B OPERATE FIXED/MOVEABLE LOAD 

SHIFTING EQUIPMENT 

This unit applies to the operation of fixed/ 

moveable load shifting equipment within the limits 

of manufacturers’ recommended procedures and 

safe working loads. It applies to load shifting/lifting 

activities where knowledge of codes and signals is 

not required. 

MEM12006B MARK OFF/OUT (GENERAL 

ENGINEERING) 


This unit applies to marking off/out techniques used 

for the transfer of dimensions from engineering 

drawings, prints or plans. Marking off/out is 

undertaken using appropriate tools and equipment; 

templates are produced as required. 


MEASUREMENTS 

This unit covers performing measurement skills 

requiring straightforward use of mechanical 

measuring devices and associated calculations. 





and determining simple ratios and averages. The 

unit includes producing and interpreting simple charts 

and graphs. 


OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY IN THE 

WORK ENVIRONMENT 




safety procedures in an engineering or similar work 

environment. This unit and these standards do 

not cover the skills of emergency teams such as 


MEM14004A PLAN TO UNDERTAKE 

A ROUTINE TASK 




and are carried our routinely on a regular basis. 


instructions, specifications and requirements 

under supervision.

174 













environments and performed to standard operating 

procedures. 



system, either individually or in a team situation, in a 















INFORMATION 



processes in manufacturing, engineering or related 




terminology. 



ENVIRONMENT 








TECHNOLOGY 







on-the-job training to others while undertaking normal 

duties. This may involve the replacement of normal 

duties with training duties for limited periods of time. 

Typical applications could include the provision of 

on the job guidance by a production worker to other 

production workers/trainees. 





They will complete shop projects using metal cutting 

tools, holding tools, striking tools and assembling 

tools. The course will help students develop 

knowledge and skill in tool identification, tool 

selection, tool maintenance and tool use. 


OPERATIONS 





and pedestal tools such as drills, grinders and saws 

used in industrial applications. The course will 



tool use. 

MEM18003C USE TOOLS FOR PRECISION WORK 


This unit involves using a variety of tools, instruments 

and power equipment to perform precision tasks on 

a range of metallic and non-metallic materials. The 

types of precision work covered by this unit could 

include: scraping machine beds to precise tolerances, 

broaching a tapered keyway, hand reaming the bore of 

a spigot or bush to a positive transition fit with shaft, 

core drilling (finishing) a blind locating hole to receive 

a mating pin, lapping a mechanical seal to fine finish, 

filing complex angles and mating edges, precision 

grinding using flex-drive attachment or similar.

175 




MEM18004B MAINTAIN AND OVERHAUL 

MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 


This unit covers diagnosing, locating faults, repairing, 

overhauling, fitting and adjusting mechanical systems 

and equipment. This unit integrates the application 

of prerequisite diagnostic, maintenance and overhaul 

competencies. 

MEM18005B PERFORM FAULT DIAGNOSIS, 

INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF BEARINGS 


This unit covers performing routine bearing checks 

during operations and non-operation, diagnosing 

bearing faults, identifying bearing requirements 

for replacement or installation, and removing and 

installing bearings. 

MEM18006B REPAIR AND FIT ENGINEERING 

COMPONENTS 


This unit covers fault finding, repairing faulty 

components, manufacturing new parts/components, 

and fitting mechanical engineering components into 

assemblies or sub-assemblies. 

MEM18007 MAINTAIN AND REPAIR MECHANICAL 

DRIVES AND MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION 

ASSEMBLIES 

This unit covers diagnosing faults and repairing drives 

and transmission assemblies, and undertaking final 

adjustment and commissioning. 

MEM18009B PERFORM LEVELING AND 

ALIGNMENT OF MACHINES AND ENGINEERING 

COMPONENTS 


This unit covers undertaking leveling and alignment 

measurements/readings and performing leveling 

and/or alignment tasks. 

MEM18011C SHUT DOWN AND ISOLATE 

MACHINES/EQUIPMENT 

This unit covers isolating and shutting down machines 

and equipment. The unit applies to situations that 

require extensive system knowledge that exclude 

the straightforward starting/stopping of machinery/ 

equipment through the use of simple switching, 

including use of emergency switches. Shut-down/ 

isolation is undertaken autonomously or as part of 

teamwork. 

MEM18012B PERFORM INSTALLATION AND 

REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL SEALS 


Skills covered by this unit include the knowledge of 

appropriate applications for a range of mechanical 

seals and the ability to remove, select, repair or 

replace all component parts of the seal. Lubrication 

requirements are completed according to suppliers’ 

instructions and recommendations or specifications. 

MEM18013B PERFORM GLAND PACKING 


This unit covers inspecting glands and gland packing, 

and removing and replacing or topping up gland 

packing. The unit applies to, but is not limited to, 

packing for high or low temperatures and pressures, 

solids, gases and liquids. 

MEM18033B PERFORM ENGINE 

BOTTOM-END OVERHAUL 


This unit covers dismantling, cleaning and assessing 

parts, recording and interpreting measurements, and 

reconditioning components. 

MEM18034B PERFORM ENGINE TOP-END 

OVERHAUL 


This unit covers dismantling, clearing and assessing 

parts, recording and interpreting measurements, and 

reconditioning the cylinder head. 





components, selecting replacements and assembling 

engineering components into assemblies or 

sub-assemblies in accordance with standard 

operating procedures.

176 

















MSAPMOHS100A FOLLOW OHS PROCEDURES 

This competency unit relates to the worker’s ability 

to recognize hazards commonly occurring at the 

workplace and follow health and safety instructions 

and procedures in the workplace. 

MSAPMOHS110A FOLLOW EMERGENCY 

RESPONSE PROCEDURES 

Prerequisite: MSAPMOHS100A 

This competency unit relates to the appropriate 

response to emergency situations for any new 

workers at the workplace, possibly delivered as part 

of an induction program. 

MSAPMOHS200A WORK SAFELY 

Prerequisites: MSAPMSUP102A 

This competency unit relates to the worker’s ability to 

identify occupational health and safety (OHS) hazards, 

and assess workplace with minimal supervision. The 

worker will also be capable of participating in and 

contributing to OHS management issues. 

MSAPMPER200B WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH 

AN ISSUED PERMIT 


This competency unit aims to ensure that people 

working under a permit to work understand the 

system, know the limitations of the permit under 

which they are working and comply with all the 

requirements of the permit. 

MSAPMSUP100A APPLY WORKPLACE 

PROCEDURES 


This competency unit covers the skills and knowledge 

required to complete one’s own work activities. 

MSAPMSUP102A COMMUNICATE IN THE 

WORKPLACE 

Prerequisite: PMAOPS101C 

This competency unit covers receiving, relaying and 

recording written and oral messages and providing 

relevant information in response to requests, within 

timelines. 

MSAPMSUP172A IDENTIFY AND MINIMUM 

ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS 

Prerequisite: MSAPMSUP100A 

This competency unit covers the skills and knowledge 

required to complete one’s own work activities. 

MSAPMSUP240A UNDERTAKE MINOR 

MAINTENANCE 

Prerequisite: PMAOPS280B 

This unit applies to operators who are involved in 

providing basic maintenance and the resolving of 

routine problems to procedures. It does not cover 

activities normally requiring traditional trade training. 

MSAPMSUP292A SAMPLE AND TEST MATERIALS 

AND PRODUCTS 


This competency unit covers the taking of routine 

samples and the conducting of simple tests. 

PMAOPS101C READ DIALS AND INDICATORS 


This competency unit covers making (or taking) 

readings/measurements in a variety of sites 

and locations, using common types of plant 

instrumentation. It also covers recording 

measurement results in a prescribed format, 

according to procedures and with the appropriate 

level of detail included in all reports. 

PMAOPS201B OPERATE FLUID FLOW EQUIPMENT 


This competency unit covers the operation of the 

range of pumps and valves typically encountered in 

the fluid flow system monitoring and troubleshooting 

these items.

177 




PMAOPS204B USE UTILITIES AND SERVICES 

Prerequisite: MSAPMPER200B 

This competency unit covers the use of a range of 

utilities and services in the plant. It includes the 

selection of the appropriate utility/service from those 

provided to the plant and recognizing and responding 

to operational problems as required. 

PMAOPS205B OPERATE HEAT EXCHANGERS 


This competency unit is typically performed by an 

operator and covers the operation of heat exchangers, 

including heat exchangers that form part of heating, 

cooling or refrigeration systems, and solving of heat 

exchanger problems. 

PMAOPS216B OPERATE LOCAL CONTROL 

SYSTEMS 


This competency unit covers the operation of a local 

control panel. These controllers use simple control 

algorithms and only a limited number of control loops. 

Typically it will be located on the plant, but may also 

be located offplant and include simple panels in a 

control room that are not part of the main control panel. 

PMAOPS221B OPERATE AND MONITOR 

PRIME MOVERS 


This competency unit covers the operation of a prime 

mover and its ancillary equipment, which is used to 

drive a highpressure pump or compressor. The prime 

mover may be a large highvoltage/current electrical 

motor, a turbine or a diesel engine. It is a complex, 

independent item of equipment with a specialized 

start up and shut down procedure. 

PMAOPS222B OPERATE AND MONITOR PUMPING 

SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 


This competency unit covers prime movers used to 

drive a complete pumping system including pumps 

and ancillary equipment (e.g. vibration monitors, 

lubrication pumps and equipment, gear boxes and 

barring gear). The pumps covered by this unit typically 

are used for hydrocarbon transmission lines. 

PMAOPS223B OPERATE AND MONITOR VALVE 

SYSTEMS 


This unit covers the adjustment and monitoring of 

valves and ancillary equipment as part of controlling 

a process, e.g. hydrocarbons transport pipeline, gas 

distribution network. 

PMAOPS280B INTERPRET PROCESS PLANT 

SCHEMATICS 


This competency unit covers the interpretation of 

process plant schematics for a range of operations 

uses. It includes a wide range of schematics. 

PMAOPS300B OPERATE A PRODUCTION UNIT 


This competency covers the operation of an 

enterprisespecific unit of a production plant where 

the operations technician would operate 

independently in a plant with local control or in 

liaison with the control room operator in a plant with 

distributed control system (DSC) type controls. 

PMAOPS301B PRODUCE PRODUCT BY 

DISTILLATION 


This unit covers the monitoring and controlling of 

a distillation unit, which is separating two or more 

components to achieve finished product. The process 

may or may not be controlled from a central control 

room. 

PMAOPS302B OPERATE REACTORS AND 

REACTION EQUIPMENT 


This unit covers the operation of a production unit 

that, as its prime function, causes and controls 

a chemical reaction. It includes the operation of 

equipment ancillary to the main reactor. The reactor 

or reaction equipment includes types of reactors such 

as batch, continuous, catalytic and fluidized bed. 

PMAOPS303B OPERATE FURNACES TO INDUCE 

REACTION 


This unit covers the operation of furnaces for the 

primary purpose of causing, inducing or facilitating a 

chemical reaction such as cracking, smelting or other 

very high temperature processes. The furnace will 

typically be directly fired, or may use the feed as the 

fuel. It does not apply to steamheated reactors.

178 




PMAOPS304B OPERATE AND MONITOR 

COMPRESSOR SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 


This unit covers the operation and monitoring of 

a complex compressor system and associated 

equipment. 

PMAOPS305B OPERATE PROCESS CONTROL 

SYSTEMS 


This unit covers the operation of a centralized control 

panel. These controllers use a range of control 

algorithms and multiple control loops. The panel will 

control multiple vessels/plant items and/or products. 

It will typically be located offplant in a control room. 

PMAOPS307B TRANSFER BULK FLUIDS INTO/OUT 

OF STORAGE FACILITY 


This unit covers landbased tank farms or tankers at 

sea. The control room operator, from the main panel, 

will monitor and control the transfer of product into 

storage facilities including controlling product levels, 

flows, temperatures and pressures. 

PMAOPS308B ORGANIZE STORAGE AND 

LOGISTICS OF GENERAL MATERIALS 


This competency covers the operation of the materials 

storage and retrieval system. In a typical scenario, 

an operations technician organizes the storage and 

logistics of general materials for the plant or work area. 

PMAOPS309B OPERATE PARTICULATES 

HANDLING/STORAGE EQUIPMENT 


This competency covers the skills needed to 

manage a complex storage facility. This requires the 

operations technician to utilize the storage capacity 

efficiently, and to ensure particulates are stored in 

the appropriate containers. The operations technician 

also needs to monitor the quality and quantity of 

stock held in each container, and to ensure all 

containers are free of contamination. 

PMAOPS312B UNDERTAKE SHIP LOADING/ 

UNLOADING OPERATIONS 


This unit covers the transfer of materials/products 

from the loading area to vessels or from vessels to 

storage areas. The operations technician will report 

the state of readiness of the loading facilities before 

starting transfer to the loading master and to the 

terminal operator. 

PMAOPS320B CONDUCT ARTIFICIAL LIFT 


This unit covers the artificial lift of fluids from 

operating wells either on land or offshore using 

pumps, valves and compressors. The operations 

technician is also responsible for conducting tests and 

analyses of the product and the operating condition of 

the equipment. 

PMAOPS321B UNDERTAKE WELL MANAGEMENT 


This unit includes operating and monitoring the 

performance of well equipment, making adjustments 

to and reporting on product flows, identifying and 

reporting operational problems, and being aware of 

and contributing to a safe working environment and 

the safe and productive operation of the system. 

PMAOPS323A OPERATE AND MONITOR HEATING 

FURNACE 


This unit covers performing startup, takeover/ 

handover, monitoring, shut down and storage of 

a heating furnace and associated equipment to 

legislative requirements, standards and codes 

of practice. 

PMAOPS324A OPERATE A GAS TURBINE 


This unit covers the operation of a stationary gas 

turbine in a typical power generation or compression 

operation. This unit includes starting up/shutting 

down and monitoring the performance of the 

equipment, as well as a full understanding of OHS 

requirements, including emergency situations. 

PMAOPS325B GENERATE ELECTRICAL POWER 


This unit includes operating and monitoring the 

performance of the power generation plant and 

making appropriate changes to meet power demand. 

PMAOPS326B PRODUCE PRODUCT USING GAS 

ABSORPTION 


This unit involves the operation and monitoring of 

gas absorption units and ancillary equipment such 

as glycol dehydration or CO2 absorption units.

179 




PMAOPS327B PRODUCE PRODUCT USING FIXED 

BED DEHYDRATION 


This unit covers the operation and monitoring of fixed 

bed dehydration units and ancillary equipment. The 

operations technician learns to identify and report 

operational problems, be aware of and contribute to 

a safe working environment, contribute to the safe 

and productive operation of the system, and operate, 

monitor and maintain the equipment using relevant 

procedures. 

PMAOPS329B PRODUCE PRODUCT USING LIQUID 

EXTRACTION 


This unit covers liquid extraction occurring in a natural 

gas processing plant and contains an absorber, 

deethanizer tower, turbo expander compressor, 

cold separator vessel and various plate fintype heat 

exchangers. 

PMAOPS330B COMMUNICATE PIPELINE CONTROL 

CENTRE OPERATIONS 


This unit covers the operation of a pipeline control 

centre. The centre will be the hub for pipeline 

activities in order to achieve minimum risk to 

continued safe and efficient operation of the pipeline 

system. 

PMAOPS335A CONDUCT PIPELINE PIGGING 


This unit covers the monitoring of the pig launching 

and receiving operations in/on a large plant/platform. 

The type of pigs used may include batching, cleaning, 

gauging, intelligent and foam pigs. 

PMAOPS340B OPERATE CRYOGENIC PROCESS 


This competency covers the skills needed to 

operate and maintain complex refrigeration/ 

cryogenic systems that involve multistage centrifugal 

compressor (or similar) and associated equipment, 

including computer control and monitoring systems. 

TPP Language Studies 

TPP-GL-103 

This course is designed for learners with very low 

proficiency in English. Using an integrated skills 

approach, listening, speaking, reading and writing 

are taught with a focus on routine, non-demanding, 

personal contexts of language use. Grammar, 

vocabulary and pronunciation are embedded within 

the teaching of the four skills. Success strategies for 

the classroom and the workplace form an integral part 

of the course. Upon completion, learners will have 

attained initial basic proficiency in English. 

TPP-GL-104 

This course is designed for learners with Initial Basic 

Proficiency in English. Using an integrated skills 

approach, listening, speaking, reading and writing 

are taught with a focus on routine, non-demanding, 

daily work-related contexts of language use within 

the energy and other industry sectors. Grammar, 





attained Developing Basic Proficiency in English. 

TPP-GL-105 

This course is designed for learners with Developing 

Basic Proficiency in English. Using an integrated skills 

approach, listening, speaking, reading and writing are 

taught with a focus on routine, non-demanding, 

work-related contexts of language use within the 

energy and other industry sectors. Grammar, 





attained Adequate Basic Proficiency in English. 

TPP-GL-106 

This course is designed for learners with Adequate 

Basic Proficiency in English. Using an integrated 

skills approach, listening, speaking, reading and 

writing are taught with a focus on routine, familiar, 

moderately demanding, work-related contexts of 

language use within the energy and other industry 

sectors. Grammar, vocabulary and pronunciation 

are embedded within the teaching of the four skills. 

Success strategies for the classroom and the 

workplace form an integral part of the course. Upon 

completion, learners will have attained Fluent Basic 

Proficiency in English.

180 




TPP-GL-1071 

This course is designed for learners with Fluent Basic 

Proficiency in English and is part one of a three-part 

course. Using an integrated skills approach, listening, 

speaking, reading and writing are taught with a focus 

on routine, demanding, work-related contexts of 


sectors. Grammar, vocabulary and pronunciation are 

embedded within the teaching of the four skills. It 

is designed to support competency-based learning 

skills needed for success at the Technical and 

Further Education (TAFE) Certificate II level. Success 

strategies for the classroom and the workplace form 

an integral part of the course. Upon completion of 

the three-part course, learner will have attained Initial 

Intermediate Proficiency in English. 

TPP-GL-1072 


Proficiency in English and is part two of a three-part 









Further Education (TAFE) Certificate II level. Success 


an integral part of the course. Upon completion 

of all three parts, learners will have attained Initial 


TPP-GL-1073 


Proficiency in English and is part three of a three-part 









Further Education (TAFE) Certificate lI level. Success 


an integral part of the course. Upon completion, 

learners will have attained Initial Intermediate 

Proficiency in English. 

TPP-GL-107A 


Proficiency in English. This is a GL1071 and GL1072 

remedial course. As well, it fulfills the requirements of 

GL1073. Using an integrated skills approach, listening, 






This course is designed to support competencybased 

learning skills needed for success for the 

Technical and Further Education (TAFE) Certificate 

II level. Success strategies for the classroom and 

the workplace form an integral part of the course. 

Upon completion, learners will have attained Initial 


TPP-GL-107B 


Proficiency in English. This is a GL1073 remedial 







This course is designed to support competencybased 

learning skills needed for success for the 

Technical and Further Education (TAFE) Certificate 

II level. Success strategies for the classroom and 

the workplace form an integral part of the course. 

Upon completion, learners will have attained Initial 


TPP-WC-301 

This course is designed for learners with Initial 

Intermediate Proficiency in English. Using an 

integrated skills approach, listening, speaking, reading 

and writing are taught with a focus on nonroutine, 

demanding, work-related contexts of language use 

within the energy and industry sector. Grammar, 


the teaching of the four skills. It is designed to 

support competency-based learning skills needed 

for success at the Technical and Further Education 

(TAFE) Certificate III level. Success strategies for the 

classroom and the workplace form an integral part 


attained Developing Intermediate Proficiency 

in English.

181 




TPP-WC-302 













of the course. Upon completion, learner will have 

attained Adequate Intermediate Proficiency in English. 

TPP-WC-303 














attained Fluent Intermediate Proficiency in English. 

TPP Math, Science and Computers 

TPP-MA-103 TECHNICIAN PREPARATORY 

PROGRAM (TPP) FOUNDATION MATHEMATICS I 

Prerequisite: Appropriate score on the CNA-Q General 

Math Placement (GMP) test 

Co-requisite: TPP-GL-105 

This is a course in Foundation Mathematics designed 

to help alleviate specific weakness in students’ 

basic mathematical skills and thereby increase their 

chances for success in further courses. It is the first 

of two foundation mathematics courses designed to 

provide the fundamentals of mathematics. 


PROGRAM (TPP) FOUNDATION MATHEMATICS ll 

Prerequisites: TPP-MA-103 and TPP-GL-105 

Co-requisite: TPP-GL-106 

This is a course in foundation mathematics designed 

to help alleviate specific weaknesses in students’ 

basic mathematical skills and thereby increase their 

chances for success in further courses. It is the 

second of two foundation mathematics courses 

designed to provide the fundamentals of mathematics. 


PROGRAM (TPP) MATHEMATICS lll 

Prerequisites: Appropriate score on the CNA-Q 

General Math Placement (GMP) test or TPP-MA-104 

and TPP-GL-106 • Co-requisite: TPP-GL-1071 

This is a course in basic mathematics for TPP 

students. Its focus is on geometric and trigonometric 

mathematical functions and their application in 

industrial processes. 


PROGRAM (TPP) PREPARATORY MATHEMATICS I 



students. Its focus is on mathematical functions and 

their application required in industrial processes. 


PROGRAM (TPP) PREPARATORY MATHEMATICS II 



students. Its focus is on mathematical functions and 

their application required in industrial processes. 

TPP-MC-105 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS 

This course is designed to give the student an 

introduction to computer systems. Upon successful 

completion of this course, students will have a 

basic understanding of computer systems and their 

operation, popular software packages and their 

applications, and security issues associated with the 

use of computers. 

TPP-SI-101 GENERAL SCIENCE FOR TECHNICIANS 

Prerequisite: TPP-WC-302 or equivalent 

Co-requisite: TPP-MA-302 or equivalent 

This is a course in Science Foundations for Technician 

and Arts students. It serves to introduce core physics 

and chemistry vocabulary and science concepts 

qualitatively. Basic quantitative computations will be 

introduced for select topics.

182

183 

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS 

Course Descriptions

184

185 



AC1025 PREPARATORY FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING 

This course introduces accounting concepts 

beginning with the recording of transactions. The 

student is led through the basic of the double-entry 

system of accounting from adjusting entries to 

financial statements. In additions, there is a strong 

emphasis on using and understanding accounting 

terminology. 

AC1100 BOOKKEEPING I 

Bookkeeping I is a study of the fundamental principles, 

the mechanics of bookkeeping, recording, classifying, 

and the summarizing of financial data for a service 

business. It involves the control of cash, petty cash, 

banking procedures, and payroll accounting. 

AC1260 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING I 

This course introduces the student to accounting 

concepts, including: the basics of the double-entry 

accounting system including adjusting entries; 

financial statement preparation; accounting for 

payroll; accounting for a merchandising company, 

and the basics of internal control of cash. This course 

emphasizes the national accounting standards 

(private enterprise GAAP). 

AC1350 INCOME TAX 

Prerequisites: AC2220 

The student is introduced to the basic principles 

of the Canadian Income Tax. Emphasis is placed 

on computing taxable income and taxes payable 

for individuals and corporations. The course 

includes basic tax planning ideas for individuals and 

corporations. 

AC2100 BOOKKEEPING II 

Prerequisite: AC1100 

Bookkeeping II involves the application of accounts 

receivable, accounts payable and the study and 

application of the generally accepted accounting 

principles within merchandising firms using 

special journals, end-of-the-year adjustments for 

depreciation, accruals, bad debts, closing entries, 

and financial statements. 

AC2220 INTERMEDIATE FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING I 

Prerequisite: AC2260, MC1241 

This course is designed to build on the knowledge 

obtained in Financial Accounting I and II. Its focus is 

on the asset side of the balance sheet, providing an 

in-depth study of current assets, property, plant and 

equipment and intangible assets. The recognition 

and measurement of revenues and expenses are 

also covered. 

AC2230 COMPUTERIZED ACCOUNTING I 

Prerequisites: Either AC2100, AC1260 or equivalent 

introductory accounting course, and either CP1450 

or MC1240 

This course introduces the student to the elements 

of integrated computerized financial accounting 

software (such as Simply Accounting by Sage). The 

student will explore integrated software systems, 

general ledger, payables, receivables, payroll, and 

inventory. The student will have the opportunity to 

apply the skills through various applications. 

AC2231 COMPUTERIZED ACCOUNTING ll 


This course completes the study of computerized 

accounting systems started in AC2230 Computerized 

Accounting I. The student will learn how to use 

computerized accounting software to: perform 

bank reconciliation, enter foreign currency 

transactions, and perform project allocations, 

budgeting, departmental accounting, timing and 

billing. Furthermore, the student will learn to use 

spreadsheets for analyzing, planning and decision 

making for intermediate accounting, and managerial 

accounting content through the use of comprehensive 

case studies and simulations. 

AC2250 MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING I 

Prerequisite: AC2260, MC1241 

This course is designed to provide the student with 

knowledge in accounting techniques required by 

management for planning and control, decision 

making, performance evaluation, and preparation of 

internal reports. 

AC2260 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING II 


This course introduces the student to the principles 

and procedures needed to account for long-term 

assets (including capital assets, intangible assets, 

and investments), liabilities, and equities, and to the 

concepts of financial reporting and decision making 

for both partnerships and corporations. In this course 

the student will explore property, plant, equipment 

and intangibles; current and long-term liabilities; 

partnership accounting; corporate organizations, 

transactions and reporting; bonds as liabilities and 

investments; equity investments; statement of cash 

flows; and analyzing financial statements. This course 

emphasizes the national accounting standards 

(private enterprise GAAP). 

AC1025 – AC2260

186 


AC2340 PRINCIPLES OF AUDITING 


This course is designed to further students’ 

knowledge of auditing by introducing them to the 

principles of external auditing. The course is a 

practical guide to external auditing and practice. 

AC2360 PRINCIPLES OF INTERNAL AUDITING 


Co-requisite: AC3220 

This course is designed to provide an introduction 

to auditing for accounting students who do not have 

significant auditing or accounting experience. The 

course is a practical guide to both auditing theory 

and practice. The course will introduce students 

to the practice of internal audit and the auditor’s 

decision-making process. 

AC2370 PRINCIPLES OF TAXATION 

Prerequisites: AC2260, MA2400 

This course will provide students with an introduction 

to taxation. It focuses on the theory behind taxation 

rather than the practical application so that students 

gain an understanding of how and why taxes exist. 

By taking this course, the students will recognize the 

major tax issues inherent in business and financial 

transactions. The main focus will be on corporate 

taxation and corporate tax planning, especially in 

an international environment. Additional topics such 

as individual taxation, value-added taxes (VAT), and 

custom duties will be covered in a depth relative to 

their presence in the local tax environment. 

AC2540 OIL AND GAS PRODUCTION ACCOUNTING 

Prerequisites: AC2260 

This course will provide students with an overview 

of the development of the oil and gas industry, 

from inception to modern practices and from the 

reservoir to refining, and the role that the production 

accountant plays in accounting for oil and gas. This 

will enable students to understand and communicate 

effectively with professionals in the oil and gas 

industry and to understand and apply the accounting 

concepts. 

AC2600 MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING FOR HUMAN 

RESOURCE MANAGERS 


This course is designed to introduce the learner to 

the accounting techniques needed by management for 

planning and control, decision making, performance 

evaluation, and preparation of internal reports. The 

learner will explore basic concepts of managerial 

accounting; departmental, project and program cost 

allocation; budgeting and control; control through 

standard costs; flexible budgets and overhead 

analysis; control of decentralized operations; and 

pricing of products and services. The learner will 

have the opportunity to apply their skills through 

practical learning. 

AC2640 MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING FOR 

NON-ACCOUNTING MAJORS 


This course introduces the student to accounting 

needed by management for planning and control, 

decision making, performance evaluation and 

preparation of internal reports. 

AC3220 INTERMEDIATE FINANCIAL 

ACCOUNTING II 


This course is a continuation of the study of the 

principles and procedures covered in the previous 

semester of Intermediate Financial Accounting. The 

contents present an in-depth study of the liabilities 

and owner’s equity side of the statement of financial 

position, as well as an in-depth study of the statement 

of cash flows. 

AC3230 COMPUTERIZED ACCOUNTING II 

Prerequisites: AC2100 or AC1260 and CP1450 

or equivalent 

This is a more advanced computerized accounting 

course. Students will be introduced to a computerized 

accounting package such as Accpac, NewViews or 

System II.

187 


AC3240 INTERNATIONAL ACCOUNTING 


Co-requisite: FN2110 

In recognition of the increasing presence of 

multi-nationals, this course is designed to provide 

senior students with an introduction to accounting in 

an international business environment. The course 

will start with an overview of the major national 

accounting bodies, the significant differences in their 

current standards, and the history of how and why 

they developed different accounting approaches. 

Students will subsequently gain an understanding 

of the increasing need for harmonization of 

accounting approaches and the increasing role of the 

International Accounting Standards Board in today’s 

global context. 

AC3250 MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING II 


This course is designed to build on the knowledge 

gained in Management Accounting I by taking the 

students’ previous knowledge of cost behaviour 

and applying it to specialized areas of cost and 

management accounting including budgeting, 

standard costing, relevant cost analysis, pricing of 

products and services, and capital budgeting. 

AC3251 MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING III 



knowledge in accounting techniques required by 

management for planning and control, decision 

making, performance evaluation and preparation 

of internal reports. Topics include organizational 

structure, cost terminology, job order and process 

costing, cost-volume-profit analysis, cost allocation, 

and segment analysis. The emphasis of the course 

is on modern cost management and performance 

measurement techniques and application to 

real-world examples and cases. 

C3260 PAYROLL AND COMMODITY TAXES 

Prerequisites: AC2260, AC2230 

This course introduces the basic principles of payroll 

administration and commodity taxes. The student will 

be able to account for and file the required reports for 

payroll and commodity taxes. 

AE1130 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS FOR 

INSTRUMENTATION 

Prerequisite: ET1101 

This is a second-year course that is intended to teach 

students semiconductor theory as well as the theory 

of operation of a number of electronic devices used in 

the area of industrial instrumentation. 

AE1260 POWER ELECTRONICS 


This course introduces the student to solid state 

electronics for industrial power supplies and on/off 

control of high current devices. 

AE2250 POWER ELECTRONICS 

Prerequisite: AE1200 

This course introduces the student to practical 

circuit design and applications of electronic devices 

and circuits. 

AE2350 ANALOG ELECTRONICS I 


This course provides comprehensive study of the 

basic principles of electromagnetic wave propagation 

as they are applied to transmission lines, waveguides 

and antennas with applications in wired and wireless 

communications systems. 

AE2351 ANALOG ELECTRONICS II 


This course provides a study of analog applications 

of advanced transistor circuits and operational 

amplifiers, with emphasis on circuit analysis, 

applications, circuit simulation and troubleshooting. 

Also included is a study of IC power supply linear 

and switching regulators, as well as thyristors and 

representative power control circuits. 

AE3110 ANALOG INTEGRATED CIRCUITS 


The purpose of this course is to provide the student 

with an understanding of the theory relating to 

operational amplifier circuits, analog and other filters, 

and advanced power supplies. The theory covered 

in class will be applied and validated during the 

laboratory periods. 

BK1100 BANKING OPERATIONS I 

This course is designed to familiarize students 

first with the main principles and guidelines that 

characterize the banking industry and then to 

provide them with a basic understanding of, 

and hands-on exposure to, the operations and 

transactions conducted in a bank setting. This course 

will also emphasize the importance of teamwork, 

discipline, and sound work ethics. Students will be 

evaluated on their class participation, punctuality, 

teamwork, and overall attitude. 

AC2340 – BK1100

188 


BL1010 BIOLOGY 

Prerequisite: FL1080 

This is a foundation course designed for the student 

with a weak background in biology. This laboratory 

course introduces the student to principles of 

biology and includes the following major topics: 

basic microscopy, cellular structure and function, 

biological organization, biological compounds, cellular 

processes, and genetics. 


Prerequisite: BL1010 

This is a foundation course designed for the student 

with a weak background in biology. This course is 

designed to introduce the student to the principles of 

human biology. The major topics include systems of 

the human body. 

BL1130 MICROBIOLOGY 

This is an introductory microbiology course 

designed to introduce students to the diversity of 

microorganisms, their relationship to environmental 

technology, and the basic lab techniques used to 

identify and enumerate them. This course prepares 

students to apply microbiological techniques to 

monitor water and air quality, domestic and industrial 

water and wastewater treatment systems, and site 

remediation projects. 


Prerequisite: CH1011 or equivalent 

This is an introductory biology course designed to 

develop scientific literacy and prepare students for 

entry into Health Sciences programs. The course 

focuses on the fundamental concepts of biology 

and provides introduction to the study of human 

systems with particular emphasis on the skeletal 

and nervous systems. 

BL1210 BIOLOGY II 


BL1210 is a continuation of BL1200, with emphasis 

being placed on the anatomy and physiology of 

the following human systems: integumentary, the 

sensory organs, endocrine, lymphatic, urinary, and 

reproductive systems. 

BL1240 GENERAL AND ORAL MICROBIOLOGY 


This course provides the student with an introduction 

to general and oral microbiology. An overview of 

microbiological classification, ecology, transmission, 

and control will be presented as well as an 

introduction to host factors affecting health and 

disease. This will provide the rationale for the student 

to apply principles of sterilization and infection 

control in pre-clinical and clinical experiences. The 

oral microbiology of dental plaque and its function in 

the development of caries and periodontal disease 

will be studied. This course will be applied in the 

development of effective preventive therapies for 

relevant case studies and clients. 

BL1250 OROFACIAL ANATOMY 

This course provides the student with basic dental 

knowledge and terminology, anatomy of the head, 

oral cavity and individual teeth, as well as anomalies 

and pathology of the oral cavity. Emphasis is placed 

on theoretical knowledge that will be applied in a 

clinical setting. 

BL1270 OROFACIAL ANATOMY 

This course provides the student with detailed study 

of the anatomy of the head and neck. Primary topics 

are skeletal and muscular or facial anatomy and the 

nerve and vascular supply to the region. In addition, 

the anatomy of the oral cavity and primary and 

permanent dentition will be studied. 

BL1280 MICROBIOLOGY AND 

INFECTION CONTROL 

This course is designed to provide students with 

the rationale for proper infection control and the 

knowledge and ability to implement policies and 

procedures necessary to protect themselves as well 

as prevent the transmission of disease in the dental 

office. The microbiology component of this course 

provides students with the necessary foundation to 

understand the organisms that cause disease and the 

approaches necessary to destroy them. Diseases of 

concern to dentistry are the main focus.

189 



This is an introductory biology course, with emphasis 

being placed on the following: a study of the cell, 

its structure and function; a comparison between 

animal and plant cells; a brief study of selected 

organisms of the Protista kingdom and a comparison 

between eukaryotes and prokaryotes; a study of DNA, 

RNA and protein synthesis; an introductory study 

of gene regulation in prokaryotes and eukaryotes; 

the principles of heredity; an introductory study of 

biotechnology; a study of tissues; an introduction to 

anatomical and medical terminology; and a study of 

the skeletal system. 



This is a course in human anatomy and physiology, 

with emphasis being placed on the following systems: 

cardiovascular, lymphatic, respiratory, endocrine, 

nervous and sensory organs, and related medical 

terminology. 



This six-week course is a continuation of the second 

semester anatomy and physiology course with 

emphasis on the following systems: digestive, urinary 

and reproductive, and related medical terminology. 

BL2330 CARDIOPULMONARY PHYSIOLOGY 

Prerequisites: Successful completion of third semester 

This course is an in-depth study of the anatomy 

and physiology of the cardiopulmonary and other 

body systems, which have an impact on respiratory 

medicine. Included will be the analysis of various 

disease conditions that affect the human body, 

especially the cardiopulmonary components. 

BL2340 CARDIOPULMONARY PATHOPHYSIOLOGY 


This course will enable the student to describe the 

pathophysiologic manifestations, clinical signs, 

symptoms, and therapeutic management of the major 

cardiopulmonary diseases, in order to facilitate the 

development of treatment protocols. 

BL2410 MICROBIOLOGY 


This is an introductory course covering the basic 

aspects of microbiology, with emphasis on the role 

of microorganisms in disease and methods of control 

utilized in respiratory care. 

CE1140 NETWORK COMPUTER ESSENTIALS 

This course introduces learners to the fundamentals 

of computer hardware and software with an emphasis 

on the requirements for a networked environment. 

The early course covers the hardware (HW) of network 

computing systems (PC), servers, remote computing 

devices and peripherals. As the course develops, 

learners are introduced to the operating systems 

(OS) that are installed on these devices. Learners 

will be able to describe the internal components of 

a computer, assemble a computer system, install an 

operating system, and troubleshoot using system 

tools and diagnostic software. Learners will also be 

able to connect the Internet and share resources 

in a network environment. In addition to the above, 

learners will look at PC security and the role of good 

communications in the troubleshooting process. 

Essential knowledge and skills will be developed using 

a combination of classroom instruction and hands-on 

practical experience. 

CE1210 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS I 

This course introduces learners to the concept of 

networking using a top-down approach. Throughout 

this course learners will examine the role and 

operation of networks including applications, 

protocols, devices and media. Learners will also be 

introduced to wireless networks. This course provides 

the student with significant practical experience in 

networking. Upon completion of this course, the 

student should have a reasonable understanding of 

topics such as how local area networks function, 

the role of IP addressing, and how data is reliably 

transported between hosts across the Internet. 

Learners will be expected to construct a simple 

network, apply appropriate IP addresses, and to 

configure connectivity between a wireless LAN client 

and a wireless access point. 

BL1010 – CE1210

190 


CE2130 IP ROUTING 

Prerequisite: CE1210 

This course introduces learners to the technology and 

design of IP networks at Layer 3 of the OSI and TCP/IP 

models. Throughout this course, learners will examine 

the role and operation of routing protocols as they are 

applied to networks. The specific routing protocols 

examined are RIP, RIPv2, EIGRP and OSPF. This 

course provides the learner with significant practical 

experience in the design and configuration of multiple 

touring protocols to achieve network implementation. 

Upon completion of this course, the learner should 

have an excellent understanding of routing protocols, 

their behaviour, and design considerations for 

the selection of the correct implementation for 

specific network requirements. Learners will be 

expected to construct multiple networks and apply 

appropriate configurations to establish network 

connectivity within the LAN as well as provide Internet 

connectivity. Students enrolled in this course are also 

registered in the Cisco Networking Academy Program. 

Successful completion of Basic Communications 

Networks, IP Routing, Switching and Wireless, and 

Accessing the WAN will qualify students to write the 

Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA) industry 

certification exam. 

CE2270 ELECTRONIC ANALOG COMMUNICATIONS 

Prerequisite: MA1101 

Co-requisites: AE2320 or AE2350 

This is an intermediate-level electronics course 

designed to provide students with an introduction to 

the signals and processes of analog communications. 

CE2300 TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS 


Co-requisite: CE2130 

This course is designed to provide a detailed 

understanding of the design and technologies used by 

telecommunication service providers to deliver voice 

and data services. Emphasis is placed on the currently 

deployed switching, transmission and signalling 

systems technologies. Specific topics include 

the architecture of the public switched telephone 

network (PSTN) and the use of this network construct 

to provide data services. Technology emphasis is 

on local loop, digital switch network including the 

ITU-T E.164 international public telecommunication 

numbering plan, Integrated Services Digital Network 

(ISDN), time-division multiplexing (TDM), Frame 

Relay (FR), Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), 

and synchronous optical networking (SONET). The 

roadmap to evolve these facilities in support of mobile 

and Internet Protocol services will be explained. 

CE2400 SWITCHING AND WIRELESS 


This course introduces learners to Layer 2 switching 

of the OSI TCP/IP. Upon completion of this course, 

the student will be familiar with concepts such as 

VLANs, VTP and STP. Throughout the course the 

student is presented with opportunities to apply 

the covered concepts and to construct converged 

switched networks. The student will also learn how 

switching technology is implemented in wireless 

networks (IEEE 802.11) and how LAN switching is 

modelled, planned, and deployed in the local area 

network (LAN), metropolitan area network (MAN), and 

wide area network (WAN). Students enrolled in this 

course are also registered in the Cisco Networking 

Academy Program. Successful completion of Basic 

Communications Networks, IP Routing, Switching and 

Wireless, and Accessing the WAN will qualify students 

to write the Cisco Certified Network Associate 

(CCNA) industry certification exam. 

CE2500 ACCESSING THE WAN 

Prerequisites: CE2130, CE2400 

This course provides learners integrated and 

comprehensive instruction on wide area network 

(WAN) technologies and network services required 

by converged applications in enterprise networks. 

The student is also introduced to other WAN 

technologies such as Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) 

and virtual private networks (VPNs) as well as network 

addressing using IPv6. Throughout the course the 

student is presented with practical labs to apply 

the covered concepts and to construct converged 

network solutions. The student will also learn how to 

assess the impact of advanced service on the WAN, 

like Data and VoIP, and then create the required 

design to meet these requirements. Additionally 

students use the layered model approach to isolate, 

identify, and correct common network problems 

at layers 1, 2, 3 and 7. Students enrolled in this 

course are also registered in the Cisco Networking 

Academy Program. Successful completion of Basic 

Communications Networks, IP Routing, Switching and 

Wireless, and Accessing the WAN will qualify students 

to write the Cisco Certified Network Associate 

(CCNA) industry certification exam. 

CE2700 ANTENNAS AND MICROWAVES 

This course provides a comprehensive study of 

transmission lines, waveguides, and antennas with 

application in radio systems. Topics covered include 

transmission line parameters, waveguides and 

components, antennas, antenna measurements, 

and impedance matching with Smith charts.

191 


CE2730 ELECTROMAGNETICS FOR ELECTRONIC 

COMMUNICATIONS 

Prerequisites: MA1101, MP2140 or ET1151 

This course provides a comprehensive study of the 

basic principles of electromagnetic wave propagation 

as they are applied to transmission lines, waveguides 

and antennas, with applications in wired and wireless 


CE3140 RF COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 

Prerequisites: CE2270, CE2730 

This is an advanced electronic communications 

course. It provides a solid background for 

understanding and analyzing the modern 


CE3160 L2 – L4 SWITCHING 

Prerequisite: DP3410 

Co-requisite: CR2430 

The course will provide the student with the skills to 

design and configure new Layer 2 to Layer 4 hardware 

(ASIC) based campus switching and its applications, 

that are poised to improve and/or replace CPUbased 

routing. The course also supplies students with 

knowledge of Ethernet over SONET complementary 

technology to carry switched Layer 2, plus Ethernet 

switching over omnipresent SONET WAN (Ethernet 

over SONET or EOS) carrier. 

CE3200 DIGITAL DATA CARRIER NETWORKS 

Prerequisites: DP3410, AE2320 

This course provides a detailed and practical 

discussion of the system theory leading to the design 

and operation of the telephone communications 

network. Emphasis is placed on the digital facilities 

in current use by local telecommunications utilities. 

Lectures are supplemented by projects, field trips, 

and laboratory experiments. 

CE3230 IP NETWORK SECURITY 


Security is of paramount importance in today’s 

business world. Not only is the number of security 

threats increasing, but the sophistication of threats 

is increasing as well. This course looks at the various 

types of threats and how to mitigate them. Students 

will focus on securing the different elements of a 

network. Students will look at tunneling technologies 

used for remote user connections. They will also 

look at the various encryption schemes used. 

Students will engage in ethical hacking to become 

familiar with some of the more common threats to 

network security. 

CE3240 BROADCASTING ENGINEERING 

TECHNOLOGY 



This course provides learners with a basic 

understanding of broadcast technology and 

systems. The course first introduces the student to 

the capture of video and audio media as it applies 

to broadcast signals using analog technology as 

well as the regional standards required. This is 

followed with a comprehensive understanding of 

the transition to digital broadcast and the new 

standards required. Students will be able to explain 

the difference between analog and digital broadcast 

technology and systems. They will also understand 

the transport solutions for broadcast media using 

satellite technology, cable technology, and Internet 

protocol technology and the important similarities 

and differences for each in the distribution of 

the broadcast content. Learners will acquire a 

comprehensive understanding through the use of 

course materials, broadcast industry reference 

materials, and practical laboratory skills training. 

CE3430 NETWORK CABLING 


This course will provide the student with the 

necessary skills to design and implement 

high-performance cabling systems. The performance 

level of the system determines the type of cabling 

and hardware to be used, the rules to be followed 

(i.e. TIA/EIA-568A standard), and the type of testing 

and documentation required to certify performance 

and troubleshoot the installation. It focuses on the 

physical layer of the Open Systems Interconnection 

(OSI) network model and includes the electrical and 

mechanical aspects of interfacing to the transmission 

medium and impact on performance they may have. 

This includes analysis of copper cabling, fibre-optics, 

connectors and interconnection hardware, electrical 

code requirements for installation, performance 

certification, and documentation of best practices. 

CE3510 MICROWAVE CIRCUIT DESIGN 

Prerequisites: CE2270, CE2730, plus either AE2321 

or AE2351 

This course involves design and simulation of radio 

frequency amplifier circuits. It provides the students 

with the analytical and modelling skills to analyze 

and assist in the development of radio frequency 

microwave communications subsystems. 

CE2130 – CE3510

192 


CE3640 UNIFIED COMMUNICATIONS 

Prerequisites: CE3160 and CE1210 or CE2130 

and CE2400 

This course provides students with an understanding 

of unified communications topics such as Voice 

over Internet Protocol (VoIP). Topics include unified 

communications components and technologies, 

PSTN architecture, VoIP, protocols and signalling, 

and unified communications deployment. Upon 

completion of this course, students may choose to 

pursue professional certification such as CCNA Voice. 

CF1120 MATERIALS AND PROCESSES 

Prerequisites: CF1100 or CF1160 (in Qatar) 

The purpose of this course is to familiarize the 

student with production and fabrication processes 

and practices used in the industrial environment. A 

continuation of the CF1100 Materials and Processes, 

this course will give an overview of non-metal 

materials used in engineering processes and an 

understanding of surface treatments, coatings, and 

corrosion. Manufacturing processes include metal 

removal, joining processes, casting processes, 

forming and shaping processes. 

CF1160 MATERIALS PRACTICES 

Prerequisite: CH1120 

This introductory course characterizes industrial 

materials, with an emphasis on metals. Students 

will have opportunity to handle samples of different 

materials and to conduct tests that highlight material 

characteristics. The emphasis in this course is to 

ensure students understand why specific materials 

are considered for industrial application. 

CF2240 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS 

Prerequisites: FM2160, CF1160 or CF1120 

This is a course in the mechanics of solids. Of 

principal concern are the deformation of materials 

under applied loads and the associated stress 

distributions. Emphasis will be placed on elementary 

strength of materials theory with the associated 

approximations. This course provides a basis for 

machine element design and structural analysis. 

CF2520 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS 

Prerequisites: PH1101, MA1101 

This course is included in the petroleum 

technology program curriculum as an engineering 

science. It forms part of the core of courses 

that introduce students to the fundamentals of 

applied problem solving. 

CH1010 CHEMISTRY 

Prerequisite: FL1070 or equivalent 

Co-requisite: MA1025 

This is a course in preparatory chemistry designed 


science skills and thereby increase their chances 

for success in further courses. It is the first of 

two preparatory courses designed to provide the 

fundamentals of chemistry. Its focus is on chemical 

basics and terminology with an introduction to 

chemical reactions and stoichiometry. 



This is a course in preparatory chemistry designed 


science skills and thereby increase their chances 

for success in further courses. It is the second of 

two preparatory courses designed to provide the 

fundamentals of chemistry. Its focus is on chemical 

bonding, solution chemistry, chemical equilibrium, 

and acids and bases. 


This is an introductory course designed to give 

students knowledge and understanding of the 

fundamental chemical concepts that will form the 

basis for further studies in science and technology. 



This course will further develop the fundamental 

concepts of chemistry, with emphasis on those 

relevant to the chemistry of materials and to the 

processes of polymer chemistry, thermochemistry, 

chemical reaction rates and equilibrium, 

electrochemistry, metals and alloys. 


This is an introductory course in chemistry dealing 

with the fundamental laws of chemistry, the nature of 

matter and structure of the atom, the periodic table, 

chemical bonding, stoichiochemistry, and the physical 

states of matter and solutions. The quantitative 

aspects of chemistry are stressed. 



This is a continuation of CH1200. Major topics include 

gas laws, oxidation-reduction, electrochemistry, 

chemical nomenclature, chemical kinetics, nuclear 

chemistry, and chemical equilibrium. The quantitative 

aspects of chemistry are stressed.

193 


CH1210 CHEMISTRY II 


This course is designed as a continuation of CH1200. 

Major topics include gas laws, chemical kinetics, 

equilibrium, and acid-base chemistry, as well as 

introductions to organic, descriptive, and nuclear 

chemistry. 



This six-week course is a continuation of the second 

semester course. Major topics include various types 

of chemical equilibria such as gaseous equilibria, 

solubility equilibria, and acid-base equilibria. The 

quantitative aspects are stressed. 

CH2230 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 


This is an introductory course in chemical equilibrium 

and analysis. It will introduce the students to chemical 

equilibria as well as classical methods of quantitative 

chemical analysis such as gravimetry and titrimetry 

and simple instrumental techniques used for field 

measurement (pH, colorimetry, conductivity, and 

dissolved oxygen). 

CH2370 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 


This is an introductory course in organic chemistry 

for Chemical Laboratory Technician students. 

Major topics studied are the study of basic organic 

compounds including alkanes, alkenes, aromatic 

hydrocarbons, alcohols, and other functional groups. 

The course also focuses on an introduction to the 

properties of petroleum and polymer chemistry. 

CH2420 HYDROCARBON CHEMISTRY 


This is a course in organic chemistry designed to give 

petroleum students a knowledge and understanding 

of the fundamental chemical concepts of organic 

products and derivatives which are prominent in the 

hydrocarbon processing industry. 

CH2430 INDUSTRIAL PROCESS OVERVIEW 

This course will introduce students to the chemical 

processes specific to local industry, focusing on 

feedstocks, derivatives, and final products. They 

will also be studied in relation to their impact on the 

global economy. Process efficiency calculations such 

as material balances will be introduced as well. 

CH2460 INDUSTRIAL CHEMISTRY 

Co-requisite: CH1120 

This course will introduce students to chemical 

industries generally on a global perspective with 

focus specifically on local industries. The student 

will also get to perform a detailed case study on 

local industries. 

CH2540 CHEMICAL LABORATORY TECHNIQUES I 


This course will introduce laboratory safety, basic 

laboratory equipment, and techniques used to 

measure basic properties. Laboratory management 

and quality will be a major emphasis. These 

principles will be reinforced in laboratory periods 

using discovery, demonstration, participation, and 

teamwork techniques. 

CH2541 CHEMICAL LABORATORY TECHNIQUES II 


This course will introduce instrumental techniques 

and procedures in the chemistry laboratory. A 

focus on quality control and assurance as well as 

standardized test procedures will be a key focus of 

the course. 

CH2740 ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY 

This course will expand on the general chemistry 

studied in first year courses with a significant portion 

of the course devoted to an introduction to organic 

chemistry. The course will incorporate information 

and techniques studied in the first year courses to 

detail the interaction between chemicals and the 

environment. Specific attention will be placed on 

interactions and reactions that take place in the 

atmosphere and in water bodies when these are 

exposed to chemicals. Of particular interest will 

be areas concerned with toxicological chemistry. 

Monitoring and ecological/health effects will also 

be studied. 

CH2770 ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY 

Prerequisites: CH1120 or CH1200 

This is an introductory course in environmental 

chemistry. Major topics studied are the study of 

basic environmental chemistry, water chemistry, and 

atmospheric chemistry, as well as waste and waste 

management and its relationship to the environment. 

The laboratory component focuses on field and 

sampling techniques. 

CH2830 INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSIS 

Prerequisites: CH1120, CH2230 

This is an introductory course in instrumentation. It 

will introduce the students to both spectroscopy and 

chromatographic techniques and apply principles to 

industrially related experiments. 

CE3640 – CH2830

194 


CH2860 ANALYSIS AND SAMPLING TECHNIQUES 

Prerequisites: Successful completion of all 

courses to date 

This is a final semester course in analysis and 

sampling techniques. Students learn proper sampling 

methods and chain-of-command for obtaining and 

testing of field samples. Emphasis is placed on 

both qualitative and chemical analysis techniques 

developed throughout the program. 

CH3100 CHEMISTRY FOR PROCESS ANALYZERS 

This course will provide students the knowledge and 

understanding of the fundamental chemical concepts 

that will form the basis for further studies of process 

analyzers. 

CI1100 ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION 


Co-requisites: DP1100, AE2300 or AE2301 

This is a practical course in which students become 

acquainted with the variety of laboratory and test 

equipment that could be encountered in a working 

environment. The course focuses on applications of 

the concepts learned. 

CI1120 INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS 



This is a first-year course in basic industrial 

instrumentation and its purpose is to introduce 

students to new terms, symbols, and industrial 

pressure measurement. 

CI1121 PROCESS FIELD INSTRUMENTATION 

Prerequisite: CI1120 

This is a second-year course in industrial process 

measurement. Its purpose is to introduce students 

to the methods used by the processing industries to 

measure various physical properties such as pressure, 

level/density, flow, temperature, and humidity. 

CI1140 INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRICAL AND 

INSTRUMENTATION TECHNOLOGY 

This is a hands-on course that will enable students to 

read existing electrical and instrumentation drawings 

so they can identify the physical components within 

the College. It includes an overview of electrical 

distribution, the three line diagrams for the College’s 

distribution system and a motor control centre. For 

electrical control, the as-built electrical drawings for 

the pilot plant will be used. For the instrumentation 

section of the course, participants will use the piping 

and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs), process flow 

diagrams (PFDs), and loop drawings for the various 

processes in the College to identify the physical 

locations of the various components in the process. 

CI1180 BASIC INSTRUMENTATION 


This course provides a comprehensive treatment 

of sensors and methods of measuring automated 

process variables. The student will be introduced to 

the underlying concepts and operation of industrial 

measurement devices and control systems. 

CI1260 INSTRUMENTATION WORKSHOP I 


This is a first-year course that is intended to provide 

students with many of the mechanical skills required 

in the field of industrial instrumentation. Hazardous 

materials handling and safe work practices will also be 

stressed. 

CI1261 INSTRUMENTATION WORKSHOP II 

Prerequisites: CI1260, CI1121 

This is a second-year course that is intended to 

provide students with many of the skills required to 

work in a hazardous area. A major practical project 

will also be completed by the student working as a 

member of a team of individuals. 

CI1310 ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC FABRICATION 

TECHNIQUES 

Prerequisite: ET1101 or ET1131 

This is a practical electrical/electronics course for 

students entering the primary electrical/electronics 

technical intersession. This course enables the 

student to obtain practical knowledge in soldering, 

wiring, fabrication, and proper use of test equipment 

as related to accepted procedures found in industry. 

CI1320 ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC FABRICATION 

TECHNIQUES 

Prerequisite: ET1101, ET1131 or ET1151 

This is a practical electrical/electronics course for 

students entering their program discipline. This 

course enables the student to obtain practical 

knowledge in soldering, wiring, fabrication, and 

proper use of test equipment as related to accepted 

procedures found in industry. 

CI1330 INSTRUMENT TUBE AND FITTINGS 


Co-requisite: CI1260 

This course will introduce the student to various 

types of mechanical fittings and tubing used in 

industry. Mechanical skills will be taught that will 

enable the student to plan and perform a tubing 

installation project.

195 


CI1350 BASIC PROCESS AUTOMATION 

Prerequisite: CM1190, CI1140 

In this course the participants will run existing 

process to determine the types of the devices used 

to measure level, flow, and other parameters within a 

plant and how the final control elements interact with 

the automation control system. 

CI1540 INDUSTRIAL PROCESS OPERATIONS 


This course will introduce the student to a number 

of industrial process unit operations. The intention 

is to provide the student an overview of how various 

industrial systems operate and how the controls 

systems are integrated with those operations. 

CI1600 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS I 



The purpose of this course is to familiarize the student 

with electronic and digital controllers as well as basic 

feedback control. This is a second year course that 

is intended to provide the student an opportunity 

to learn how various types of processing industries 

regulate such things as pressure, level, flow etc. 

CI1601 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS II 


The purpose of this course is to familiarize the student 

with the various control strategies implemented by the 

processing industries. 

CI1660 INTRODUCTION TO CONTROL SYSTEMS 


This is an introduction to process control systems, 

designed to provide the students with the basics 

of proportional-integral-derivative (PID) control 

as well as an overview of more advanced systems 

and strategies. An overview of programmable logic 

controllers (PLCs) and distributed control systems 

(DCSs) will also be provided. Fire and gas detection/ 

emergency shutdown will also be covered. 

CI1700 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 

Prerequisites: CI1600, DP1110, CI1121 


student with computerized process control systems 

commonly referred to as distributed control 

systems (DCSs). 

CI1820 INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS ANALYZERS 

Prerequisites: CH1120, CI1120 

This course will introduce the student to various 

types of process analysis. Methods of calibration 

and applications of statistical methods (mean, 

standard deviation, control charts, tests, and linear 

regression analysis) will be applied to measurements. 

Electrochemical principles will be applied to the 

study of corrosion, conductivity, oxidation reduction 

potential (ORP), and pH. 

CI2100 PRESSURE AND LEVEL MEASUREMENT 

AND CONTROL 


This is the second core instrumentation course 

designed to reinforce the basic instrumentation 

concepts previously covered. The various types 

of transmitters used to measure pressure and level 

will be covered in detail. The control section of the 

course will show how the transmitters are used in 

a control loop. 

CI2120 FINAL CONTROL ELEMENTS AND 

INSTRUMENT AIR SYSTEMS 

This course focuses on the various types of valves 

and damper operators as well as the auxiliary devices 

used to position and supply power to the actuator. The 

final section of the course covers how instrument air 

is produced for an industrial plant. 

CI2230 FLOW AND TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 

AND CONTROL 


This course develops further understanding of types 

of control strategies and introduces students to the 

principles and operation of flow and temperature 

control systems, with an introduction to cascade and 

feed forward control systems. 

CI2240 INSTRUMENTATION (HYDRAULICS AND 

PNEUMATICS) 

This introductory course is designed to acquaint the 

student with the design and operation of industrial 

hydraulic and pneumatic systems. It includes a review 

of the selection and integration of the components 

used to build and control hydraulic and pneumatic 

circuits. Operational control and troubleshooting of 

basic circuits is an integral component of the course. 

CI2300 ADVANCED CONTROL STRATEGIES 


This course covers advanced proportional-integralderivative 

(PID) control strategies with an emphasis 

on boiler control. 

CH2860 – CI2300

196 


CI2560 PROCESS ANALYZERS 


This course will provide basic instrumentation 

techniques for chemical analysis in the chemical 

process industries, including analytical equipment in 

a process laboratory setting using on-line equipment. 

Techniques covered include ultraviolet/visible 

and infrared spectrophotometry, gas and liquid 

chromatography, mass spectrometry, conductivity 

and potentiometry. 

CI2850 FINAL CONTROL ELEMENTS 


This is a second-year course and its purpose is to 

teach students about various types of control valves 

and damper operators as well as the auxiliary devices 

that are used with them. 

CI3110 SAFETY SHUTDOWN AND MACHINE 

MONITORING SYSTEMS 


This course covers basic shutdown systems on 

boilers and then covers the safety shutdown systems 

found in the oil and gas industry. The course also 

introduces software that can be used for process 

and optimization. 

CI3160 INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS ANALYSIS 


This course will introduce the student to process 

analysis. Methods of calibration and applications 

of statistical methods (mean, standard deviation, 

control charts, t-tests and linear regression analysis) 

will be applied to measurements. Electrochemical 

principles will be applied to the study of conductivity, 

oxidation reduction potential (ORP), pH and other 

electrochemical analyzers. The course also introduces 

students to the use of statistics in monitoring quality 

control in industrial processes. The course reviews 

electrochemical principles as they apply to corrosion 

and corrosion control in industry. The student 

will learn how control of industrial processes by 

electrochemical methods is accomplished. 

CI3230 ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL 

APPLICATIONS 


The purpose of this course is to provide students with 

the knowledge to maximize process unit productivity 

while minimizing operating costs. 

CI3310 PROCESS OPTIMIZATION AND ASSET 

MANAGEMENT 


This course uses software tools to evaluate process 

loop characteristics and determine the best strategies 

for optimizing the control loop and determining 

interactions within the process that negatively impact 

control strategies. Asset management tools can 

improve maintenance and calibration documentation, 

and provide a preventive maintenance tool for 

troubleshooting process equipment. 

CI3320 FOUNDATION FIELDBUS 

Prerequisites: DP2360 

This course will provide the student with an 

understanding of Foundation Fieldbus technology 

and how to apply this technology in a plant. 

CI3330 PROCESS ANALYZERS 


This course will provide basic instrumentation 

techniques for chemical analysis in the chemical 

process industries, including analytical equipment 

in a process laboratory setting using on-line 

equipment. Techniques covered include gas and liquid 

chromatography and mass spectrometry. 

CI3600 INDUSTRIAL PROCESS CONTROL 


This is an introduction to process control systems, 

designed to provide students with the basics of 

proportional-integral-derivative (PID) control as well 

as an overview of more advanced systems. 

CI3720 INDUSTRIAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 



the knowledge of how to choose, connect, program 

and configure emergency shutdown, fire and gas, 

vibration monitoring, and pH control systems. 

CI3840 ADVANCED CONTROL THEORY 



Advanced control system theory will be studied in the 

lab. Application of industrial process systems control, 

using instrumentation software such as MATLAB for 

the design modification and analysis of industrial 

process control systems will also be studied. 

CI3850 ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL 

OPERATIONS 



the knowledge to maximize process unit productivity 

while minimizing operating costs.

197 


CM1100 WRITING FUNDAMENTALS 

Writing Fundamentals is an introductory course 

designed to review writing fundamentals. It includes 

an introduction to reference tools and a review of 

grammar, punctuation, spelling, and usage. Students 

will apply principles of writing in sentence and 

paragraph construction. 

CM1190 TECHNICAL READING 

This course is designed for Engineering and Applied 

Science students and focuses on reading to learn 

technical texts by interpreting and analyzing 

information and data. It develops reading skills and 

strategies with emphasis on vocabulary development. 

CM1240 BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS I 

Business Communications I is designed to introduce 

students to the writing requirements of business 

environments. The course is intended to provide 

ample in-class opportunities to review writing 

fundamentals and improve writing skills using 

common business applications. 

CM1241 BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS II 

Prerequisite: CM1240 

Business Communications II is designed to further 

students’ knowledge and competence in preparing 

business documents for the workplace. The course is 

intended to provide opportunities to improve writing 

skills using various business applications. 

CM1400 TECHNICAL REPORT WRITING I 

This course is designed to teach technology students 

the fundamentals of technical reporting in both 

oral and written forms. Emphasis is on strategies 

of technical reporting, research techniques, and 

organizational skills. 

CM1401 TECHNICAL REPORT WRITING II 

Prerequisite: CM1400 or equivalent 

This course is designed to help students formulate 

criteria for structuring informal and semi-formal 

reports. Various report formats will be examined with 

emphasis on statistical data analysis, documentation, 

and illustration methods. Oral reporting techniques 

will be enhanced through problem-solving reports and 

the technical sales presentation. 

CM1430 TECHNICAL COMMUNICATIONS 

This course is designed to teach lab technician 

students the fundamentals of technical reporting 

in written form. Emphasis is on strategies of 

technical reporting, technical language usage, and 

organizational skills. 

CM1800 TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION FOR 

PARAMEDICS 


This course is designed to teach paramedic students 

the fundamentals of oral and written communications 

used in medicine, with an emphasis on how to 

communicate with other medical professionals. 

Terminology will be strongly emphasized throughout 

the course. 

CM2110 BUSINESS WRITING FUNDAMENTALS 

Business Writing Fundamentals gives students the 

opportunity to apply the principles of effective 

business writing. Applications include letters, memos, 

e-mail and informal business report writing. This 

course also allows students to explore job search 

techniques. 

CM2180 TECHNICAL REPORTING I 


This course is designed to teach technology and 

applied science students the fundamentals of 

technical reporting in both oral and written forms. 

Emphasis is on types of reports based on purpose, 

appropriate formats, strategies of technical reporting, 

maintaining work records, and the writing and 

editing process that leads to effective workplace 

communication. 

CM2180 TECHNICAL REPORTING I 


This course is designed to teach technology and 

applied science students the fundamentals of 

technical reporting in both oral and written forms. 

Emphasis is on types of reports based on purpose, 

appropriate formats, strategies of technical reporting, 

maintaining work records, and the writing and editing 

process that leads to effective workplace 

communication. 

CM2181TECHNICAL REPORTING II 


This course is designed to help students structure 

a semi-formal report, using solid research methods 

for a problem-based topic. Emphasis will be on 

secondary research: finding sources, summarizing 

source material, evaluating material, and maintaining 

work records/research portfolios. Students will also 

acquire skills of analyzing and editing written work. 

CM2200 ORAL COMMUNICATIONS 

This course is designed to help students develop 

interpersonal, oral communication, and presentation 

skills in a team-based environment. 

CI2560 – CM2200

198 


CM2300 REPORT WRITING 

This process will stress skill development in 

planning, searching and documenting, preparing 

graphic aids, proofreading and editing, and 

completing formal reports. 

CM2800 ORAL/WRITTEN COMMUNICATION 

SKILLS 

Prerequisites: CM1401 or CM2181 

This course will provide students with instruction in 

the areas of writing technical reports and the delivery 

of oral presentations. Emphasis will be placed on the 

processes involved in effective writing and effective 

presentations as they pertain to specific technologies. 

Students will learn relevant skills for researching, 

organizing, writing, and presenting technical 

information. 

CP1120 FUNDAMENTALS OF PROGRAMMING I 


This course is designed to give the student the logic 

involved in the computing process and the ability 

to develop an algorithm to describe the solution 

to a given problem. The student will analyze, 

design, choose an algorithm, code, test, and debug 

applications. Algorithms will be implemented using 

an object-oriented programming language. 

CP1360 PROGRAMMING FOR COMPUTER 

SYSTEMS AND NETWORKING 

This course is designed to give the student the logic 

involved in the computing process and the ability 

to develop algorithms to describe the solution 

to a given problem, with implementation using a 

scripting language. This course uses object oriented 

technologies to aid the student in developing solutions 

to computer support related problems. The intent of 

this course is for the student to become familiar with 

object oriented techniques and programming logic 

and to practice that logic using a scripting language. 

CP1810 FUNDAMENTAL PROGRAMMING 

CONSTRUCTS 


This course will introduce the student to skills and 

concepts that are essential to good programming 

practice and problem solving. The course will focus 

on programming structures and concepts that are 

common to conventional programming languages 

(such as C) and object-oriented languages (Java, C ++ , 

Python etc.) Topics will include, but are not limited 

to: basic syntax and semantics of programming 

languages; variables; primitive types; sequential, 

decision and iterative programming structures; 

simple input/output (I/O); functions and subroutines; 

structured decomposition; strings; and arrays. Ideally, 

this course should be taught using a scripting language. 

CP1880 COMPUTER SYSTEMS ARCHITECTURE 

This is an introductory course in computer 

architecture focusing on the high-level components 

and interconnections in a computer system. The major 

topics to be covered are: CPU organization, primary 

memory, secondary memory, I/O components and 

networking. The focus of the course will be the effect 

of the components on the development of software. 

CP1932 SYSTEMS ANALYSIS 

Prerequisites: CP1810 

This course is intended to introduce students to 

the concepts of systems analysis using both the 

traditional and object-oriented methodology. Its 

emphasis is on the methods and products of each 

phase of the SDLC rather than on a formalized 

methodology. Discussion of structured and 

object-oriented methods is interwoven. All phases 

of the life cycle are dealt with emphasis on an 

object-oriented approach using UML. This course 

covers the topics: data models, the relational 

database model, E-R modelling, and relational and 

foreign key concepts. 

CP1953 OBJECT-ORIENTED SYSTEMS 

ANALYSIS WITH UML 

Prerequisites: CP1932, CP3230 

This course is a continuation of the Introduction to 

Systems Design course with the introduction of more 

extensive object-oriented concepts. The focus of this 

is to provide the student with a practical, hands-on 

skill set of the latest object-oriented design method 

using Unified Modelling Language (UML) and the 

Unified Process. The course is laboratory oriented, 

allowing the student to develop real design for use 

with object-oriented and traditional programming 

languages. 

CP1990 COMPUTER HARDWARE 

This course is designed to expose the students to the 

basic components of a computer system. It will teach 

the student how to evaluate, install, configure, and 

specify all basic computer components such as CPU, 

memory, and hard and floppy drives. It will also cover 

such topics as operating systems, CPU theory and 

expansion slots, disk caching, memory management, 

and printers. 

CP2310 ELECTRONIC SPREADSHEET 

APPLICATIONS 

Prerequisites: CP1450 or MC1050 or MC1100 or 

MC1800 or MC1220 

The goal of this course is to introduce students to the 

concepts and applications of electronic spreadsheets.

199 


CP2410 MICRO DATABASE APPLICATIONS 

Prerequisites: CP1450 or MC1050 or MC1100 or 

MC1800 or MC1220 

This course introduces the student to the concepts 

and applications of databases. 

CP2640 DESKTOP PUBLISHING 

Prerequisites: DM1200 or MC1240 

Using desktop publishing software, students will 

prepare newsletters, flyers, and other publications 

that require professional design elements such as 

columns, boxes, tables, various font faces and styles, 

rules, and graphic pictures. 

CP2870 WEBSITE AND DATABASE PROJECT USING 

MICROSOFT TECHNOLOGY 

Prerequisites: CP3231, PR2155, CP1932, CR1510 

This course will introduce the intermediate-level 

programmer to an ASP.NET language, developing 

business applications that rely on the browser as user 

interface and SQL Server database interaction and 

connectivity. It will culminate in a sizeable project 

involving a professional and user-friendly front-end 

and an SQL Server database back-end. 

CP2921 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

Prerequisite: CR1101, CP1990 

This course is designed to further expose the students 

to the basic components of a computer system. It will 

teach the students how to construct/configure and 

trouble shoot PC hardware and software. Instructors 

will assign assignments using a helpdesk system 

in order to acquaint the student with ticketing, 

documenting, and prioritizing multiple hardware/ 

software issues. 

CP3170 MULTIMEDIA FOR THE WEB 

Co-requisite: CP3320 

This course introduces students to the basic concepts 

and techniques used in multimedia systems, media 

formats, communication of multimedia, and the 

publication of multimedia-filled websites. This course 

encourages students to be creative and original 

when developing their work. At the end of the 

course, students will have a professional portfolio of 

multimedia, and a client website. 

CP3230 OBJECT-ORIENTED AND EVENT-DRIVEN 

PROGRAMMING l 

Prerequisite: CP1810 

This course is designed to teach the student the 

fundamentals of object-based and object-oriented 

programming in an object-oriented language such as 

Java, C# or Visual Basic. Students will be shown how 

to write event-driven object-based programs using 

the GUI widget libraries of the language. The students 

will be shown how to write object oriented programs 

using inheritance and polymorphism that conform to 

the open-closed principle of software engineering. 

Topics include, but are not limited to, object-based 

programming, object-oriented design, classes, 

composition, inheritance and polymorphism. 

CP3231 OBJECT-ORIENTED AND EVENT-DRIVEN 

PROGRAMMING ll 


This course is designed to teach the student 

intermediate-level concepts of object-based and 

object-oriented programming in an object-oriented 

language. The students will write object-oriented 

programs using inheritance and polymorphism that 

conform to the open-closed principle of software 

engineering. Topics include, but are not limited to, 

exception handling, file Input/output, advanced 

graphical user interface concepts, interfaces, 

polymorphism, database connectivity, and 

collections. 

CP3271 WEB SECURITY 


This course introduces students to network and 

website security considerations to deploy secure 

websites including security policy, secure remote 

access, common web vulnerabilities, exploit countermeasures, 

creating and testing secure web sites. 

CP3300 DATA STRUCTURES 

Prerequisites: CP3231, MA1910 

This course is designed to expose the student to the 

basic methods of structuring data in programs. The 

basic theory of the data structures will be presented 

as well as algorithms which can be used to create 

static and dynamic implementations. Common 

applications of each data structure will be discussed. 

The standard collections will be discussed relating 

the collection classes back to the fundamental data 

structures. Topics include, but are not limited to: 

searching and sorting, lists, stacks, queues, trees 

and collections. 

CM2300 – CP3300

200 


CP3320 WEB APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT I 

Prerequisite: CP3300, CP2870 


This course introduces students to different 

technologies used in web application development. 

Students will be able to create interactive and 

dynamic web applications using XHTML/CSS, 

JavaScript/DOM, JSP, and JDBC. At the end of the 

course, students will be able to write simple 

three-tier web applications incorporating all of 

these technologies. 

CP3351 WEB APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT II 


This course introduces students to multi-tier web 

application development. The focus is on developing 

web applications with distinct presentation, 

application, and storage tiers through project-based 

course work. The course will build upon user interface 

and database development concepts learned in 

previous courses, and teach how to add business 

logic to the application tier for large-scale application 

development. 

CP3360 WEB APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT 

WITH ASP.NET 


Co-Requisite: CP3351 

This course introduces students to multi-tier web 

application development using ASP.NET. The focus 

is on developing web applications with distinct 

presentation, application, and storage tiers through 

project-based course work. The course will build upon 

user interface and database development concepts 

learned in previous courses and how to add business 

logic to the application tier for large-scale application 

development. 

CP3450 DATABASE DESIGN AND 

IMPLEMENTATION 


This course introduces students to methods used 

in the logical and physical design of a database. 

As well, the students will be introduced to SQL as 

a language for manipulating a database. The PL/ 

SQL language will be used to create a programming 

project. Also the tools like iSQLPlus, SQL Developer, 

etc. will be examined so the student is familiar 

with many programming interfaces. The course will 

first install several different levels of databases on 

different operating systems. Finally, the students will 

be exposed to the techniques used to manipulate a 

database from a program. 

CP3630 WEB SERVER MANAGEMENT 


This course uses a hands-on approach to web server 

management using Microsoft Internet Information 

Server and Apache Web Server. Topics covered 

include installation procedures, configuration of 

virtual hosts and redirects, web server hardening and 

e-commerce security considerations, and web server 


CP3700 WEB APPLICATION ARCHITECTURE 

AND DESIGN 


This course is an advanced study of the architecture 

of web applications and common design issues. 

Students will gain an understanding of the different 

components that make up a web application with a 

multi-tier flavour, the purpose of each component, 

and how the components interact. This course 

introduces students to theory and rationale behind 1 

to n-tier infrastructure, common design patterns and 

frameworks. As well, the students will be introduced 

to a rapid application development (RAD) tool and 

will be exposed to the architecture and design of 

leading-edge web applications. Finally, students will 

design their own web application given a case study 

and will need to justify their design decisions in the 

form of a final report and unified modelling language 

(UML) diagrams. 

CP4120 N-TIER SYSTEMS AND ARCHITECTURE 



This is a course in the theory and application of n-tier 

concepts using current industry-leading software. This 

course enables the student to develop efficient n-tier 

systems. Students learn about n-tier theory and put 

it to practice using current industry-leading products 

to create and link the front-end (client) and back-end 

application and database (server) components of an 

n-tier system. Students learn about design issues 

and deal with them in practice, as well as examining 

current product offerings. 

CP4480 EMERGING TRENDS IN WEB 

DEVELOPMENT 

This course covers trends in software development 

that arise from the natural evolution of the field. 

Topics are selected with the aim of exposing the 

student to the new and evolving techniques and/or 

technologies used in web development.

201 


CP4490 EMERGING TRENDS IN NETWORK AND 

SYSTEMS ADMINISTRATION 

This course covers trends in network and systems 

administration that arise from the natural evolution of 

the field. Topics are selected with the aim of exposing 

the student to the new and evolving techniques 

and/or technologies used in network and systems 


CR1101 NETWORK FOUNDATIONS 

Students should know the layers of the Open Systems 

Interconnection (OSI) model and be able to describe 

the features and functions of network devices. 

Students will have a basic understanding of network 

protocols and most networking standards as well as 

the different types of networking topologies. 

CR1260 CLIENT SERVICE FOR THE COMPUTER 

INDUSTRY 

This course focuses on the role of an information 

technology employee in providing quality technical 

client service in any given situation. Students will 

develop the skills they need to interact effectively 

with clients, either face-to-face, on the telephone, in 

writing or on the web. Some of the topics covered will 

be quality client service; communicating with clients; 

handling difficult clients; solving and preventing 

problems; working as a team; and managing stress 

and burnout. 

CR1270 HARDWARE SECURITY 

Prerequisite: CR2700 

This course introduces information security 

concepts including common threats and effective 

counter-measures. Topics include: privacy laws 

and regulations, security operations, physical 

security, access control, the basics of cryptography, 

contingency planning, designing and testing 

information systems security. In the lab students will 

be exposed to the techniques and tools that can be 

used to protect personal computers from attacks. 

CR1500 WEBSITE DEVELOPMENT 


the skills required to develop a comprehensive 

website. The course is targeted at a non-technical 

end-user who will not be involved in installing and 

configuring network applications. As such, this course 

emphasizes the creative use of the technologies. 

CR1510 WEBSITE DEVELOPMENT 

After completing this course the student will be 

trained in the essential concepts of XHTML and 

JavaScript. The student will begin with developing a 

basic web page and move on to developing a basic 

website. Then the student will create web page forms, 

and work with cascading style sheets. Next, the 

student will work with JavaScript to create dynamic 

web pages and websites. 

CR2210 ENTERPRISE MAIL SYSTEMS 


The focus of this course is on the planning, 

installation, configuration, and support of enterprise 

mail systems. This would include mail systems/server 

overview, site planning, server installation, server 

management/configuration, servers in a multiple-site 

environment, troubleshooting, server security and 

communication, and forms. 

CR2350 INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMS ANALYSIS 

This course presents an overview of the systems 

development life cycle with a particular focus 

on needs analysis and requirements modelling. 

Considerable emphasis is placed on the use and 

limitation of various modeling techniques used in the 

development of information system requirements. A 

discussion of the importance of impact assessment, 

cost estimation and schedule estimation is also 

included. 

CR2430 TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL/ 

INTERNET PROTOCOL (TCP/IP) 



The teaching goal of TCP/IP is to build an 

interconnection of networks that provides universal 

communication services including Internet or intranet. 

Each physical interface has its own technology 

dependent communication interface in the form of 

programming interfaces that provides communication 

functions (primitives). Communication services are 

provided by software that runs between the physical 

network and the user applications, independent of 

the underlying physical network. The architecture 

of the physical networks is the way it is transparent to 

the user. 

CR2440 NETWORK IMPLEMENTATION 


Network implementation is the interconnecting of 

various types of networks with different types of 

devices. The purpose of this course is to explain and, 

where applicable, demonstrate the devices, protocols, 

and technologies associated with connecting 

networks both LANs and WANs. 

CP3320 – CR2440

202 


CR2470 WIRELESS NETWORKS 

Prerequisite: CP1990, CR1101 

The purpose of this course is to provide a broad 

survey of wireless communications including in-depth 

coverage of: Technologies and topologies used in 

wireless networks, IEEE 802.11 wireless standards, 

data services in wireless networks, installation, 

configuration and management of wireless access 

points, adapters, bridges and antennae, configuring 

security in wireless networks, site survey techniques 

for optimum coverage, wireless internet and WAP and 

broadband wireless networks. 

CR2510 LINUX SERVER ADMINISTRATION l 

This course is the first of two courses that deals with 

the use and administration of a Linux-based system. 

In this course the student will learn design and 

architecture of a Linux operating system as well as 

how to use many of the commonly used Linux tools 

from the command line. Furthermore, the student will 

learn how to plan, install and configure a Linux system 

and how to perform normal system administration 

tasks. 

CR2700 NETWORK OPERATING SYSTEM 

ADMINISTRATION 

Prerequisites: CR1101 

This course provides the students with the knowledge 

and skills to install, configure, optimize, troubleshoot 

and support a network server with day-to-day 

administration. This would include topics such 

as network planning, server hardware, directory 

services and DNS, security, server installation, server 

configuration, storage, users and groups, distributed 

file system, printing, remote access and virtual private 

networks, managing interconnectivity and terminal 

services, server optimization, network monitoring, 

and troubleshooting. 

CR2950 EMERGING TRENDS IN IT 

INFRASTRUCTURE 

This course covers new trends in IT infrastructure that 

arise from the natural evolution of the field. Topics are 

selected with the aim of exposing the student to the 

new and/or evolving techniques and/or technologies 

used in the design and maintenance of the IT 


CR3100 ADVANCED NETWORKING I 


Students are given an advanced hands-on look at 

the TCP/IP architecture. This course will examine 

popular open-source and commercial applications. 

Upon completion of this course, students will have a 

problem determination methodology that can be used 

for future network problem scenarios. This course 

will have numerous hands-on labs illustrating typical 

network problems on popular platforms. The specifics 

of these labs should be customized by the instructor. 

CR3101 ADVANCED NETWORKING II 


This course further develops students’ knowledge 

of internetworking. Routing topics such as distant 

vectors, routing protocols, and linked state routing 

protocols will be discussed in detail and hands-on 

exercises will be provided. Further concepts on 

switching such as spanning tree protocol, virtual 

LANs, and VLAN trunking protocols will also be 

explored in detail. Some important topics on WAN 

technologies will also be included. 

CR3160 IT SERVICE MANAGEMENT 


The focus of this course is providing service and 

resource management to a multi-user, multi-server 

local area network environment. Candidates will learn 

job functions and responsibilities at the different 

levels in these systems. This will be a very 

hands-on approach using a wide variety of hardware 

to complete learning objectives. 

CR3230 ENTERPRISE TECHNOLOGY I 


This course provides the students with the knowledge 

and skills to install, configure, and manage the 

core services of a corporate server, including TCP/ 

IP configuration; web server administration; name 

service configuration; and user, computer, and group 

strategy deployment. 

CR3231 ENTERPRISE TECHNOLOGY II 


This course provides students with the knowledge 

and the skills to implement, manage, and maintain 

routing and remote access, troubleshoot routing 

protocols, configure Internet access, and secure 

data transmissions.

203 


CR3320 ADVANCED IT HARDWARE 

Prerequisites: CP2921 

The focus of this course is configuring, managing and 

repairing the specialized hardware devices required 

in multi-server environments, structured wiring, and 

laptop environments and with business equipment 

(printers, scanners, photocopiers and projectors). This 

will be a very hands-on approach using a wide variety 

of hardware to complete learning objectives. 

CR3420 INFRASTRUCTURE SECURITY 

Prerequisites: CR1270 

This course details the tools and techniques needed 

to secure corporate IT infrastructure, including 

network-based and host-based security tools and 

measures. Topics covered include firewalls, virtual 

private networking, the security audit process, 

disaster recovery and business continuity planning, 

intrusion protection systems and cryptography. 

CR3450 SCRIPTING 

Prerequisites: CR2510, CP2921, CP1360 

This course teaches the student how to create shell 

scripts. This course will teach the student how to use 

regular expressions, file manipulation with sed, grep 

and awk, and how to implement scripts using Linux 

and Windows. 

CT1180 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS FOR 



This is a second-year course that is designed to 

teach students a number of software applications 

with an emphasis on their use in the field of industrial 

instrumentation. 

CT2300 APPLIED PROGRAMMING 

This is a course designed to introduce the technology 

student to the concepts of problem solving using 

computer programming. The course will be taught 

using a high-level language such as C or C ++ . Students 

will write programs to solve problems within their 

related disciplines and will learn the concepts of 

troubleshooting and problem solving. Structured 

programming concepts will be addressed using C ++ , 

data types, decision statements, loop and interaction 

procedures, input and output procedures, pointers, 

structures, and files. 

DA1160 PHARMACOLOGY FOR THE DENTAL 

ASSISTANT 


This course provides the student with a broad 

overview of pharmacology. The following topics will 

be introduced: basic pharmacology terminology and 

principles, drug action and effect, analgesics and 

pain control, anti-microbial agents, sedatives and 

tranquilizers, drugs commonly used in dentistry and 

by dental clients, and the use of emergency drugs in 

the dental office. 

DA1230 DENTAL MATERIALS I 

This course provides students the opportunity to 

learn the cognitive and psychomotor skills necessary 

for the Dental Assistants’ role in the preparation 

and handling of dental materials. Emphasis in the 

theoretical component of the course will be placed 

upon the chemical properties and interactions of 

dental cements, bases and restorative materials. 

DA1231 DENTAL MATERIALS II 

Prerequisite: DA1230 

This course provides students the opportunity 

to learn the cognitive and psychomotor skills 

necessary to work with dental materials. Emphasis 

in the theoretical component of the course will be 

placed upon the chemical properties in interactions 

of laboratory products and impression materials. 

Practical application of this skill will be practiced in 

the dental lab and clinic. 

DA1260 CLINICAL I 

Prerequisites: BL1200, CH1200 

This course will introduce the student to both the 

theoretical and practical aspects of general operatory 

procedures in dentistry. The scopes of competencies 

covered by this course are: client reception; client 

seating and dismissal; use and maintenance of 

instruments, hand pieces and operatory equipment; 

infection control; and sterilization. In addition, 

operator position for performance of intra-oral skills 

is introduced. Concepts and skills of four-handed 

dentistry are also included with emphasis placed on 

overall professional conduct, interpersonal relations 

and professional responsibility. Students will be 

participating in site visits to dental clinics. 

DA1261 CLINICAL II 



the knowledge and skills required to perform basic 

dental assisting and restorative procedures efficiently 

and ergonomically. In this course the student will 

further develop four-handed dentistry skills as well as 

receive an introduction to intra-oral skills. 

CR2470 – DA1261

204 


DA1300 MEDICAL EMERGENCIES 

This course will prepare students to handle medical 

emergency situations in a dental clinical setting. 

Training in CPR and First Aid will be incorporated 

into this course as well as oxygen administration. 

DA1320 EMERGENCIES AND PHARMACOLOGY 

This course provides the student with a broad 

overview of pharmacology and emergencies in 

dentistry. The following topics will be introduced: 

basic pharmacology terminology and principles; 

drug action and effect; analgesics and pain control; 

anti-microbial agents, sedatives and tranquilizers; 

drugs commonly used in dentistry; and the prevention 

and management of emergencies in dentistry. 

DA1350 PREVENTIVE DENTISTRY 

Co-requisite: DA1261 

This course is designed to introduce the student to 

various preventive dentistry concepts. The student 

will develop techniques and skills required to help 

individuals prevent disease and injury to the oral 

tissues. The course of study will include instruction 

on caries and periodontal disease, oral physiotherapy 

in plaque control, caries prevention techniques and 

whitening agents. 

DA2100 HISTOLOGY AND ORAL PATHOLOGY 


This course is designed to familiarize dental 

assisting students with the development and 

normal microscopic structure of the teeth and their 

supporting structures. It also provides an introduction 

to oral pathology. 

DA2200 MEDICAL AND DENTAL EMERGENCIES 

Prerequisites: BL1200, BL1210 

This course will prepare students to handle medical 

emergency situations in a clinical setting. Training 

in CPR and First Aid will be incorporated into this 

course. The student will also become familiar with 

various dental emergencies. 

DA2261 CLINICAL III 


Co-requisite: MX2171 

This course will provide the dental assistant 

student with the opportunity to consolidate and 

integrate knowledge and skills from all previous 

theory and clinical courses. Students will practice 

clinical experiences with a dentist present. They 

will refine their intra-oral skills. A collaborative 

approach, including the patient and other healthcare 

professionals, will be emphasized. 

DA2310 DENTAL SPECIALTIES 

Prerequisite: DA1261, DA1231 

This course will allow students of dental assisting 

to enhance their knowledge, thereby increasing 

proficiency in assisting the various fields of dental 

specialties such as oral surgery, orthodontics, 

pedodontics, periodontics, endodontics and 

prosthodontics. 

DM1200 DOCUMENT PRODUCTION I 


This course includes keyboarding, file management 

and basic document formatting. Keyboarding speed 

on straight copy material is developed to 30 to 

40 net words per minute for three minutes. The 

following documents are produced using Microsoft 

Word processing software: notices, announcements, 

signage, basic correspondence, basic tables and 

basic reports. 

Note: In order to be eligible for graduation with an 

Office Administration Certificate, students must 

achieve a typing speed of 30 net words per minute 

at the end of DM1201. 

DM1210 DOCUMENT PRODUCTION II 

This course further develops proficiency in 

document production using intermediate word 

processing applications. Students will also apply 

skills in the production of intermediate business 

correspondence, tables, forms and reports, and 

reinforce their skills in file management. 

Note: Students must achieve a typing speed of 30 

net words per minute for five minutes in order to pass 

KB1150. Students must achieve a typing speed of 40 


KB1151. 

DM1300 TRANSCRIPTION 

Prerequisite: DM1200 

This course develops skill in machine transcription. 

Emphasis is placed on improving language skills: 

grammar, punctuation and spelling. Decision-making 

skills are introduced through the transcription of basic 

business documents.

205 


DM1301 TRANSCRIPTION II 


This course is designed to further develop skills in 

machine transcription. Emphasis is being placed 

on accuracy and speed of transcription as well as 

grammar, punctuation, and spelling competency. 

Documents will be transcribed from various business 

environments such as tourism, legal, and small 

business enterprises. Decision-making skills are 

improved in the transcription of complex unarranged 

material. 

DM2200 DOCUMENT PRODUCTION III 


This course combines keyboarding development, 

document production and word processing to improve 

proficiency in document production. Keyboarding 

speed on straight copy material is developed to 

a minimum of 45 net words per minute for five 

minutes. Topics covered include efficient use of fonts 

and attributes, editing documents, using special 

features of Microsoft Word software, and further 

reinforcement of skills in the production of business 

correspondence, tables, and specialized business 

documents. Students will use Microsoft PowerPoint 

software to prepare presentations. 

Note: In order to be eligible for graduation with an 

Office Administration Diploma, students must achieve 

a typing speed of 40 net words per minute at the end 

of DM2201. 

DM2240 DOCUMENT PRODUCTION IV 

This course combines keyboarding development 

and document formatting using a project/simulation 

approach. Students will be expected to develop and 

use critical thinking and decision-making skills, and 

to process and produce documents at an advanced 

level using Microsoft Office. Students will also 

perform tasks that require the integration of various 

software packages; i.e. word processing, database, 

spreadsheets, presentations, electronic mail and 

calendar. 


net words per minute for five minutes in order to 

pass KB1151. 

DP1130 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 

Prerequisite: ET1101, ET1150 

This course introduces students to the field of digital 

electronics. They will be taught design and diagnosis 

techniques applicable to digital electronics. 

DP1170 DIGITAL MICROPROCESSORS 


Co-requisite: AE2350 

This course introduces the student to the 

microprocessor programming techniques using 

assemblers and debuggers and provides training 

in computer interfacing techniques. 

DP1310 INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMABLE 

LOGIC CONTROLLERS 

Prerequisites: ET2100, AE1200 

This is an introductory course in programmable logic 

controllers (PLC) covering the fundamental concepts 

of digital numbering systems, logic, gates, circuits, 

simplification, arithmetic elements, latches, flip-flops, 

counters, the components in a typical PLC system, 

configuring, addressing, and programming. The 

laboratory component will develop understanding and 

skills related to circuit construction and operation, 

and ladder logic programming and troubleshooting. 

DP2230 MICROCONTROLLERS 


Co-requisite: CT2300 

This course provides the student with knowledge 

of the hardware associated with a microprocessor 

system and the interfacing requirements for 

communication with the environment. 

DP2360 FUNCTION BLOCK PROGRAMMING 


Function block programming has become the 

programming language used for most process 

automation systems. It is currently used in distributed 

control systems (DCSs), stand-alone controllers, and 

programmable logic controllers (PLCs), and is now 

being used in field-level devices. This course will cover 

how to develop function block programs and link them 

to a human-machine interface (HMI). The control 

strategies being taught in this course will start with 

basic proportional-integral-derivative (PID) control 

and progress to more complex control strategies with 

additional variables being displayed on the HMI. 

DA1300 – DP2360

206 


DP2460 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 

Prerequisites: DP2230, ET2150 

This course is an introduction to digital signal 

processing (DSP) concepts and implementation. 

It starts by explaining the need for digital signal 

processing and DSP systems. The DSP system 

is explained from the input analog signal via the 

input transducer through all stages of the process 

including signal conditioning, anti-aliasing filter, 

analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion, 

output smoothing filter, and output transducers. 

Real-life telecommunications examples will be used 

to illustrate the use and need for each part of the 

DSP system. The laboratory elements of this course 

will be conducted using MATLAB software giving the 

students the skills required to become proficient with 

DSP systems through examples and computational 

experience. 

DP2520 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 

Prerequisite: MP2160 

This course introduces students to general concepts, 

programming techniques and programming languages 

for both digital and analog inputs and outputs for 

both on/off and proportional control. For this course 

the student will use both physical input/output (I/O) 

devices and graphical interface I/O. The programming 

of the graphical interface will not be covered in 

this course. 

DP2530 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 


This course introduces the student to programmable 

logic controllers (PLCs) and PLC programming. 

DP2540 ADVANCED PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC 

CONTROLLERS 


This is an advanced course in programmable logic 

controllers (PLCs) covering timers, counters, data 

manipulation, comparison, conversion, arithmetic 

instructions, word logic instructions, shift registers, 

rotate registers, sequencers, analog inputs and 

outputs, communications protocols and an 

introduction to human-machine interface concepts. 

The laboratory component will further develop and 

strengthen the understanding and skills related to 

circuit construction and operation and ladder logic 

programming and troubleshooting. 

DP3200 EMBEDDED CONTROLLER APPLICATIONS 

Prerequisites: CT2300 or CP1250, DP2410 

The course will reveal why microcontrollers exist in 

so many products today. It explains the basics in 

microcontroller design through actual applications 

and will describe the differences between 

microcontrollers and microprocessors. Instruction is 

given in different techniques for making the best use 

of the microcontroller’s limited resources. Hands-on 

experience is provided for the Motorola 6811 Series of 

microcontrollers. 

DP3240 DCS (DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS) 

CONFIGURATION 


This course will review the history of distributed 

control systems (DCSs) and provide a comparison 

of the current system to modern programmer logic 

controller (PLC)/human-machine interface (HMI) and 

supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) 

systems. It provides the participants with the 

knowledge to troubleshoot a DCS system as well as 

modify existing configurations, control strategies, 

and operator interfaces. 

DP3310 MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACING 

Prerequisites: DP2410, CT2300 

This course provides the student with knowledge 

of the hardware associated with a microprocessor 

system and the interfacing requirements for 

communication with the environment. 

DP3410 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS 

Prerequisites: CE2270, DP1110 

This course is designed to provide the fundamental 

concepts of physical layer, data link layer, and 

network and data models in computer-aided process 

engineering (CAPE) and local area network (LAN) 

environments as well as reuse of these models in DSL. 

DP3450 ADVANCED PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC 

CONTROLLERS 


This is an advanced course in programmable logic 

controllers (PLCs) covering discrete control, analog 

control, program control statements, fieldbus 

communication and control, human-machine interface 

(HMI), motor control using variable frequency drives, 

mathematical functions, and sequencers. 

DP3560 INDUSTRIAL BUSES AND NETWORKS 

Prerequisites: CI1601, DP2530, CI1700 


the knowledge of how to choose, connect, program, 

and configure common types of industrial network 

protocols.

207 


DR2440 ELECTRONIC CAD 

Prerequisites: DP1130, AE2350 

This course is designed to give the student basic 

knowledge of printed circuit board (PCB) design 

techniques required in the electronics industry 

through the use of CAD software. It introduces the 

student to specific types of drawings required in the 

electronics industry to include block diagrams, logic 

diagrams, and schematic diagrams. The electronic 

specific drawings will be done using MultiSIM or 

equivalent schematic capture software. A PCB design 

will be created using Ultiboard software or equivalent 

circuit board design software. 

EC1110 MICROECONOMICS 

The course objectives are to develop an 

understanding of the economic institutions and 

environment under a market system of exchange 

and the response made to decisions arrived at 

by individuals, businesses, and governments. 

Specifically, the course examines business 

organizations and why the attitudes of buyers 

and sellers determine the prices, quantities, and 

distribution of the output of goods and services. 

EC1210 MACROECONOMICS 

This course is designed to introduce students to 

the principles of macroeconomics, including the 

physical and monetary aspects of international trade, 

money, banking, and monetary policy; gross national 

product; national expenditure components; business 

cycles; and fiscal policy. The student will explore 

national output and fiscal policy; money, banking, 

and monetary policy; and international trade. The 

emphasis is on a problem solving approach and 

Canadian examples where this is possible. 

EC1700 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS 


This course covers the basic principles of engineering 

economy with application to engineering economic 

decision making. The various methods for economic 

analysis of alternatives are investigated as well as 

depreciation methods and income tax consequences. 

EG1110 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS 

This course focuses on basic engineering graphics 

principles and standards to effectively communicate 

technical graphical design, and also provides 

the foundation for more advanced engineering 

graphics concepts. Engineering graphics is the 

predominant means by which accurate information 

is communicated within industries pertinent to all 

engineering technology disciplines. From the simplest 

in-the-field sketch to the most advanced 3-D model, 

each may constitute a legal document. 

EG1140 ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT SIMULATION 

Prerequisites: ET1150 

Co-requisites: ET1151, DP1130 

Students will learn the principles of computeraided 

electronics circuit design and simulation. 

The practical component of the course will lead 

students through features of a schematic capture 

and simulation software application. Students will 

be able to use electronic components in a simulated 

environment and be able to measure and analyze 

electronic parameters with analog and digital 

instruments. This course should help students 

complete lab experiment requirements of analog 

and digital courses and aid in the design of the final 

Capstone Project. 

EG1230 ELECTRICAL AND INSTRUMENTATION CAD 


The course first introduces the AutoCAD drafting 

package. Once the foundation is established, the 

course migrates towards the more advanced features 

and emphasis is on the AutoCAD Electrical package. 

Examples are geared towards electrical engineering 

technology students. 

EG1430 AUTOCAD ESSENTIALS 

Prerequisite: EG1110 

Computer-aided drafting software is a tool that 

enables the student to produce engineering drawings 

more accurately and with greater efficiency. It also 

facilitates the ability to share files with other software 

programs. This course is designed in a pedagogical 

format by presenting the fundamental concepts at 

the beginning and moving toward the more advanced 

and specialized features of AutoCAD. It is also 

designed with the understanding that the student has 

the engineering graphics fundamentals necessary 

to apply the AutoCAD software. Applications and 

examples have an inclination towards many different 

technology disciplines. 

EG3100 3-D MODELLING/CAD 

Prerequisites: EG1110, EG1430 

This is a course in advanced mechanical design 

and drawing techniques applied to 3-D modelling 

software. It specifies CATIA as the software but can 

be conducted with any parametric-based applications. 

Students will learn basic part and assembly feature 

design skills typical in all mechanical designs and 

how to translate the design to drawings for proposals, 

manufacturers, and quality control documents. 

DP2460 – EG3100

208 


EN1420 ENVIRONMENTAL SANITATION 

The course is designed to introduce students to 

many of the public health hazards inherent in the 

communities, and the mitigation strategies used in 

their control and elimination. Particular emphasis is 

given to applying risk assessment principles to water, 

wastewater, solid waste and housing management. 

EN1545 WATER QUALITY I 


This course introduces the student to the principles 

and processes behind the sources, treatment, 

and distribution of potable and recreational water 

supplies. The student will review the quality issues, 

communicable diseases, and injury risks inherent in 

drinking and recreational water. 

EN1551 WATER QUALITY II 

Prerequisite: EN1545 

The continuation of Water Quality I, this course 

provides a working knowledge of water distribution 

and water treatment practices and focuses on 

the basic aspects of construction, operation, and 

maintenance. 

EN2310 ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH LAW 

Prerequisite: HL1140 

This course introduces the student to local and 

regional environmental health legal systems and 

processes. The constitutional basis for regulating 

environmental health issues are covered. 

EN2470 ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS 


Co-requisite: CM1190 

This course presents an overview of environmental 

concerns in the oil and gas industry, including 

the effect of the industry on the environment and 

vice versa. 

EP1010 INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS FUNCTIONS 

Prerequisites: FL1080 or equivalent 

This course is designed to help students develop the 

skills, strategies and tools needed to be successful 

in their studies in business education. In addition 

to developing the skills and study habits required 

to be successful business students, the course will 

also cover terminology and basic concepts related 

to business education in the areas of economics, 

human resources, marketing, accounting, and 

communications. 

EP1110 INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS 

This course is an introduction to Canadian business. 

The areas covered include: Canada’s business system, 

forms of business ownership, production, marketing, 

finance, personnel and labour relations, international 

business, and small business ownership. 

EP1130 BUSINESS FOR INFORMATION SYSTEMS 

This course will provide students with an overview of 

business principles and practices relevant to the IT 

industry. Students will be introduced to the functional 

areas of business and the processes within each 

function. Emphasis will be placed upon awareness 

and literacy of each functional area as they apply to 

local and national markets. 

EP1140 BUSINESS OPERATIONS IN 

INFORMATION SYSTEMS 

Prerequisite: EP1130, EP1150 

This course will introduce students to the ways 

that organizations improve their business practices 

through the use of computer technology. The course 

emphasizes systems technologies, enterprise 

integration, business applications, and critical analysis 

of organizational change through information systems 

EP1170 BUSINESS INFORMATION FUNDAMENTALS 

This is an introductory course in business information. 

It will build upon a basic knowledge of common 

business practices, processes, and systems with 

emphasis placed upon the data and information needs 

of each functional area and how data is interrelated 

across business functions. This discussion will be 

extended to include electronic commerce. 

EP2150 ENTREPRENEURSHIP 

This is an introductory course that analyzes aspects 

of entrepreneurship and the link between 

entrepreneurs and small business. It presents a 

fundamental approach to planning and operating 

a firm, incorporating basic steps in business 

management, and explains how each step can best 

be accomplished. 

EP2200 BUSINESS PLANNING 

Prerequisite: EP2250 

In this course students will complete a comprehensive 

business plan. This includes choosing a hypothetical 

business, determining its product or service, 

preparing a market survey, finding a source of funding, 

and deciding a marketing strategy. The students 

will apply knowledge from previous terms in a 

practical manner.

209 


EP2250 SMALL BUSINESS DEVELOPMENT 

Prerequisites: CM2300, EC1100, EC1200, MA1670 

This course will prepare the student to own and 

operate a small business. It deals with secondary 

and primary research techniques and analysis. 

Students will be required to produce a research report 

establishing the demand feasibility for a particular 

growth sector in the economy. Topics for this report 

will be based on personal selection or on a mentoring 

process with a potential or present business owner. 

This plan is developed based on two prior years of 

Business Administration/Management education and 

is not an introductory level course. 

ET1100 ELECTROTECHNOLOGY 

This is an introductory course in electrical theory 

covering the basic concepts of electricity, circuit 

analysis, and magnetism. The laboratory work is 

designed to develop skills in the construction of 

electrical circuits and the use of electrical measuring 

instruments to reinforce theoretical concepts. 



This is a continuation of the Electrotechnology course 

taken in the first semester. It covers the basics of AC 

theory and the application of this to solve circuits 

containing resistance, capacitance, and inductance. 

An introduction to transformers and polyphase AC 

circuits is also included. 

ET1130 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRICITY I 

Co-requisite: PH1140 

This course focuses on basic DC and AC circuit 

analysis. The laboratory work is designed to develop 

skills in the construction of electrical circuits, use of 

electrical measuring instruments and reinforcement 

of theoretical concepts. 

ET1131 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRICITY II 



This course continues the studies of electricity began 

in the previous semester with the Fundamentals of 

Electricity I course. Course subject matter focuses 

on the basics of AC theory and the application of this 

to solve circuits containing resistance, capacitance, 

and inductance. An introduction to three-phase AC 

circuits and basic power factor correction is also 

included. 

ET1150 CIRCUIT ANALYSIS I 

Co-requisites: MA1700, PH1140 

This is an introductory course in electrical theory 

covering the basic concepts of electrical, circuit 

analysis, and magnetism. The laboratory work is 

designed to develop skills in the construction of 

electrical circuits and use of electrical measuring 

instruments, and to reinforce theoretical concepts. 

ET1151 CIRCUIT ANALYSIS ll 

Prerequisites: ET1150, MA1700, PH1140 

This is a continuation of the Circuit Analysis l course. 

It covers the basics of AC theory and the application 

of this to solve circuits containing resistance, 

capacitance, and inductance. An introduction to 

transformers is also included. 


Prerequisites: ET1101, MA1101 

This course covers advanced topics in AC and DC 

circuit analysis and an introduction to DC machines 

and transformers. It will provide the necessary 

background for students to enter second year 

electrical and electronics programs. 

ET2150 CIRCUIT ANALYSIS III 

Prerequisites: MA2100, ET1151 

In this course, students will review techniques of 

differential equations (first order and second order); 

integral combinations; growth and decay problems; 

the analysis and solution of source-free RL and RC 

circuits; driven RL and RC circuits using differential 

integral calculus; sinusoidal analysis; the concept of 

phasors; and steady state response. The student will 

learn mathematical techniques and apply these to the 

concepts to analyze and solve differential equations. 

Topics include waveform analysis and synthesis, time 

domain analysis, solution of differential equations 

using LaPlace transforms, application of LaPlace 

transforms to solve electric circuits, and derivation 

of transfer functions. In addition, the following topics 

will be covered in this course: Fourier expansion of 

periodic function (even and odd), Fourier analysis of 

waveforms and their application to electrical signals, 

and impulse response. 

EV1710 INDOOR AIR QUALITY 

Prerequisites: CH1210, HL1140 

This course is designed to introduce students to the 

principles and methods involved in the collection, 

analysis, and interpretation of indoor air quality data 

and how to use it to investigate and eliminate air 

quality concerns. Particular emphasis is given to the 

disproportionate distribution of health, disease, injury, 

and disaster in a given population under study. 

EN1420 – EV1710

210 


EV1711 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY 

Prerequisite: EV1710 


principles and methods involved in the collection, 

analysis, and interpretation of ambient air quality 

data and how to use it to investigate and eliminate air 

quality concerns. Meteorology and its impact on the 

dispersal of air pollutants will be examined. Specific 

technical knowledge and skills will be introduced in 

the management and abatement of gaseous waste 

streams arising from manufacturing industries. 

EV1830 LAND AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 

Prerequisites: HL1140, EY2110 

This course introduces the student to land 

management and sustainable development and their 

significance to environmental health. It gives students 

a working understanding of steps taken in the field 

to assess the suitability of a proposed development. 

Through discussions of local environmental issues in 

a global context, an understanding of the importance 

of environmental ethics and sustainable development 

will be developed. 

EY2120 BASIC ECOLOGY 


This course focuses on basic ecological principles and 

concepts, ecological sampling techniques, and field 

and laboratory exercises carried out in an appropriate 

environment. It involves significant and relevant 

fieldwork, as well as the preparation of a report on 

terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems, populations, 

species interactions, and ecological communities. 

FH1130 NUTRITION FOR DENTAL ASSISTANTS 

The course provides an introduction to basic 

nutrition theory, including the six classes of nutrients 

(carbohydrates, fats, proteins, vitamins, minerals 

and water). Dietary reference intakes, food sources, 

digestion, metabolism, functions in the body/ 

health benefits, and efficiency/toxicity symptoms 

are discussed for each nutrient. Food guides are 

presented as a tool against which dietary adequacy 

can be assessed by dental health professionals. 

Students are required to complete a personal 

diet assessment, applying knowledge acquired 

from lectures. Students will also be introduced to 

the process of identifying clients in need of diet 

counselling and to providing counselling to these 

clients. 

FH1380 HEALTH AND WELLNESS 

This course is designed to teach students the basics 

of health and wellness development. Time will be 

spent on didactic lectures, in-class labs doing basic 

testing and other learning activities, and in the gym 

exercising. Students will be expected to develop a 

healthy lifestyle plan that they will then implement. 

FL1030 

The course is designed for learners with Initial 

Basic Proficiency in English (Canadian Language 

Benchmark 1). Through an integrated skills approach, 

listening, speaking, reading, and writing are taught 

with a focus on routine, non-demanding, personal 

contexts of language use. Grammar, vocabulary, and 

pronunciation are embedded within the teaching of 

the four skills. Student success related to academic 

study and the eventual workplace is an integral part 


attained Developing Basic Proficiency in English 

(Canadian Language Benchmark 2). 

FL1040 





with a focus on routine, non-demanding, personal, 

and familiar contexts of language use. Grammar, 

vocabulary, and pronunciation are embedded within 

the teaching of the four skills. Student success related 

to academic study and the eventual workplace is an 

integral part of the course. Upon completion, learners 

will have attained Adequate Basic Proficiency in 

English (Canadian Language Benchmark 3). 

FL1050 





with a focus on routine, non-demanding, familiar, 

and general contexts of language use. Grammar, 

vocabulary, and pronunciation are embedded within 

the teaching of the four skills. Student success related 

to academic study and the eventual workplace is an 

integral part of the course. Upon completion, learners 

will have attained Fluent Basic Proficiency in English 

(Canadian Language Benchmark 4).

211 


FL1060 

This course is designed for learners with Fluent 




with a focus on routine, non-demanding, general 

contexts of language use. Grammar, vocabulary, and 

pronunciation are embedded within the teaching of 

the four skills. Student success related to academic 

study and the eventual workplace is an integral part 


attained Initial Intermediate Proficiency in English 


FL1070 

This course is designed for learners with Initial 

Intermediate Proficiency in English (Canadian 

Language Benchmark 5). Through an integrated skills 

approach, listening, speaking, reading, and writing are 

taught with a focus on moderately demanding context 

of language use in English for Specific Academic 

Purposes. Grammar, vocabulary, and pronunciation 


Student success related to academic study and 

the eventual workplace is an integral part of the 

course. Upon completion, learners will have attained 

Developing Intermediate Proficiency in English 


FL1080 



Language Benchmark 6). Through an integrated skills 

approach, listening, speaking, reading, and writing 

are taught with a focus on moderately demanding 

and complex contexts of language use in English for 

Specific Academic Purposes. Grammar, vocabulary, 

and pronunciation are embedded within the teaching 

of the four skills. While this course effectively 

supports learners in their programs-specific studies, 

it also prepares them for success on the Canadian 

Academic English Language (CAEL) Test. Student 

success related to academic study and the eventual 

workplace is an integral part of the course. Upon 

completion, learners will have attained Adequate 


Language Benchmark 7). 

FL1090 



Language Benchmark 7.) Thorough an integrated skills 

approach, listening, speaking, reading, and writing 

are taught with a focus on demanding and complex 

contexts of language pronunciation are embedded 

with the teaching of the four skills. While this course 

effectively supports learners in their programspecific 

studies, it also prepares them for success 

on the Canadian Academic English Language (CAEL) 

Test. Student success related to academic study 

and the eventual workplace is an integral part of the 

course. Upon completion, learners will have attained 

Fluent intermediate Proficiency in English (Canadian 

Language Benchmark 8). 

FL1095 

Following the identification of language needs based 

on a diagnostic exam, students will further develop 

their listening, speaking, reading, and writing skills 

through an integrated language learning approach. 

Students will develop individual skill improvement 

plans and test-taking strategies for the overall 

improvement of their performance on the Canadian 

Academic English Language (CAEL) Test. 

FM2160 MECHANICS – STATICS AND DYNAMICS 

Prerequisites: PH1100, MA1101 

This is an introductory mechanics course designed 

to develop an understanding of Newton’s second law 

with applications to static structures as well as some 

simple dynamic phenomena. Emphasis is placed on 

the development of free-body diagrams in order to 

produce an understanding of the physical problem. 

Once this understanding is developed, calculations 

can be used to produce numerical solutions. 

FM2400 HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS 

Prerequisite: PH1101 

This is an intermediate course in the design of 

hydraulic and pneumatic power systems. Throughout 

the course, students will learn about the components 

of hydraulic and pneumatic systems and conduct 

tests that demonstrate the manner in which different 

components and circuits function. As a project, 

students will design a hydraulic system, source, select 

and cost system components and prepare 

a schematic. 

EV1711 – FM2400

212 


FM3200 MACHINE DESIGN 

This course is an introduction to the primary 

considerations in the design of machines as they 

relate to each other, to their operators and to the 

environment. Machines will be seen as converters 

of energy and as the extension of human power. The 

composition and characteristics of machines will be 

presented. The underlying principles of mechanics 

of machines and strength of materials will be 

demonstrated, enabling the student to participate 

in the design of machinery. The student will gain 

practical manufacturing exposure and experience. 

FM3230 MACHINE DESIGN 

Prerequisite: CF2240 

This course is an introduction to the design of 

mechanical machinery, focusing on the design for 

functionality and safety. Mechanical engineering 

utilizes basic laws of science for the development 

of machinery to benefit humanity. Through use 

of problem solving techniques and principles of 

mechanics and strengths of materials, students will 

solve problems that both develop their ability to 

design new machines as well as repair and modify 

existing equipment to meet new objectives. 

FM3300 APPLIED FLUID MECHANICS 

Prerequisites: MA1700, PH1101 

This course introduces the laws and principles 

that govern incompressible fluid flow. To support 

theoretical studies, students will have opportunity to 

conduct tests that demonstrate the real behaviour of 

fluids while comparing findings to calculated values. 

The emphasis in this course is to ensure students 

understand the theoretical and practical mechanics 

that govern fluid flow. 

FN1100 PERSONAL FINANCE 

This course is an introduction to the basic principles 

and concepts of personal finance. The course is 

organized into three parts: financial planning, financial 

security and credit. In part one, financial planning, the 

student learns how to make financial plans for saving 

and spending, the functions of wills, and the basics 

of the taxation system. In part two, financial security, 

the student examines economic risks and ways to 

minimize them. In part three, credit, the student 

explores the complexities of consumer credit. 

FN2110 BUSINESS FINANCE 


This course is an introduction to the complexities 

of business financial management. Specific topics 

will include financial analysis and planning, working 

capital management, capital budgeting and long-term 

financing. Financial considerations will be both short 

term and long term and will integrate concepts from 

accounting, statistics and economics. 

FN2111 BUSINESS FINANCE II 

Prerequisite: FN2110 

The purpose of this course is to extend knowledge 

and understanding of finance principles by focusing 

on various problems and decisions confronting the 

financial manager. Specific topics include sensitivity 

analysis; corporate planning models; financial 

statement analysis and forecasting; short and 

long-term financing; commercial banking; capital 

budgeting; dividends and dividend policy; options, 

swaps, futures, forwards and firm valuation; and 

mergers and acquisitions. The student will conduct 

an in-depth study of issues and tools that financial 

managers use in financial planning and strategic 

management. The course will use real-world cases to 

teach the material. 

FN2160 INVESTMENTS – AN OVERVIEW 


Banks’ customer representatives are expected to 

be familiar with the different investment avenues 

available in order to provide an effective service to 

their clients who are interested in optimizing their 

return on their investments. This course will address 

the concept of risk management and its application to 

the average investor, and will provide an overview of 

the different investment strategies and their potential 

risks and returns. 

HL1140 PRINCIPLES OF EHS 

This course introduces students to the field of 

environmental health. Learners are presented with 

both local and global environmental health issues. 

A historical background of the development of the 

environmental health field, up to and including 

recent risk assessment strategies for common 

environmental health issues, is provided. The role of 

the environmental health practitioner is emphasized.

213 


HL1210 EPIDEMIOLOGY 

Prerequisites: MA1670, HL1140 


fundamental principles and practices of historical and 

modern-day epidemiology, starting with contributions 

to common germ theory principles made in the 

past. The course will identify the common practices 

undertaken by health officials to properly describe, 

interpret, analyze and communicate disease and 

injury findings to the populations at risk. Furthermore, 

this course will assist the student in identifying 

the steps to investigate illness in the community 

and to assess illness/injury in the population both 

descriptively and analytically. Emphasis is given to the 

disparity in the disease/injury status across different 

populations. 

HL1301 COMMUNICABLE DISEASE CONTROL II 

Prerequisites: HL1310, HL1210 

A continuation of Communicable Disease Control 

I, this course looks at mitigative tactics used by 

environmental health practitioners to prevent or 

control community outbreaks and other large-scale 

biological events. The inspectional protocols involved 

in hospital infection control are also explored. 

HL1310 COMMUNICABLE DISEASE CONTROL I 


Following a brief review of the basic concepts 

involved in communicable disease control, the course 

systematically deals with the etiological agents of 

communicable disease. Emphasis, when dealing with 

each individual disease, is given to historical case 

studies, reservoirs, modes of transmission, signs and 

symptoms, and measures used by the environmental 

health officer to control its spread. In the laboratory 

exercises, students will be introduced to the 

investigation of individual known and unknown cases 

as well as the morphologic appearance of certain 

parasites in varied states, as well as to the technical 

methods of diagnosis. 

HL1410 EH INSPECTION AND INVESTIGATION 

Prerequisites: HM1560, EN2310 

This course introduces the student to the routine 

inspection and investigation fieldwork of the 

environmental health practitioner and those 

persuasive, negotiation and progressive enforcement 

skills employed in environmental health programs. 

Where possible, a considerable portion of this course 

will be spent in the field conducting actual inspections 

and investigations of food, drinking and recreational 

water, housing, communicable disease, air quality, 

occupational health and safety, and land hazards. 

HL1430 FOOD SAFETY INSPECTION AND 

INVESTIGATION 

Prerequisites: HL1301, EN1350, HL1310 

This course introduces the student to inspection/ 

investigation procedures undertaken by a food 

safety inspector/officer in the public sector that are 

important to public health protection. Inspection, 

investigation and auditing techniques common in 

the field will be demonstrated. Health promotion 

skills, negotiation skills, persuasion and progressive 

enforcement skills and their relationship to applicable 

law will be discussed. The utilization of these skills 

by food safety inspectors/officers important to a 

successful food safety protection program will be 

highlighted. The fundamentals of risk assessment, 

risk management and communication will also be 

discussed, with particular emphasis on the Hazard 

Analysis Critical Control Points (HACCP) principle 

to successfully manage a food safety intervention 

program at the local, community or national level. 

Where possible, a considerable portion of this 

course will be spent in the field conducting actual 

inspections and investigations of public food service 

settings including restaurants, cafeterias/juice stalls, 

supermarkets, long-term care facilities, institutions, 

schools, butcher shops, and food and water 

processors. 

HL1610 PUBLIC HEALTH ADMINISTRATION 


This course provides an overview of major 

administrative concepts for health professionals. 

The structural and functional development of a 

health system including its organization, financing 

and services delivery are examined. The role of the 

environmental health administrator within program 

development and leadership are studied. Particular 

emphasis is given to building a business plan 

andto focusing on public health issues as the basis 

forchange. 

HL1650 HEALTH EDUCATION AND PROMOTION 

Prerequisites: HL1310 

This course will enable the student to identify and 

evaluate relevant public health messages in the 

community and at the national level. The student will 

be expected to plan an effective health promotion 

campaign and strategy to address an emerging local 

public health issue. Topics will include conducting 

community analyses to establish pertinent public 

health issues. The student will gather data on a 

selected topic and utilize a relevant health promotion 

strategy to develop a local program, developing 

effective presentations, educational techniques and 

information dissemination to various audiences. 

FM3200 – HL1650

214 


HL1720 EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT 

Prerequisites: HL 1140 

This course is designed to introduce environmental 

health students to the procedures involved in the 

pre-planning, planning, disaster plan development, 

resourcing, exercising, training, response, and 

recovery phases of emergency preparedness 

planning. particular emphasis is given to the 

environmental health practitioners roles and 

responsibilities in biological, chemical and natural 

disaster events. 

HL1800 ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH RESEARCH 


This course continues the study of research and 

investigation in the environmental health profession. 

The design of both qualitative and quantitative study 

design methods will be examined. The development 

of a primary research report in the form of a survey 

will be undertaken with the meaningful interpretation 

of the results will be one of the main focuses in this 

course. Using the skills developed in the classroom, 

students will design and complete a primary research 

report on a topic important to environmental health in 

the State of Qatar. 

HL1900 OHS PRACTICUM 

Prerequisites: Successful completion of all program 

courses leading to a diploma in Occupational Health 

and Safety 

This seven-week practicum is designed to 

enable the student to apply the fundamental 

principles of occupational health and safety to 

the field. It will ensure that a graduating student 

has had the opportunity of functioning within a 

real world employment setting while under close 

instructional supervision. 

HL1910 FSI Practicum l 

Prerequisites: HL1140 

This seven-week work exposure is designed to 

introduce students to the workplace and enable the 

student to apply the fundamental principles of food 

safety and inspection. Particular emphasis will be 

given to ensure that the student is mentored through 

the process of job shadowing from qualified staff. 

The structure of the workplace and the organizational 

hierarchy of the workplace will be documented 

through report writing activities. Emphasis will be to 

orientate the student to the workplace and provide 

the student with the opportunity to record, document 

and reflect on learning experiences through a daily log 

journal. Where applicable, the student will be given 

the opportunity to participate in the maintenance 

and development of current and future program plans 

by assisting and participating in special projects as 

assigned. 

HL1911 FSI PRACTICUM ll 


program courses leading to a diploma in 


This seven-week work placement course is designed 

to enable the student to apply the fundamental 

principles of food safety and inspection to the field. 

It will ensure that a graduating student has had 

the opportunity of functioning within a real world 

employment setting while under close instructional 

supervision. Students are placed with the appropriate 

legislative authority who oversees food safety 

and inspection within their jurisdiction and their 

performance is evaluated by the employer. As part 

of their duties, students will be required to conduct 

independent food safety inspections and/or 

investigations and write detailed professional 

field reports to evaluate the compliance and 

non-compliance items observed during the 

inspection. Furthermore the student will utilize 

sound report writing skills to communicate the 

findings of the inspection/investigation. 

HL1920 PUBLIC HEALTH PRACTICUM l 

Prerequisites: EN1420, EN2310, HM1560, HL1310 

This seven-week work term placement is designed 


principles of environmental health to the field. It will 

ensure that the student has had the opportunity of 

functioning within a real-world employment setting 

either in the public or private sector while under 

close instructional supervision. Students are placed 

with one of the many public health-related agencies 

and their performance is evaluated by the employer. 

As part of their duties, students will be required to 

participate in public health program activities and 

expose themselves to the administrative aspects 

of the workplace. The structure and functions of 

the work term location will be emphasized and the 

student will have the opportunity to record, document 

and reflect on learning experiences through the 

completion of a daily log journal.

215 


HL1921 PUBLIC HEALTH PRACTICUM ll 

Prerequisites: Successful completion of all program 

courses leading to a diploma in Public Health 

This seven-week work term placement is designed 


principles of environmental health to the field. 

It will ensure that a graduating student has had 

the opportunity of functioning within a real-world 

employment setting, either in the public or private 

sector while under close instructional supervision. 

Students are placed with the appropriate authority 

who oversees environmental health within their 

jurisdiction and their performance is evaluated by 

the employer. As part of their duties, students will 

be required to perform public health evaluations in 

the field, write detailed professional field reports 

and evaluate the public health significance of any 

intervention(s). Furthermore the student will utilize 

sound report writing skills to communicate their 

findings. 

HL2120 DENTAL HEALTH EDUCATION 

Prerequisites: DA1350 

The dental health education component of this 

course is designed to promote skills in assessing 

dental health education needs and planning, and 

implementing and evaluating personal care including 

teaching strategies for individuals and communitybased 

groups. This course provides opportunities for 

students to demonstrate interpersonal and 

communication skills in group interactions and 

teaching activities. 

HM1300 FOOD SAFETY l 


This course will examine the introductory aspects of 

food microbiology and its relationship to food quality 

and food safety protection. The rationale for food 

safety protection will be included. There is special 

emphasis on the factors contributing to the growth 

of spoilage and pathogenic microorganisms and the 

means in which they can be controlled. The student 

will examine the microbiology criteria important 

in promoting safe food. The student will receive 

training in basic food safety. Students must complete 

all aspects of the course to receive FoodSafe 

certification (FoodSafe Level 1). Lab sessions 

will familiarize students with various food safety 

evaluation techniques as well as the calibration 

and the use of testing equipment used to promote 

food safety. 

HM1301 FOOD SAFETY II 

Prerequisites: HM1300, 

This course will further examine the aspects of 

food safety and a successful food safety program 

in the community and from a global perspective. 

The Hazard Analysis Critical Control Point HACCP 

system is examined and then used to demonstrate 

how food safety risks can be minimized in all areas 

of food handling from “field to fork.” Case studies 

and current literature provide an up-to-date study of 

the pathogens that can be acquired through food, 

and the modern-day mitigation strategies. Emerging 

issues current to the food industry will be discussed 

and examined. Lab sessions will familiarize students 

with various food safety procedures, including 

outbreak investigations and the types of field testing 

equipment used in the field. In addition, field trips 

will be planned to provide examples of food safety 

inspection practices and interventions. Students must 

successfully complete all aspects of the course to 

receive FoodSafe certification (FoodSafe Level 2). 

HM1560 FOOD SAFETY 

Prerequisites: HL 1140 

This course will examine all aspects of food safety 

from a global perspective. An examination of the 

major types of food products will be included, with 

special emphasis on both the intrinsic and extrinsic 

factors responsible for food safety. Case studies 

and current literature provide an up-to-date study 

of the pathogens that can be acquired through 

food, and the state-of-the-art mitigation strategies. 

The Hazard Analysis Critical Control Point (HACCP) 

system is examined in and then used to demonstrate 

how food safety risks can be minimized in all areas 

of food handling from “field to fork.” Lab sessions 

will familiarize students with various food safety 

intervention strategies and procedures and the types 

of testing equipment used to evaluate food safety 

practices in the field. Field trips will provide examples 

of the food safety strategies utilized in areas of 

production or foodservice to protect public health. 

Students must successfully complete all aspects 

of the course to receive FoodSafe certification 

(FoodSafe Level 1 and FoodSafe Level 2). 

HL1720 – HM1560

216 


HM2310 FOOD EQUIPMENT AND PROCESSING 

Prerequisites: HM1301 

This course will introduce the student to the history 

and importance of the food industry in modern-day 

society together with the evolution of food processing 

and food preservation practices. The fundamental 

principles and characteristics of food science and 

food processing practices will be explained together 

with the various methods employed in the commercial 

food industry to process food. The chemical, physical 

and biological properties of food will be explained 

in the context of food processing practices and 

food science. Students will gain an understanding 

of correct processing procedures and the impact 

of processing on food safety, nutritional quality, 

sensory perception, aesthetic quality and shelf life. 

Furthermore, the student will gain an understanding 

on the importance of food security to global and 

national sustainability. 

HN1100 INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL 

RELATIONS 

This is an introductory course in the theory and 

practice of industrial relations in Canada. Practical 

examples will be explored to reinforce the theoretical 

concepts and to highlight important industrial 

relation issues. The course will examine the collective 

bargaining process, the grievance procedure, related 

laws and regulations, and the administration of 

collective agreements. 

HN1150 HUMAN RESOURCES OPERATIONS 

Prerequisites: HN2200, HN2150, HN1230, HN1240 

Students will learn to solve problems through the 

integration and application of previous knowledge into 

practical situations. This is a case study course where 

the students will use knowledge gained throughout 

their program to date. Students will be exposed to 

a wide range of major topics, including employment 

issues for both local and expatriate hires, payroll and 

records management, and future issues. 

HN1230 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT I 

This is an introductory course in the foundations of 

human resource management. The course will cover 

strategic human resource management, the law 

and human resource management, human resource 

planning, job analysis and job design, recruitment, 

selection, socialization and orientation, training, 

development, and career planning. 

HN1240 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT II 

Prerequisites: HN1230 

This is an introductory course in some major functions 

within the area of human resource management. 

The following topics will be explored in this course: 

performance appraisals, compensation, indirect 

compensation/employee benefits, communication 

and motivation, workplace safety and health, 

employee relations, international human resource 

management and human resource auditing/evaluation. 

HN1400 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY 

This is an introductory course in the fundamental 

principles and practices of occupational health 

and safety (OH&S). A solid understanding of OH&S 

issues, legislation and programs is essential to 

create an effective OH&S program. The learner will 

explore development of OH&S; costs of accidents, 

injuries and workplace illnesses; legislation and 

regulation; hazards and agents; hazard recognition 

and assessment; workplace compensation; accident 

investigation; and OH&S program management. 

Learners will have the opportunity to apply various 

OH&S practices and techniques using case studies 

and simulations and to obtain WHMIS certification. 

HN2100 COLLECTIVE AGREEMENT 

ADMINISTRATION 


This course will examine in depth the issues involved 

in the interpretation, application and administration of 

a collective agreement. The learner will explore public 

service collective bargaining, regulating the collective 

agreement, collective agreement administration, 

collective agreement clauses, and the legal issues in 

interpreting and administering collective agreements. 

Learners will have the opportunity to apply and 

interpret various collective agreement administration 

techniques, practices and clauses using case studies 

and application assignments. 

HN2110 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 

This course will examine the various types of thirdparty 

assistance available to both management and 

unions in resolving disputes. The learner will explore 

union management cooperation, industrial conflict/ 

disputes, conciliation/mediation, picketing/boycotts, 

grievances and grievance (rights) arbitration, and 

alternative dispute resolution. Learners will have the 

opportunity to apply and research various dispute 

resolution techniques and practices.

217 


HN2130 RECRUITMENT AND SELECTION 


This course will examine in some depth the current 

process, issues and practices involved in the 

recruitment and selection function. The learner 

will explore the staffing function, legal compliance, 

information sources for staffing, reliability and validity 

of performance predictors, recruitment, selection, 

staffing evaluation, and emerging trends in staffing. 


staffing techniques and practices using case studies 

and application assignments. 

HN2140 ATTENDANCE AND DISABILITY 

MANAGEMENT 

Prerequisites: HN1240, HN1400 

This course will examine in some depth the 

current processes, issues and practices involved 

in attendance and disability management. The 

learner will explore the various laws and regulations 

affecting the practice of attendance and disability 

management, attendance management systems/ 

procedures, disability management programs, 

best practices in disability management, legal and 

ethical issues in disability management, disability 

management in a unionized environment, and 

attendance management and disability management 

policy/plan development. Learners will have 

the opportunity to research various attendance 

management and disability management practices 

and procedures. 

HN2150 TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT 

Prerequisite: HN1240 

This course will examine in some depth the current 

processes, issues and practices involved in the 

training and development function. The learner will 

explore needs analysis, training design, methods and 

evaluation, development methods and evaluation, and 

emerging trends in the field. Learners will have the 

opportunity to apply various training and development 

techniques and practices using case studies and 

application assignments. 

HN2160 HUMAN RESOURCE OPERATIONS 

Prerequisites: HN1230, HN2200, HN2150 

After completing this course the student will have 

an understanding of the business processes that are 

common in the human resources department and 

how technology can play a vital role. This course gives 

the students a practical view of the work of a human 

resources department using currently available 

technology – HR operations using HRIS, Internet, 

intranet and web-based applications. 

HN2200 COMPENSATION AND BENEFITS 


The objective of this course is to provide an 

understanding of the process, issues and 

techniques involved in developing and administering 

a compensation system. Attention is given to a 

compensation system that rewards employees fairly 

while motivating them to perform and permitting 

the organization to operate properly. In addition, 

key issues relating to employee benefits planning, 

design and administration will be reviewed. Practical 

simulations will be used to reinforce the concepts and 

techniques. 

HN2210 HUMAN RESOURCE PLANNING 


The primary objective of this course is to provide an 

understanding of the essential elements of the human 

resource planning process. Quantitative as well as 

qualitative concepts, approaches and techniques are 

emphasized. 

HN2230 EMPLOYEE RELATIONS 

This course is designed to provide learners with 

an introduction to employee relations, the area of 

human resource management which is concerned 

with maintaining positive and healthy relationships 

in the workplace. Emphasis is placed on the key 

dimensions of employee relations, including 

employee communication, counselling, discipline, 

and employee rights and involvement. 

HN2310 ALTERNATE DISPUTE RESOLUTION 

Prerequisites: HN1240, CM2200, LW1240 

The purpose of this course is to give human resource 

management students a working knowledge of 

conflict resolution outside of a collective agreement 

environment and avoiding the use of the legal system. 

Students will understand the nature of conflict and 

be able to diagnose a conflict so that an appropriate 

alternate dispute resolution mechanism can be 

selected. Students will become familiar with the 

various resolution mechanisms that are available to 

resolve a dispute, the advantages and disadvantages 

of each, and how to apply the criteria needed to 

choose one and follow through with it. 

HM2310 – HN2310

218 


HN3110 CURRENT TOPICS IN HUMAN RESOURCE 

MANAGEMENT AND INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS 


Co-requisites: HN2110, HN2210 

This learner-led seminar-based course will examine 

issues, topics and trends in the area of human 

resource management and industrial relations that 

are of recent and current concern to human resource 

professionals today. Learners will research, develop 

and present a seminar/paper on selected issues/ 

topics/trends from among the following areas 

explored in this course: the field/practice of human 

resource management; the field/practice of industrial 

relations; recruitment and selection; occupational 

health and safety; employment and labour law; 

collective agreement administration; attendance and 

disability management; compensation and benefits; 

human resource planning; and dispute resolution. 

In addition, learners will have the opportunity to 

research and critique a current journal article. 

HR2400 PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT 

This course is designed to prepare the students for 

the workplace. The focus is on acquiring the skills of 

a successful professional employee. The students will 

learn how to assess and refine their own skills and to 

match these skills with employment opportunities. 

KB1150 KEYBOARDING I 

This course develops keyboarding speed and 

accuracy. Keyboarding speed on straight copy 

material is developed to 30 net words per minute 

for five (5) minutes. 

Note: Students must achieve a typing speed of 30 net 

words per minute in order to pass KB1150. 

KB1151 KEYBOARDING Il 

This course continues to develop keyboarding 

speed and accuracy. Keyboarding speed is developed 

to a minimum of 40 net words per minute for 

five (5) minutes. 



KB1151. 

LS1000 CAEL PREPARATION 

Following the identification of language needs based 

on a diagnostic exam, students will further develop 

their listening, speaking, reading and writing skills 

through an integrated language learning approach. 

Students will develop individual skill improvement 

plans and test-taking strategies for the overall 

improvement of their performance on the Canadian 

Academic English Language (CAEL) Test. 

LW1210 LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAW 

Prerequisites: HN1100, HN1240 

This course will examine the ever-changing 

subordinate legislation, statute and common law 

in Canada that deals with union-management 

relations and interactions, as well as the relations 

and interactions between individual (non-unionized) 

employees and their employers. The course is 

designed to provide learners with a current overview 

of the Canadian system of labour and employment 

law. The learner will explore employment law, labour 

law, and statute/subordinate legislation for labour and 

employment law. Learners will have the opportunity 

to apply and research various employment and labour 

law legislation and cases. 

LW1240 QATAR BUSINESS LAW 

This course will introduce students to the legal 

system used in Qatar with the emphasis on those 

laws affecting business. Students will understand the 

sources of law and how they are applied, especially 

those laws with the most impact on businesses 

in Qatar. 

LW2400 E-BUSINESS LAW AND REGULATIONS 

This course will focus on the legal, security and 

privacy issues pertaining to doing business on the 

Internet. Students will gain knowledge of various 

legal and regulatory issues including copyright, 

intellectual property, trademarks, confidential 

information encryption and privacy. Business 

contracts appropriate for the Internet will also be 

addressed. Guest speakers from the legal community 

with expertise in the areas identified will be invited to 

share their experience with students. 

MA1011 PREPARATORY BUSINESS MATH 


This is a course in preparatory mathematics designed 


mathematical skills and thereby increase their 


second of two preparatory courses designed to 

provide the fundamentals of mathematics. Its focus is 

on mathematical concepts with business applications. 

MA1025 PREPARATORY MATHEMATICS I 

Prerequisite: College Academic Math Placement 

Test Result 




chances for success in further courses. It is the first 

of two preparatory courses designed to provide the 

fundamentals of mathematics.

219 


MA1026 PREPARATORY MATHEMATICS II 






second of two preparatory courses designed to 

provide the fundamentals of mathematics. 

MA1101 MATHEMATICS 

Prerequisites: MA1700, MA1100 

This is a course designed to prepare students for the 

study of calculus as well as to introduce as well as to 

familiarize them with the concepts of differentiation 

necessary for a better understanding of a variety of 

technology courses. 

MA1400 MATHEMATICS OF FINANCE I 

This is an introductory course designed to provide 

basic understanding of business mathematics. Its 

primary objective is to increase a student’s knowledge 

and skills in the solution of practical financial and 

mathematical problems encountered in the business 

community. It also provides a support base for 

material in more advanced courses in the business 

field. The topics covered in this course include 

mathematics fundamentals, linear systems, simple 

interest and mathematics of merchandising. 

MA1530 STATISTICS 

This course is designed to introduce the student 

to the basic principles of statistics with the use of 

Microsoft Excel. 

MA1670 STATISTICS 


basic principles of probability and statistics. 


This is a course in pre-calculus mathematics designed 



chances for success in other technical courses. 

MA1730 MATHEMATICS FOR PHARMACY 

TECHNICIANS 


This mathematics course is designed to support 

the mathematical needs related to the pharmacy 

profession. This course will develop specific skills 

related to conversions, dosage, marketing and other 

calculations required by the pharmacy technician in 

day-to-day work. 

MA1900 PROBLEM SOLVING FOR INFORMATION 

TECHNOLOGY 

The course is intended to illustrate how to 

develop logic for computer programs. To aid in the 

development of the student’s use of problem solving 

techniques necessary for information technology, 

a practical mathematical background is provided in 

this course as it applies to business data processing. 

A review of basic algebra and computer-related 

mathematical topics is covered. 

MA1910 INTRODUCTION TO NUMERICAL 

PROBLEM SOLVING 

Prerequisites: MC1830, MA1900 

A practical mathematical background is provided in 

this course as it applies to business data processing. 

This course deals with various approaches to problem 

solving and decision making using management 

science techniques (quantitative analysis). 

The student will investigate the following 

business-oriented problem and decision making 

topics: optimization, transportation schedules, 

assignment problems, waiting line (queuing), model 

analysis and deterministic inventory models. 



In this course students will extend their study 

of topics in differential calculus and will also be 

introduced to integral calculus. Topics covered 

will assist students to better understand concepts 

encountered in other courses. 



This is an advanced calculus course designed to meet 

specific requirements of the electrical/electronic 

engineering programs. 

MA2400 MATHEMATICS OF FINANCE II 


This is an advanced course designed to provide a 

more in-depth study of the mathematics of finance. 

Students will advance their knowledge in interest, 

annuity, amortization of debt, and investment 

opportunities. 

HN3110 – MA2400

220 


MA3700 PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS 

MANAGEMENT 

Prerequisites: MA2400, MA1670, MC1241 

This course is designed to provide the student with an 

understanding of the process involved in production 

management and operations management. 

Operations management involves design, planning, 

control and improvement of the activities or 

processes that transform a firm’s inputs into final 

products. In this course, the student will study the 

building blocks of operations management. The 

student will study the importance of interaction and 

coordination of business areas to meet organizational 

goals. Various mathematical and computerized 

models are introduced and their application to the 

decision making process is emphasized. 

MC1080 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS 


introduction to computer systems. Particular 

emphasis is given to word processing, spreadsheets, 

e-mail, the Internet, and major security issues. Upon 

successful completion of this course, students will 

have a basic understanding of computer systems and 

their operation, popular software packages and their 

applications, and security issues of computers. 

MC1220 PRODUCTIVITY TOOLS 

This course is designed to teach students the 

fundamental concepts of the Windows operating 

environment, keyboarding by the touch method, basic 

word processing procedures, the use of e-mail and 

the Internet. Students will apply concepts through 

practical application. 

MC1240 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS I 

This course will introduce the students to: the use 

of e-mail and the Internet; manipulating files in 

the Windows operating environment; basic word 

processing techniques; and basic presentation 

creation techniques. Students will apply concepts 

through practical application. 

MC1241 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS II 

Prerequisite: MC1240 

The course is designed to expose the student to 

software packages that can be used to create 

spreadsheets and websites. At the end of the course, 

students will create a portfolio by integrating projects 

and work created throughout the course. 

MC1820 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS 

Prerequisites: MC1830 

The course is designed to expose the student to 

software packages that can be used to create 

spreadsheets, technical drawings and websites. 

MC1830 FUNDAMENTAL COMPUTER 

APPLICATIONS 

This course will introduce the students to the 

fundamental concepts of the Windows operating 

environment, keyboarding by the touch method, basic 

word processing techniques, the use of e-mail and the 

Internet, and basic presentation creation techniques. 

Students will apply concepts through practical 

application. 

MC2220 PRODUCTIVITY TOOLS 

Prerequisites: MC1221 

Students will gain knowledge in database 

development as well as advanced features of 

electronic spreadsheets. 

MH1110 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 

This course is designed to assist students in 

becoming fully familiar with the principles of design, 

operation and maintenance of small high-pressure 

boilers such as those found in fish plants, heating 

plants, office buildings, and heating, ventilating and 

air conditioning (HVAC). 

MH2320 POWER PLANT COMPONENTS 

Prerequisites: PO1100 or equivalent 

This is a course designed to develop the basic skills 

needed to operate and maintain steam generation 

systems. 

MH2400 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION OF 

ROTATING EQUIPMENT 

Prerequisites: PF1180, MH1110 

This course is designed to provide experience in the 

installation and operation of rotating machines, flow 

lines and ancillary equipment. The emphasis will 

be on development of practical skills that facilitate 

independent installation and operation of mechanical 

equipment. 

MH2810 PROCESS SYSTEMS – PETROLEUM 

PROCESSING FACILITIES 

Prerequisite: MH2310 

This course is designed to introduce students to 

the principles, operation and general maintenance 

requirements of selected petroleum processing 

equipment used at onshore refineries. The student 

will become acquainted with the purpose, operation 

and maintenance required to operate the common 

equipment systems and components used in a refinery. 

MH3340 POWER PLANT SYSTEMS 

Prerequisite: MH1110 or PO1100 


needed to operate and maintain power plant systems.

221 


MH4410 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 


This is a course designed to develop the practical 

and theoretical skills needed to operate and maintain 

a refrigeration plant system to a third class power 

engineer’s level. 

MH4425 MAINTENANCE OF ROTATING 

EQUIPMENT 

Prerequisite: MW1710 

This hands-on introductory course is designed 

to provide the student with practical skills in the 

mechanical maintenance of rotating equipment. Using 

both non-intrusive and intrusive diagnosis, the student 

will inspect equipment, perform routine maintenance 

tasks and disassemble/reassemble various types of 

rotating machines. 

MH4500 PRIME MOVERS 

Prerequisite: MH1110 or PO1100 


needed to operate and maintain a power plant 

system. 

MM1950 WORKPLACE PROFESSIONALISM 

This course is designed to provide students with the 

skills and knowledge necessary to effectively work in 

a team environment. 

MN1260 ANALYZING BUSINESS CASES 

This is a discussion-led, case-based course drawing 

on real business problems from companies in 

the Gulf and the rest of the world. This course 

is designed to help business students develop 

their skills in reasoning, analysis and the use of 

logical arguments for practical application in the 

workplace. Students who successfully complete 

this course will have a better understanding of how 

to work in teams, critically assess a problem, and 

make recommendations based on sound business 

frameworks. 

MN1340 INTRODUCTION TO LOGISTICS AND 

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT 

This course is designed to introduce the key concepts 

and core requirements needed for a business to 

organize an integrated approach to the planning, 

acquisition and distribution required to facilitate the 

efficient flow of materials and services into finished 

products. 

MN1520 SUPERVISORY LEADERSHIP 

This course will prepare the student with skills to work 

in leadership and supervisory positions in a variety 

of workplace settings. Emphasis is placed on the 

unique challenges facing the supervisor as the first 

level of management in most organizations. Concepts 

and theories will be explored through case studies, 

projects and in-class exercises designed to simulate 

the daily challenges facing supervisors and leaders. 

MN2600 STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 


second-year Business Administration courses 

This course will enable students to be exposed 

to the interrelationship of the functional areas of 

business. The focus will be on strategy development 

for business management, enabling students to 

apply organizational, financial, human resource and 

marketing decisions to business applications. 

MN3100 BUSINESS ETHICS 

Prerequisite: PS2340 

This course will examine business ethical principles/ 

concepts as well as the many ethical issues/dilemmas 

facing organizations today. The course will also 

explore the various government regulations and laws 

impacting and restricting business operations, as well 

as stakeholders and corporate social responsibility/ 

governance, ethical issues in the workplace, business 

ethics and the law, ethical decision making, ethics 

program and audits, and globalization and emerging 

trends. Learners will have the opportunity to research, 

analyze and critique various organizational practices 

and policies, particularly codes of conduct and codes 

of ethics. 

MN3200 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT 

Prerequisite: HN1240, PS2340 

This course will examine the importance of an 

effective performance management system in helping 

organizations define and achieve long-term and 

short-term goals vital to its overall success. It will 

reinforce the concept that performance management 

is an ongoing process of planning, facilitating, 

assessing and improving individual and organizational 

performance. The learner will explore the value 

of performance management and its context, 

performance management process and strategic 

planning, setting performance standards, effective 

performance appraisal systems, performance 

management and employee development plans, 

performance coaching, and team performance. 


performance management practices and techniques 

using case studies and application assignments. 

MA3700 – MN3200

222 


MP1200 ELECTRICAL MOTORS 


This course covers the characteristics and application 

of AC and DC motors. The course begins with a review 

of electromechanical fundamentals and progresses 

on to the major types of DC and AC motors commonly 

found in industry. 

MP2110 ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND MACHINES 


This is an intermediate-level electrotechnology 

course designed for industrial instrument technician 

students. It is intended to familiarize the student 

with the construction, connection, operation 

and maintenance of rotating electric machines. 

Additionally, this course should expand the student’s 

understanding of electromechanical conversion 

principles. Laboratory work is included to reinforce 

theoretical concepts and enhance skills in the use of 

measuring instruments. 

MP2160 ELECTROMECHANICAL MOTOR 

CONTROLS 


This course introduces the student to motor control 

concepts and electromechanical control devices. 

The students become familiar with control diagrams, 

techniques and methods. It provides the students 

with knowledge and background to support the 

more advanced control concepts presented in later 

courses. 

MP2220 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION 

SYSTEMS 


This course introduces students to transmission 

and distribution (T&D) systems focusing on lines, 

cables and switchgear. The TERCO PST will be used 

extensively to allow students to experience T&D 

system operations. 

MP2230 POWER SYSTEM HARMONICS 

This is an introductory course in power system 

harmonics covering sources, problems, Fourier 

analysis and solutions. The laboratory component will 

further develop and strengthen the understanding and 

skills related to harmonic and Fourier analysis. 

MP2250 ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION 

FACILITIES 


This course familiarizes the student with the electrical 

equipment and systems found in a typical Gulf 

electrical generation/desalinization plant. Prime 

movers, generators, transformers and buses are 

covered primarily from the standpoint of construction 

and operational characteristics. Extensive use will be 

made of the TERCO simulator in developing student 

awareness in the operation of bulk power plant 

generation systems. 

MP2260 SOLID STATE MOTOR CONTROLS 

Prerequisites: AE1260, MP2160 

This course introduces the student to solid state 

electronics in motor controls. It includes coverage 

of power electronic devices, solid state relays and 

protection devices, and drive electronics. 

MP2300 AC CIRCUITS 

Prerequisites: ET2100 

This course is designed to be a continuation of 

the electrotechnology courses. It is designed to 

strengthen the student’s ability to analyze single- 

and three-phase AC circuits, as well as reinforce the 

students understanding of magnetic circuits. The 

laboratory work is included as an application of the 

theoretical concepts and an enhancement of skills in 

the use of AC measuring instruments. 

MP2350 TRANSFORMERS 

Prerequisites: MA2100, MP2300 

This course is designed to be a continuation of the 

electrotechnology courses. It is designed to expand 

the student’s knowledge of transformers and the 

associated applications, standards and loading 

guides. Additionally it will enhance the student’s 

ability to analyze single- and three-phase AC circuits 

as well as provide an application for advanced 

mathematical analysis techniques. 

MP2370 POWER SYSTEM TRANSFORMERS 

Prerequisites: MP1200, MA1101 

This course focuses on the transformer, especially the 

electrical and construction characteristics of units 

commonly found in a typical electrical power system. 

MP2910 DC MACHINES 


This course is an introductory course in electrical 

machine theory. It covers the basics of DC machine 

theory and provides the necessary background for 

subsequent courses in electrical machines. It will give 

the student an appreciation of rotating machinery 

and, through labs, an idea of the type and operating 

characteristics of the various DC machines.

223 


MP2920 AC MACHINES 

Prerequisites: MP2910, MP2300 

This course follows MP2910 and covers topics in 

MP2300. AC generators are studied as well as 

three-phase and single-phase motors. The theory 

learned in this course will be applied in future 

courses in power systems and motor controls. 

MP3100 MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEMS 

Prerequisites: MP2900, MP290, MP2350 

This is an advanced level course designed for 

electrical engineering technology students. It 

introduces the student to relay control systems, motor 

controllers and variable speed motor drives. Upon 

successful completion, the student should be able 

to design and analyze typical relay control systems. 

Also the student should be able to select and analyze 

typical motor controllers and variable speed drives. 

Topics include relay control systems, full voltage 

starters, reduced voltage controllers, multi-speed 

controllers, wound rotor controllers, synchronous 

controllers, direct current controllers, direct current 

drives and alternating current drives. 

MP3120 HV SYSTEMS PROTECTION AND 

COORDINATION 

Prerequisite: PE3120 

This course introduces the protection schemes 

typically applied to high voltage generators, 

transformers and circuits. The primary relay functions 

are investigated, as are the characteristics of system 

abnormalities that can trigger a response from the 

protection system. 

MP3140 CIRCUIT ANALYSIS III 


Topics include waveform analysis and synthesis, 

time domain analysis, solution of differential 

equations using Laplace transforms, application 

of Laplace transforms to solve electric circuit and 

derivation of transfer functions, and Fourier expansion 

of even and odd periodic functions. As well, topics 

include analysis of waveforms and their application 

to electrical signals, impulse response, convolution 

and transfer function. 

MP3150 POWER DEVICES AND MOTOR DRIVES 

Prerequisites: AE2250, MP3100 

This course is a study of electronic variable speed 

motor drives. Power electronic device theory is 

covered as background for drive electronics. AC 

and DC drives are studied as well as installation, 

commissioning and troubleshooting. 

MP3201 POWER TRANSMISSION AND 

DISTRIBUTION 


This is the follow-up course to MP3100 and covers 

further topics in power system analysis. Short circuit 

calculations for symmetrical and asymmetrical 

faults are covered. Students will get hands-on usage 

of a commercial power system analysis computer 

simulation program (Electrocon 2000). Students will 

be introduced to the principles of protection and 

coordination. 

MP3330 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION 

SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL ANALYSIS 

Prerequisite: MP31XX 

This course covers the basic analysis techniques used 

to study power flow on radial transmission line circuits 

as well as between buses on a grid. Students are also 

introduced to the basic analytical techniques used 

when studying electrical faults on HV systems as well 

as to load flow and short circuit software programs. 

MR1100 MARKETING I 


principles and practices of marketing. The student 

will explore strategic planning and marketing 

management, the Internet in marketing, marketing 

research information, consumer markets and 

behaviour, business markets and behaviour, market 

segmentation and targeting, and international 

marketing. Students will have the opportunity to 

apply case studies and research various marketing 

concepts, techniques and processes. 

MR1260 CUSTOMER SERVICE FOR THE 

COMPUTER INDUSTRY 

This course focuses on the role of an information 

technology employee in providing quality technical 

customer service in any given situation. Students will 

develop the skills they need to interact effectively 

with customers, either face-to-face, on the telephone, 

in writing or on the web. Some of the topics covered 

will be quality customer service, communicating 

with customers, handling difficult customers, solving 

and preventing problems, working as a team, and 

managing stress and burnout. 

MR1280 CUSTOMER SERVICE 

This course focuses on the role of the employee in 

providing quality customer service. It is important that 

employees have a positive attitude and the necessary 

skills to effectively listen to and interpret customers 

concerns about a product, resolve customers’ 

problems, and determine customers’ wants and 

needs. Students will be able to use the skills and 

knowledge gained in this course to effectively provide 

a consistently high level of service to the customer. 

MP1200 – MR1280

224 


MR1500 CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR 

Prerequisite: MR2100 

This course introduces the student to the concepts, 

theories and techniques of consumer behaviour. The 

student will explore the fundamentals of consumer 

behaviour in order to gain an understanding of 

the motivation behind purchase decisions. By 

understanding the consumer’s behaviour, students 

are able to make more market-focused strategic 

decisions. Students will have the opportunity to 

apply their knowledge through the use of case 

analysis and assignments. 

MR1600 PROFESSIONAL SELLING 

Prerequisites: CM1241, MR2100, CM2200 


principles and practices of professional selling. 

The course is designed to teach the student about 

competencies in prospecting, identifying client needs 

and dealing with objections while building client 

relationships. The student will take part in videotaped 

selling exercises to review and master their selling 

techniques. Students will have the opportunity to 

apply various techniques and practices through case 

analysis and the use of a sales simulation. 

MR2100 MARKETING II 



principles and practices of marketing. The student 

will explore product development and life cycle, price, 

distribution and supply chain management, retailing 

and wholesaling, promotion, advertising, and personal 

selling. Students will have the opportunity to apply 

various marketing techniques and practices using 

case studies and application assignments. 

MR2200 RETAILING 


This course is designed as an introduction to the 

concepts, theories and techniques of retailing. 

The student will explore the concepts of buyer 

behaviour, strategic retail management, retail 

design, presentation, and pricing. Students will have 

the opportunity to apply various retail techniques 

and practices using case studies and application 

assignments, and will develop communication skills 

through class discussions and group activities. 

MR2300 BUSINESS RESEARCH 

Prerequisite: MR2100, MA1670 

This course introduces students to the field of 

business research through the examination of the 

various techniques, principles, skills and activities 

required to create and present an effective and 

comprehensive report. It will familiarize the student 

with the ways that marketing information can be 

obtained and/or produced and how it is used to 

provide insight into markets, customers, products 

and business strategies for business decision making 

purposes. Students will have the opportunity to apply 

various research techniques and practices using case 

studies and application assignments culminating in 

the preparation and presentation of a research report. 

MR2350 E-BUSINESS 

Prerequisites: MR2100, MC1241 

This course is designed to introduce the student to 

the managerial and technical aspects of electronic 

business and commerce. Students will gain 

knowledge of the competitive electronic business 

field and will be equipped to help businesses assess 

possible opportunities through this rapidly evolving 

technology. They will be exposed to the concepts 

of customer relationship management, marketing 

communications, supply chain management, web 

analytics, and taxation and ethical issues as they 

relate to e-business. Students will also have the 

opportunity to apply various e-business techniques 

and practices using case studies and applicationbased 

assignments, including web page development. 

MR2400 MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS 

Prerequisites: MR2100, CM1241 

This course will examine the current processes, issues 

and practices involved in marketing communications. 

The student will explore communications as it 

relates to print, television, radio and other media, 

and will have the opportunity to apply their creativity 

in developing tools in these media for local uses 

wherever possible. The student will also examine how 

marketing communications affects the purchase and 

post-purchase behaviour of the consumer and apply 

various marketing communication techniques and 

practices using case studies, application assignments 

and a major project.

225 


MR2450 SERVICES MARKETING 


This course is designed to enable the student to apply 

the concepts and strategies of marketing relevant 

to the service sector. The student will explore in 

some depth various aspects of services marketing, 

including service productivity, service marketing 

distribution, service pricing concepts, positioning 

in service marketing, and service personnel 

management. Students will have the opportunity to 

apply their knowledge of these marketing concepts 

and strategies using a case project, application 

assignments and presentations. 

MR2620 SALES MANAGEMENT 


This advanced course will provide the student with 

the opportunity to explore the practical components 

of the professional sales manager. The student will 

gain and deepen their knowledge in the areas of sales 

management, planning, forecasting and account 

relationship, as well as sales force organization, 

operations, staffing and training. Students will have 

the opportunity to demonstrate the application of 

concepts through field work assignments, case 

analysis, research and presentations. 

MR2700 INTERNATIONAL MARKETING 


This course is designed to enable the student to 

apply the concepts of marketing in an international 

context. The student will research and evaluate 

foreign markets and apply marketing concepts 

relevant to strategy development in foreign 

markets identified by exporting and transnational 

organizations. The student will have the opportunity 

to acquire knowledge of international environmental 

influences, preparation for international markets, and 

the international marketing mix, and to apply various 

international marketing techniques and practices 

using case studies and application assignments. 

MR2800 BUSINESS-TO-BUSINESS MARKETING 


This course will enable the student to apply the 

concepts of marketing in a business customer 

context, to research and evaluate business markets, 

and to apply marketing concepts relevant to strategy 

development in manufacturing, trade, institutional 

and not-for-profit organizations. The student will use 

analysis of business buyer behaviour, segmentation 

and targeting, business marketing strategy, marketing 

communications and personal selling techniques 

to analyze case studies and complete application 

assignments. 

MR3100 CURRENT TOPICS IN MARKETING 


Co-requisites: MR2620, MR2700 

This student-led seminar-based course will examine 

issues, topics and trends in the area of marketing 

that are of recent and current concern to marketing 

professionals today. Students will research, 

develop and present a seminar/paper on selected 

issues/topics/trends from among the following 

areas explored in this course: the field/practice 

of consumer behaviour, professional selling, sales 

management, retailing, e-business, marketing 

communications, services marketing, business-tobusiness 

marketing, and international marketing. 

In addition, students will have the opportunity to 

research and critique a current journal article. 

MW1700 INDUSTRIAL MECHANICS: POWER 

TRANSMISSIONS, SEALS AND BEARINGS 



operation and maintenance of mechanical power 

transmissions. The student will disassemble and 

install components such as bearings and seals 

while doing visual inspections to determine the 

cause of component failures before reassembling 

the transmission. Transmissions will be aligned to 

their prime movers using dial and laser alignment 

technology. The student will also determine proper 

maintenance and selection of components and 

lubricants from manufacturers’ specifications and 

catalogues. 

MW1710 CONDITION MONITORING 


This course in industrial mechanics involves 

vibration and alignment of industrial machinery. In 

the alignment area the student will be involved with 

installing, maintaining and replacing motors and 

aligning shafts using dial indicators, levelling and 

optical laser alignment equipment. Alignment is a key 

factor in machinery vibration and the student will be 

using dynamic vibration testing equipment to analyze 

vibration sources and corrective actions. The vibration 

analyses will also form part of the preventative 

and predictive maintenance scheduling for plant 

equipment. 

MR1500 – MW1710

226 


MW1720 CONVEYOR SYSTEMS 


This is an introductory course that provides the 

student with the fundamentals of conveyor system 

design, operation and maintenance. The student will 

use industrial catalogues to select conveyor systems 

for particular industrial applications. The shop work 

is designed to apply the skills learned in mechanical 

studies to the maintenance of conveyor systems. 

MX1510 CLINICAL RADIOGRAPHY ORIENTATION 

Prerequisites: Successful completion of fifth semester 

The in-depth clinical orientation during Semester 6 

is designed to reinforce in a practical manner the 

theoretical knowledge the students have acquired 

during the didactic segment of their program. For 

16 weeks, under the direction and supervision 

of a clinical instructor or designate, students will 

participate in a variety of basic routine radiographic 

procedures. Students will become familiar with 

various basic and specialized radiographic equipment 

used in today’s modern diagnostic imaging 

departments. Throughout this semester, students will 

learn to apply their understanding of the concepts 

and techniques used in providing quality diagnostic 

radiographic imaging, patient care and radiation 

protection in a real-life setting. 

MX2102 RADIOGRAPHIC ANATOMY AND 

PATHOLOGY 


In order for a technologist to competently perform any 

diagnostic radiographic examination, a complete and 

thorough knowledge of human anatomy is required. 

It is also essential that the student be able to identify 

anatomical structures on the radiograph; differentiate 

between the normal and abnormal radiographic 

images; use knowledge of tissue densities, either 

normal or pathological; and be able to accurately 

locate hidden structures by relating to surface 

landmarks. In addition, the pathologies relevant to the 

skeletal, circulatory and lymphatic systems and their 

radiological significance will be discussed. 

MX2103 RADIOGRAPHIC ANATOMY AND 

PATHOLOGY 

Prerequisites: MX2102 

This course is a continuation of MX2102, where 

the student will continue to learn a complete and 

thorough knowledge of human anatomy. Anatomical 

structures will be located by relating to surface 

landmarks. Identification of anatomical structures 

on the radiographic image as well as the ability 

to differentiate between normal and abnormal 

anatomical appearance is required. The student will 

become knowledgeable of the structure, function, 

location and radiographic appearance of structures in 

the skull, as well as the following anatomical systems: 

digestive, respiratory, urinary, reproductive, nervous 

and endocrine systems. Associated pathologies, 

in particular those which may be demonstrated 

radiographically, are studied, as well as crosssectional 

anatomy of the skull, chest, abdomen and 

spine as related to CT imaging. 

MX2110 RADIOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUE 


Co-requisites: MX2102, MX2410, MX2310, MX2200 

This course is designed to introduce the student 

to the fundamental practices involved in the 

performance of radiographic imaging. Instructional 

areas include terminology, interventional radiology 

(IR) identification, patient/technologist relationship, 

examination protocol, radiation protection and 

technologist responsibility. Emphasis will be placed 

on basic, alternate and specialized imaging of 

the appendicular axial skeleton, angiography and 

lymphangiography. 

MX2120 RADIOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUE 

Prerequisite: MX2110 

This course will consist of instruction in the basic, 

alternate and special positioning required to 

radiographically demonstrate the skull and facial 

bones, as well as body organs and structures of the 

following systems: respiratory, digestive, urinary and 

reproductive systems. Discussion, demonstration 

and clinical application will include such areas as 

foreign body localization, mobile, operating room, 

trauma radiography, bone mineral densitometry, 

interventional radiography and CT imaging. 

MX2170 DENTAL RADIOGRAPHY I 

Prerequisites: BL1210, DA1250 


the theoretical basis of the nature and production 

of x-radiation and preliminary principles and 

procedures involved with oral radiology. The emphasis 

is on radiation physics, radiation biology, radiation 

protection, basic intra-oral radiographic techniques 

and film processing.

227 


MX2171 DENTAL RADIOGRAPHY II 

Prerequisites: MX2170 

Students will learn correct technique and proper 

safety precautions of operating dental radiographic 

equipment. They will become skilled at producing 

diagnostic quality intra-oral and extra-oral 

radiographs on both adult and child mannequins. As 

well, the student will become proficient at processing, 

mounting and troubleshooting radiographic pitfalls on 

all dental radiographs. 

MX2200 IMAGE RECORDING 


Co-requisites: MX2310, PH2200 

This course is designed to give the student 

comprehensive knowledge of the process involved in 

the formation of a diagnostic x-ray image generated 

through the use of radiant energy. Students will learn 

photographic as well as digital methods of image 

capture and will become familiar with the many 

factors that affect the quality of the radiographic 

image. Image manipulation, display and archiving 

will be discussed, as well as methods of reducing 

image artifact, ensuring the production of optimum 

diagnostic images. 

MX2201 IMAGE RECORDING 

Prerequisites: MX2200, MX2310 

Co-requisite: MX2301 

This course is a continuation of MX2200. It is 

designed to provide the student with comprehensive 

knowledge of quality assurance processes associated 

with image quality management. Performance of 

specific quality control procedures necessary to 

maintain a high standard of image quality using 

both digital and analog image processing systems 

will be studied. Quality control tests for general 

radiographic units as well those used in fluoroscopy, 

CT, mammography and bone mineral densitometry 

will be studied. The importance of faithful adherence 

to quality control procedures and processes as part 

of a diagnostic imaging department’s overall risk 

management strategy will be discussed. Students 

will learn to perform inspection procedures and 

reject-image analysis as part of the overall quality 

assurance program. 

MX2301 APPARATUS AND ACCESSORIES 

Prerequisites: MX2200, MX2310 

This course is developed to allow the student to gain 

a comprehensive knowledge of a wide variety of x-ray 

generating units. They will acquire the knowledge 

and skills necessary to operate basic and 

present-day sophisticated equipment safely, 

effectively and efficiently. The student will be taught 

the physics of operation of advanced imaging 

modalities such as computed tomography and digital 

fluorographic units, as well as mammographic and 

bone mineral densitometry units. 

MX2310 APPARATUS AND ACCESSORIES 


Co-requisites: MX2200, PH2200 

This course has been developed so that the 

student will have a comprehensive knowledge of 

the production of x-radiation that will be useful for 

medical purposes. The student will understand 

the use of the x-ray tube and its components and 

characteristics that will allow the proper control of the 

x-ray beam. The student will have basic knowledge 

of the electrical circuits that are essential for the 

production of the type of x-radiation that will result 

in high-quality radiographic imaging. The student will 

learn about the effective use of grids and collimators 

to reduce patient dose and improve image quality. The 

student will have knowledge of methods employed 

to facilitate heat dissipation during the production 

of x-radiation, as well as practical skills employed to 

conserve tube life. The student will be able to identify 

signs of tube failure. 

MX2410 PATIENT CARE AND SAFETY 


Co-requisites: MX2110, MX2100 

This course is designed to provide the student 

radiographer with the necessary knowledge to provide 

good patient care in a variety of situations that might 

be encountered in the hospital environment. This 

course emphasizes basic concepts in general patient 

care, body mechanics, basic nursing skills, use of 

common drugs, as well as caring for patients with 

special needs. During this semester students will also 

receive instruction in the fundamentals of first aid and 

basic life support. 

MW1720 – MX2410

228 


MX2500 RADIATION PROTECTION AND 

RADIOBIOLOGY 

Prerequisites: BL2100, PH2200, MX2102, MX2310 

Co-requisites: MX2103 

Combined with their knowledge of radiobiology, 

students will learn how to utilize radiation to provide 

maximum diagnostic information with minimal 

biological damage to the patient. Students will 

become familiar with international, national and 

provincial standards. They will learn how to maintain 

these standards by the correct use of equipment, 

accessories and other relevant factors. They will learn 

how to provide maximum protection from ionizing 

radiation to the patient, general public, co-workers 

and themselves. 

MX3250 CLINICAL RADIOGRAPHY 


This course is designed to provide extensive clinical 

experience to students. Applied knowledge of 

anatomy and physiology, radiographic technique, 

pathology, radiation protection and patient care will 

be reinforced. Emphasis will be placed on intensive 

clinical demonstrations and application of skills 

necessary for the student to become competent in 

performing radiographic examinations in the following 

areas: vertebral column, pelvic girdle/upper femora, 

shoulder girdle, upper and lower extremities, and 

operating room/mobile radiography. The student will 

also acquire clinical experience in mammography 

and pediatrics. This course will take place over 16 

weeks under the direction and supervision of a clinical 

instructor or designate. 

MX3260 CLINICAL RADIOGRAPHY 


This course is designed to provide extensive clinical 

experience to students. Applied knowledge of 

anatomy and physiology, radiographic technique, 

pathology, radiation protection and patient care will 

be reinforced. Emphasis will be placed on intensive 

clinical demonstrations and application of skills 

necessary for the student to become competent in 

performing radiographic examinations in the following 

areas: vertebral column, pelvic girdle/upper femora, 

shoulder girdle, upper and lower extremities, and 

operating room/mobile radiography. The student will 

also acquire clinical experience in mammography 

and pediatrics. This course will take place over 16 

weeks under the direction and supervision of a clinical 

instructor or designate. 

ND1150 NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING 

Prerequisites: CH1120, PH1100 

This course introduces techniques used to detect 

discontinuities in materials without destroying 

the object. Coursework focuses on detection, 

identification, evaluation and categorization of 

discontinuities using die penetrate, magnetic particle, 

eddy current, ultrasonic and radiographic testing 

methods. Students will learn testing procedures and 

gain practical experience on a variety of test pieces. 

OF1100 OFFICE MANAGEMENT I 

This course is designed to acquaint students with the 

significant role of the office employee in business, 

the importance of effective communication and 

the various communications methods used and to 

enhance desirable personality traits and attitudes. 

OF1101 OFFICE MANAGEMENT II 

This course examines filing systems and procedures 

used by office workers, manual and electronic 

methods of information storage and retrieval, types of 

microforms and the need for records retention. Proper 

procedures for handling mail, planning and organizing 

business travel, good customer service techniques, 

and researching information are also explored. 

OF1400 MANAGING AN OFFICE 


The purpose of this course is to expose students 

to the functional side of managing an office. This 

course will include the importance of effective 

communications, methods of information storage and 

retrieval, managing time and planning, and organizing 

business meetings, and setting up the physical layout 

of an office environment. 

OF2100 OFFICE MANAGEMENT III 

Prerequisites: OF1100, OF1101 

Co-requisite: DM1201 

This course is designed to prepare the student for 

the workplace. Focus is on topics such as personal 

development, planning meetings and conferences, 

and job search skills to refine the skills needed to 

become a successful, professional employee. 

OF2101 OFFICE MANAGEMENT IV 


Students will complete an office simulation that will 

require them to perform research, make decisions 

and apply time management skills.

229 


OF2270 BUSINESS SERVICES 


This is a course where students apply the skills, 

knowledge and attitudes learned throughout the 

Office Administration (Executive) program. The course 

is conducted in a real training office where students 

incorporate a variety of office software, tools and 

equipment to provide a professional business service 

to their clients. Throughout this course, students 

will continue to develop their technical skills as 

well as their employability skills such as working 

independently, teambuilding, customer service, work 

ethic, and accountability as would be expected in any 

business office. 

OF2600 DENTAL PRACTICE MANAGEMENT 

In this course the student will examine the key 

role dental administrators assume in managing 

the dental business office. The student will study 

the principles of reception area duties, third party 

insurance communication, inventory management 

and client management. Emphasis will be placed on 

understanding the importance of communication 

between doctor and client. The lab portion will 

introduce the student to the operation of a 

computerized dental office management system. 

OF2700 CAPSTONE PROJECT 


the opportunity to apply the principles and skills 

necessary to successfully enter the workplace as 

an administrative professional. This course will 

reinforce office management concepts, including 

professionalism and human relations, and will assist 

students as they prepare to make the transition to the 

workplace as an administrative assistant. 

OJ1100 WORK EXPOSURE 

Students gain an appreciation of the real work 

environment in a business or industry directly related 

to the area of training. This two-week period will be 

required in addition to academic content covered thus 

requiring students to attend Intersession. 

OJ1110 WORK EXPOSURE – OFFICE 

ADMINISTRATION (CERTIFICATE) 

Prerequisites: Successful completion of all courses in 

the Office Administration Certificate program with a 

minimum GPA of 2.0 

The work exposure is a required portion of the 

program and provides a unique learning experience 

in a real workplace setting. Work exposures must 

be program relevant and three weeks in duration. 

Students will complete three weeks in industry where 

they are expected to learn, develop and demonstrate 

the high standards of behaviour and performance 

expected in the work environment. Throughout the 

work exposure experience, students will apply the 

skills and knowledge learned in previous courses 

in the Office Administration Certificate program. 

They will become more employable as they enhance 

technical, team building, problem solving, and 

customer service skills; increase accountability; and 

strengthen positive attitudes and work ethic. 

OJ1520 WORK EXPOSURE 

Prerequisites: Successful completion of all level one 

courses with a minimum GPA of 2.0 

Students are expected to complete four weeks 

of work exposure for completion of the diploma 

requirements. 

OJ1550 WORK EXPOSURE - HRM 


Semesters 1 to 5 of the HRM diploma program with a 

minimum GPA of 2.0 

The learner will gain an appreciation of the real work 


to the area of training. This six-week period will be 

required in addition to academic content covered. 

Students will complete six weeks in industry where 



expected in the work environment. Throughout 

the work exposure experience, students will apply 

the skills and knowledge learned in all previous 

courses in the HRM diploma programs. They will also 

further develop employability skills such as working 

independently, team building, customer service, 

work ethic, attitude and accountability, thus further 

enhancing their personal growth. 

MX2500 – OJ1550

230 


OJ1560 WORK EXPOSURE - MARKETING 


Semesters 1 to 5 of the Marketing diploma program 

with a minimum GPA of 2.0 

The student will gain an appreciation of the real work 








work exposure experience, students will apply the 

skills and knowledge learned in all previous courses 

in the Marketing diploma programs. They will also 





OJ1580 WORK EXPOSURE – ACCOUNTING 


Semesters 1 to 5 of the Accounting diploma program 

with a minimum GPA of 2.0 

The student will gain an appreciation of the real work 








work exposure experience, the student will apply the 

skills and knowledge learned in all previous courses in 

the Accounting diploma programs. They will also apply 





OJ1900 WORK EXPOSURE – OFFICE 

ADMINISTRATION (EXECUTIVE) 

The work exposure is a required portion of the 

program and provides a unique learning experience 

in a real workplace setting. Work exposures must be 

program relevant and six weeks in duration. Students 

will complete six weeks in industry where they are 

expected to learn, develop, and demonstrate the high 

standards of behaviour and performance expected 

in the work environment. Throughout the work 

exposure experience, students will apply the skills and 

knowledge learned in previous courses in the Office 

Administration (Executive) diploma program. They 

will further enhance their personal growth by 

developing employability skills such as team building, 

customer service, work ethic, attitude, accountability, 

and the ability to work independently. 

PC1300 INTRODUCTION TO ALLIED HEALTH 

(ELECTIVE) 

This is an introductory credit course in the 

Pre-Health Sciences curriculum. The course is 

designed to provide students with strategies for 

successful performance in health science programs 

of study and to offer students a basic understanding 

of healthcare systems, including the various 

healthcare professionals who work within the system. 

PC1320 HEALTH AND WELLNESS 

This course is designed to teach paramedic students 

the basics of health and wellness development. Time 

will be spent on didactic lectures, in-class labs doing 

basic testing and other learning activities, and in the 

gym exercising. Students must pass a mandatory 

fitness test at the end of the course. 

PC1420 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TECHNICIAN – 

FIRST RESPONDER 

Co-requisite: PC1820 

This course introduces the student to the 

fundamentals of pre-hospital care. The students learn 

to use a standardized approach to the assessment of 

patients that will be employed throughout the rest of 

the program. Also, basic procedures and equipment 

are taught. 


BASIC I 

Prerequisites: PC1420, PC1820 

Co-requisites: PC1821, PC1470 

This course provides the paramedic student with an 

introduction to the theory and physical skills required 

to work in the field of emergency medical services 

(EMS). It also introduces patient assessment and 

other topics that will be covered in detail in later parts 

of the program. The course may include three to five 

field trips to various EMS-related organizations.

231 



BASIC II 



This course provides the paramedic student with an 

introduction to the theory and physical skills required 

to work in the field of emergency medical services 

(EMS). It also introduces patient assessment and 

other topics that will be covered in detail in later parts 

of the program. The course may include three to five 

field trips to various EMS-related organizations. 

PC1820 CLINICAL I 


This course is designed to provide a clinical 

introduction to students. Applied knowledge of 

anatomy and physiology, pathology, patient 

assessment and patient care will be reinforced. 

Emphasis will be placed on intensive field 

demonstrations and application of skills necessary 

for the student to become competent in performing 

medical care at the Emergency First Responder level. 

PC1821 CLINICAL II 



This course is designed to provide an introductory 

clinical experience to students at the EMT-Basic 

level. Applied knowledge of anatomy and physiology, 

pathology, patient assessment and patient care will be 

reinforced. Emphasis will be placed on intensive field 



medical care at the EMT-Basic level. 


INTERMEDIATE: PREPARATORY 

Prerequisite: PC2820 


At the completion of this course, the student will have 

the theoretical knowledge of patient preparation at 

the EMT-Intermediate level and be able to apply the 

required skills in a simulated lab environment. 


INTERMEDIATE: TRAUMA 

Prerequisite: PC2820 


At the completion of this course, the student will 

have the theoretical knowledge of airway, patient 

assessment and trauma management at the 

EMT-Intermediate level and be able to apply the 

required skills in a simulated lab environment. 


INTERMEDIATE: CARDIAC 

Prerequisites: PC2110, PC2120, PC2821 

Co-requisites: PC3820, PC2140, PC2150 


have the theoretical knowledge of cardiovascular 

patient management at the EMT-Intermediate level 

and be able to apply the required skills in a simulated 

lab environment. 


INTERMEDIATE: MEDICAL 




the theoretical knowledge of medical-type patient 

management at the EMT-Intermediate level and be 

able to apply the required skills in a simulated lab 

environment. 


INTERMEDIATE: SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS 




the theoretical knowledge of medical and special 

consideration-type patient management at the EMT- 

Intermediate level and be able to apply the required 

skills in a simulated lab environment. 

PC2820 CLINICAL III 


This course is designed to provide extensive 

clinical experience to students. Applied knowledge 

of anatomy and physiology, pathology, patient 

assessment and patient care will be reinforced. 

Emphasis will be placed on intensive field 



medical care at the EMT-Basic level. Students may 

demonstrate skill sets in an ambulance setting, 

hospital setting or simulated environment. Students 

will perform the required objectives a minimum of 

two times. 

PC2821 CLINICAL lV 



demonstrate the theoretical and practical knowledge 

necessary to manage all patient types at the 

EMT-Intermediate level in a clinical environment with 

patients or in a high-fidelity simulated lab as required. 

OJ1560 – PC2821

232 


PC3820 CLINICAL V 


Co-requisites: PC2130 


have the practical knowledge of medical and 

special consideration patient management at the 

EMT-Intermediate level and will be able to apply the 

required skills in a clinical environment with patients 

or in a high-fidelity simulated lab as required. 

PC3821 CLINICAL Vl 

Prerequisites: PC2820 

Co-requisites: PC2110 


the practical knowledge of airway, venous access, 

medication administration, patient assessment and 

trauma management at the EMT-Intermediate level . 

The student will be able to apply the required skills 

in a clinical environment with patients or in a highfidelity 

simulated lab as required. 

PE2230 HAZARDOUS AREA TRAINING 


understanding of the hazardous area classification 

and how systems are designed to confine an 

explosion inside an enclosure, isolate the ignition 

source or limit the energy flow into the hazardous 

area. Combined with this knowledge base, the 

students will receive hands-on training so they can 

install and maintain equipment for hazardous areas. 

This course is not designed to provide Hazardous 

Area Certification. 

PE2300 HV EQUIPMENT TESTING AND 

MAINTENANCE 

Prerequisites: MP2220, MP2250 

This course introduces the test methodologies 

commonly applied to medium and high voltage 

transformers, switchgear, cables and generators. 

The safety of personnel and the importance of 

maintenance management are continually stressed. 

PE2460 PLANT ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 


This course introduces the student to the plant 

electrical systems needed to support a modern 

production process, one that focuses on distributing, 

converting and controlling electrical energy in 

an effort to improve product quality and reduce 

operating costs. Topics include energy sources, 

power distribution in an industrial plant, energy 

conversion using motors, motor protection and 

control requirements, and digital controllers used for 

energy management (demand controller) and motor 

control (PLC). 

PE2500 ELECTRICAL PRACTICE 

Prerequisites: CI1310, ET1101 

This course covers the care and use of hand tools, 

safety, types of electrical protection, installation 

of motor starters and relays, drawing electrical 

schematics, troubleshooting motor control circuits, 

and installation of circuits using sections of the 

Canadian Standards Association (CSA) electrical code. 

PE2510 ELECTRICAL PRACTICES 

Prerequisites: ET1131, CI1310, MP1200 

This course covers the care and use of hand tools, 

safety, types of electrical protection, installation 

of motor starters and relays, drawing electrical 

schematics, troubleshooting motor control 

circuits, and installation of circuits using the local 

electrical code. 

PE2511 ELECTRICAL PRACTICES II 


This is an intermediate-level course that covers the 

testing and dismantling of DC and AC motors, as 

well as an introduction to electrical installations in 

hazardous locations. 

PE2720 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION 

PRACTICES 

This course is designed to provide the instrumentation 

technologist with the knowledge and skills 

necessary to implement safe systems in an industrial 

environment. Emphasis will be on safe working 

practices and equipment installations in hazardous 

locations, instrument wiring and grounding 

considerations, tube and fitting installations, safety 

systems, and instrument air supply considerations. 



This course covers the installation of heating and 

lighting controls, electrical drawings, and commercial 

and industrial demand load calculations. 

PE3101 ELECTRICAL PRACTICES (FACILITY 

DESIGN) 


This is an advanced course intended to introduce 

students to the broad field of electrical facility design. 

Major topics include electrical distribution design, 

exterior lighting and controls, lamp technology, 

interior lighting and controls, electrical heating and 

controls, and electrical distribution design. This 

course is followed by a project course (PE4100) to 

reinforce theoretical concepts and enable students to 

apply those concepts in the design process.

233 


PE3120 FACILITIES ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS I 


This course focuses on low voltage (240V/415V) 

power systems primarily in residential and commercial 

facilities. Students will have the opportunity to 

study both the theoretical and practical aspects 

involved with the wiring methods, and protection and 

grounding of feeders and branch circuits. 

PE3121 FACILITIES ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS II 


This course focuses on low voltage (240V/415V) 

power systems primarily in large commercial and 

industrial facilities. Students will have the opportunity 

to study both the theoretical and practical aspects 

involved with the wiring methods, protection and 

grounding of feeders, and branch circuits for a wide 

range of loads. 



This course is a continuation of PE3101. It is designed 

for advanced electrical engineering technology 

students to provide them with the necessary 

information for completing electrical system design. 

The project started in the first term is continued and 

to be completed as a part of this course. 

PF1180 PIPING FABRICATION AND RIGGING 


This introductory course is designed to provide 

the student with practical skills in the fabrication 

of piping transition elements. The student will 

use hand and power tools to cut metal and nonmetallic 

piping and then prepare it for fabrication. 

Installation and movement of loads using manual 

and power equipment will be covered, with emphasis 

on performance in a safe industrial environment. 

Aspects for a safe working environment through the 

recognition of equipment defects and environmental 

problems and their remediation will be an integral part 

of the course. 

PH1021 PHYSICS 

Prerequisites: MA1025, FL1080 or equivalent 

This is a preparatory, non-credit physics course 

designed to introduce the students to basic physics 

principles, concepts and applications. The course will 

focus on the fundamental skills necessary for further 

study of physics. The course will familiarize students 

with physics terminology and vocabulary, improve 

students’ applied mathematics skills (trigonometry, 

geometry, algebra and graphing), and introduce 

students to experimentation, data gathering and 

handling, and problem solving. 


This is an introductory physics course designed to 

extend students’ knowledge and understanding of 

basic physics principles, concepts and applications 

relating to mechanics. This course also extends 

abilities in data handling, problem solving and 

experimentation. 


Prerequisites: MA1700, PH1100 

This is a second semester course designed to extend 

the student’s knowledge and understanding of basic 

physics principles, concepts and applications relating 

to kinetic theory, heat, vibrations, sound and light. 

It also extends abilities in data handling, problem 

solving and experimentation. 

PH1140 APPLIED PHYSICS 


This course introduces students to the physical 

science concepts applicable to the fields of electrical 

and instrumentation technology. 


Prerequisites: PH1100 or PH1120 

This is a second-semester algebra-based course 

designed to extend the students’ knowledge of the 

basic concepts and principles of physics, specifically 

in the areas of heat, static fluids, waves, sound, light 

and electricity. 



This is an intersession course designed to extend the 

student’s knowledge and understanding of physics 

principles, concepts and applications relating to 

electricity and magnetism. 

PH2200 RADIATION PHYSICS 


This is a radiation physics course designed for 

medical radiography students. It will give them 

an understanding of x-ray physics, the nature of 

x-rays; the production of x-rays; and the interaction 

of x-rays with matter; and radiation dosimetry, 

radiation exposure, absorbed dose, dose equivalent, 

effective dose equivalent, detection of radiation and 

dosimeters. 

PC3820 – PH2200

234 


PM2160 PREVENTIVE AND PREDICTIVE 

MAINTENANCE I 

Co-requisite: MW1710 

This is an introductory course emphasizing 

application of preventive and predictive maintenance 

(PPM) techniques to industrial equipment and 

systems. Students will learn about and practice 

work order generation, maintenance and record 

keeping, and methods of performing preventive and 

predictive maintenance tasks. Students will utilize a 

computerized maintenance management program 

as an aid to managing work tasks. This course offers 

practical experience in the preventive maintenance 

of a variety of mechanical devices. 

PM2161 PREVENTIVE AND PREDICTIVE 

MAINTENANCE II 

Prerequisite: PM2160 

This is an advanced course in the development 

of preventive and predictive maintenance (PPM) 

programs for industrial equipment and systems. This 

course applies the reliability-centered maintenance 

(RCM) approach in developing a comprehensive 

maintenance program. Students will have opportunity 

to design and prepare a comprehensive PPM in 

application of the principles taught. 

PM2560 FACILITIES ENGINEERING I 

Prerequisites: MA1101, PH1101, CI1660 

This course presents the basic concepts, design 

and techniques necessary to operate oil and gas 

processing equipment. The course has a project 

component where coursework is related to the 

development of an oil and gas field. 

PM2561 FACILITIES ENGINEERING II 

Prerequisite: PM2560 

This course presents the basic concepts and 

techniques necessary to operate gas handling 

systems and facilities. The course has a project 

component where coursework is related to the 

operation of a process plant. 

PO1100 PROCESS EQUIPMENT 

This course is designed to assist students in becoming 

familiar with the principles of design, operation and 

maintenance of industrial high pressure boilers such 

as those found industrial plants and chemical process 

plants. 

PO2100 PROCESS SYSTEMS OPERATIONS AND 

MAINTENANCE 

Prerequisites: CI1660, PO1100 


to operate and maintain process systems. The course 

has a project component where coursework is related 

to the operation of a process plant. 

PO2200 PROCESS TROUBLESHOOTING 

Prerequisite: PO2100 

This course will provide students with troubleshooting 

skills required to identify problems and take the 

necessary actions to operate the plant. 

PO2400 PROCESS UNIT DESIGN 

Prerequisites: PM2561, PO2100 

Co-requisites: EC1700, PM2511 

This course presents the concepts and techniques 

necessary to design the major equipment common 

to most chemical industries. Emphasis will be on 

preliminary sizing of equipment and operation of 

chemical processes found within the oil and gas 

processing industry. 

PO2480 PROCESS SIMULATION 

Prerequisite: PO2400 

Co-requisite: PR3721 

This is a course designed to develop students’ cold 

start-up, normal operation, handling of upsets and 

emergency shutdown capability in a number of 

processes that are common in local industry. The 

students will also be required to utilize simulation 

software to assist in analyzing process dynamics. 

PO2500 LIQUID NATURAL GAS (LNG) / GAS TO 

LIQUID (GTL) 

Prerequisites: PM2560, CI2560 

This is a course to help students to fully understand 

the liquefied natural gas and gas to liquids processes. 

PO2560 DESALINATION PROCESS 

Prerequisites: PM2561, PM2511 

This is a course to help students to fully understand 

the desalination processes used in large-scale 

industrial settings. 

PR2155 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 


This course is designed to give the students a general 

understanding of project management and the various 

stages of a project. The main topics will be discussed 

at an informational level. Topics discussed include, 

but are not limited to, defining a project, project 

scope, time management, cost management, quality 

management, human resource management and 

communications management.

235 



The purpose of this course is to learn various 

techniques used to ensure that a project is completed 

on time, within budget, and with high quality. The 

student will explore various aspects of project 

management, such as scope, time, cost, quality and 

communications, and will use project management 

software to manage a project. 

PR2500 TECHNOLOGICAL THESIS 

Prerequisites: All courses in previous academic 

semesters 

The technological thesis enables the student 

completing a diploma program to demonstrate 

the application of knowledge and skills developed 

throughout the program. Students taking this 

course will work independently on a project, under 

the supervision of a faculty supervisor. They will 

carry out an in-depth study of a problem, design or 

technological application, and fully document and 

present their findings. 


Prerequisite: PR2500 




throughout the program. Students taking this 

course will work independently on a project, under 

the supervision of a faculty supervisor. They will 

carry out an in-depth study of a problem, design or 

technological application, and fully document and 

present their findings. 


The purpose of this course is to learn various 

techniques used to ensure that a project is completed 

on time, within budget and with high quality. This is 

achieved with practice of a variety of techniques to 

manage the budget, schedule and quality of projects 

for which the student is responsible. 

PR3150 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND FINANCIAL 

ANALYSIS 


This course introduces students to the topics of 

project management and financial analysis, by the 

introduction of the concepts, tools and techniques 

of formal project management and financial 

analysis. Topics include project management, risk 

management, project scheduling, concepts of 

financial management, economic decision making, 

analysis of alternatives and depreciation. Students 

are introduced to the use of project management 

software. 

PR3210 TECHNICAL THESIS I (CHEMICAL 

PROCESSING) 


semesters and a minimum cumulative GPA of 2.0 

The technical thesis enables the student completing 

a Diploma in the Chemical Processing Technology 

program to demonstrate the application of skills 

and knowledge developed throughout the program. 

Students taking this course will work with minimal 

supervision on a project, under the guidance of a 

faculty member. The student can work independently 

or in teams of two to carry out an in-depth study of 

a problem, design a technological application, and 

fully document and present their findings. At the 

end of this course, the student will have completed 

a proposal of their technical thesis that will be 

completed in the following academic semester of 

their program. Students should commence planning 

for the course at the beginning of the final year 

of studies. Since the project and report are to be 

prepared through independent study, the assigned 

hours represent only part of the time that students 

are expected to allocate to the course. Regular 

meetings with a faculty supervisor will be scheduled 

within the assigned hours as well as scheduled 

workshops at the Advanced Writing Centre. It is 

mandatory that students attend these faculty 

meetings and workshops. This course will be 

co-delivered to the students by a technical instructor 

and a communications instructor. 

PR3211 TECHNICAL THESIS II (CHEMICAL 

PROCESSING) 

Prerequisites: PR3210 








or in teams of two to carry out an in-depth study of a 

problem, design a technological application, and fully 

document and present their findings. Students should 

commence planning for the course at the beginning 

of the final year of studies. Since the project and 

report are to be prepared through independent 

study, the assigned hours represent only part of the 

time that students are expected to allocate to the 

course. Regular meetings with a faculty supervisor 

will be scheduled within the assigned hours and it 

is mandatory that students attend these meetings. 

This course will be co-delivered to the students by a 

technical instructor and a communications instructor. 

PM2160 – PR3211

236 


PR3214 CAPSTONE PROJECT I (CHEMICAL 

PROCESSING) 



The capstone project enables the student completing 











a proposal of their capstone project that will be 

completed in the following academic semester of their 

program. Students should commence planning for the 

course at the beginning of the final year of studies. 

Since the project and report are to be prepared 

through independent study, the assigned hours 

represent only part of the time that students are 

expected to allocate to the course. Regular meetings 

with a faculty supervisor will be scheduled within 

the assigned hours as well as scheduled workshops 

at the Advanced Writing Centre. It is mandatory 

that students attend these faculty meetings and 

workshops. This course will be co-delivered 

to the students by a technical instructor and a 

communications instructor. 

PR3215 CAPSTONE PROJECT II (CHEMICAL 

PROCESSING) 





















technical instructor and a communications instructor. 

PR3220 TECHNICAL THESIS I (ELECTRICAL) 




a Diploma in the Electrical Engineering Technology 










a proposal of their technical thesis that will be 

completed in the following academic semester of their 

program. Students should commence planning for the 







the assigned hours as well as scheduled workshops 

at the Advanced Writing Centre. It is mandatory 

that students attend these faculty meetings and 

workshops. This course will be co-delivered 



PR3221 TECHNICAL THESIS II (ELECTRICAL) 



a Diploma in the Electrical Engineering Technology 


















technical instructor and a communications instructor.

237 


PR3230 TECHNICAL THESIS I (PROCESS 

AUTOMATION) 




a Diploma in the Process Automation Engineering 

Technology program to demonstrate the application 

of skills and knowledge developed throughout the 

program. Students taking this course will work 

with minimal supervision on a project, under the 

guidance of a faculty member. The student can work 

independently or in teams of two to carry out an 

in-depth study of a problem, design a technological 

application, and fully document and present their 

findings. At the end of this course, the student will 

have completed a proposal of their technical thesis 

that will be completed in the following academic 

semester of their program. Students should 







will be scheduled within the assigned hours as well 

as scheduled workshops at the Advanced Writing 

Centre. It is mandatory that students attend these 

faculty meetings and workshops. This course will be 



PR3231 TECHNICAL THESIS II (PROCESS 

AUTOMATION) 



a Diploma in the Process Automation Engineering 









findings. Students should commence planning for the 






with a faculty supervisor will be scheduled within the 

assigned hours and it is mandatory that students 

attend these meetings. This course will be co-delivered 



PR3240 TECHNICAL THESIS I (MECHANICAL) 

Prerequisite: All courses in previous academic 



a Diploma in the Mechanical Engineering Technology 

(Industrial Maintenance) program to demonstrate 

the application of skills and knowledge developed 

throughout the program. Students taking this course 

will work with minimal supervision on a project, under 

the guidance of a faculty member. The student can 

work independently or in teams of two to carry out an 



















PR3241 TECHNICAL THESIS II (MECHANICAL) 



















the assigned hours and it is mandatory that students 




PR3214 – PR3241

238 


PR3244 CAPSTONE PROJECT I (MECHANICAL) 











in-depth study of a problem, design or technological 



have completed a proposal of their capstone project 









will be scheduled within the assigned hours as well as 

scheduled workshops at the Advanced Writing Center. 

It is mandatory that students attend these faculty 




PR3245 CAPSTONE PROJECT II (MECHANICAL) 



















the assigned hours and it is mandatory that students 




PR3250 TECHNICAL THESIS I 

(TELECOMMUNICATIONS) 




a Diploma in the Telecommunications Engineering 

























PR3251 TECHNICAL THESIS II 




















assigned hours and it is mandatory that students 

attend these meetings. This course will be codelivered 

to the students by a technical instructor and 

a communications instructor.

239 


PR3260 CAPSTONE PROJECT I 


Prerequisite: All courses in previous academic 





of skill s and knowledge developed throughout the 























PR3244 CAPSTONE PROJECT I (MECHANICAL) 























will be scheduled within the assigned hours as well as 

scheduled workshops at the Advanced Writing Center. 

It is mandatory that students attend these faculty 




PR3261 CAPSTONE PROJECT II 




















assigned hours, and it is mandatory that students 

attend these meetings. This course will be 



PR3244 – PR3261

240 


PR3520 WEB DEVELOPER CAPSTONE 

Prerequisites: Successful completion of all Semester 

8 courses and instructor approval of a proposed 

capstone project 

The Web Developer Capstone course provides 

students with an opportunity to utilize and 

demonstrate the tools, understanding and knowledge 

developed during the program. The course 

encourages individual and team work in small groups 

on a substantial project. The intent of the course is 

to provide, where possible, a real-world sponsor-led 

capstone experience that integrates the concepts 

learned in the program. The project involves web 

design, client-side and server-side applications, 

database server installation and configuration, 

demonstration of digital imaging, streaming media, 

multimedia concepts, and other areas of study. The 

course will also include discussion about professional 

and ethical issues related to information technology. 

PR3530 NETWORK AND SYSTEMS 

ADMINISTRATION CAPSTONE 

Prerequisites: Successful competition of all courses 

in Semesters 1 through 8 and instructor approval of a 

proposed capstone project 

The capstone project course enables students to 

demonstrate the application of knowledge and skills 

developed throughout their program of studies. 

Students taking this course will work under the 

supervision of a faculty supervisor. 


Prerequisites: CM1400, CM1401 

The course is designed to provide a good 

understanding of a model for definition, analysis 

and solution of technical problems and to develop 

the student’s ability to apply diverse methods and 

strategies in project analysis, prepare and deliver 

effective oral technical presentations, and define and 

plan a major applied research project. 

PR3611 TECHNICAL THESIS II 

Prerequisites: PR3610, CM1400, CM1401 

A technical thesis enables the student completing 

a diploma program to demonstrate the application 

of knowledge and skills developed throughout the 


independently or with a small group, on a project 

already approved, under the supervision of a faculty 

supervisor. During this term, the student will carry 

out their proposed plan, then write and submit a final 

technical report, and then orally present and defend 

their work. Evaluation is based on ability to manage 

the project, on performance during the term, on the 

final report and on the presentation and defense. 







will work independently on a project, under the 

supervision of a faculty supervisor. They will carry out 

an in-depth study of a problem, design a technological 

application and fully document and then orally present 

their findings. Projects must address the social, 

economic, financial, environmental, legal and ethical 

considerations where relevant. 




understanding of a model for definition, analysis 

and solution of technical problems, and to develop 


strategies in project analysis, to prepare and deliver 

effective oral technical presentations, and to define 

and plan a major applied research project. 

PR3721 TECHNOLOGICAL THESIS II 






will work independently, or with a small group, 

on a project under the supervision of a faculty 

supervisor. They will carry out an in-depth study of 

a problem, design or technological application, and 

fully document and then orally present their findings. 

Projects must address the social, economic, financial, 

environmental, legal and ethical considerations where 

relevant. 




understanding of a model for definition, analysis, 

and solution of technical problems, and to develop 


strategies in project analysis, prepare and deliver 

effective oral technical presentations, and define and 

plan a major applied research project.

241 


PR3831 TECHNOLOGICAL THESIS II 

Prerequisites: CM1401, PR3830 





will work independently, or with a small group, 

on a project under the supervision of a faculty 

supervisor. They will carry out an in-depth study of 

a problem, design or technological application, and 

fully document and then orally present their findings. 

Projects must address the social, economic, financial, 

environmental, legal and ethical considerations 

where relevant. 

PS1100 PSYCHOLOGY I 

This is an introductory psychology course. Current 

experimentation and the various methods of 

psychological research are emphasized throughout 

the course. The topics to be covered include 

psychology as a science, learning, perception, 

sensation, personality and human development. 

PS1420 HEALTH CARE ORGANIZATION 

AND STRUCTURE 

This course is an introduction to the study of 

organizational behaviour and structure within 

the health care system. Students will familiarize 

themselves with their health care system, specifically 

the roles that directly impact structure and function. 

Students will examine individual and inter-disciplinary 

relationships and roles of health professions within 

the hospital organizational structure. 

PS2340 ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 

This course is an introduction to the study and 

practical application of organizational behaviour. 

It concerns itself with the behaviour of people 

within organizations to achieve both personal and 

organizational goals. 

RT1610 RESPIRATORY THERAPY CLINICAL 

ORIENTATION 

Prerequisite: Successful completion of second year of 

the Respiratory Therapy program 

This course is a clinical review of respiratory therapy 

procedures, equipment, hospital policies and clinical 

skills prior to entering the RT III clinical year (Clinical 

Practicums I and II and Clinical Elective). This course 

is a mandatory requirement prior to entering the RT III 

clinical year. 

RT2200 GAS SUPPLY AND CONTROL 

Prerequisite: Successful completion of third semester 

This course is a study of the administration of 

medical gas therapies with the primary emphasis 

on the principles of operation of the various types 

of equipment utilized in the delivery of respiratory 

therapy. 

RT2220 MECHANICAL VENTILATION 

Prerequisite: Successful completion of fourth semester 

This course focuses on the physiological implications 

of instituting, maintaining and discontinuing 

mechanical ventilatory support. Emphasis is placed 

on patient monitoring and evaluation of mechanical 

ventilatory techniques. 

RT2230 MECHANICAL VENTILATORS 

Prerequisite: Successful completion of fourth semester 

This course is a detailed technical analysis of 

mechanical ventilators. Major topics include systems 

of classification, functional analysis, the internal and 

external circuit, ventilator modes and controls, and 

quality control. Specific mechanical ventilators are 

analyzed in detail. 

RT2300 PHARMACOLOGY 


This is an introductory course in pharmacology as 

applied to respiratory therapy. General principles 

relating to drug administration are studied. Emphasis 

is placed on drugs affecting the cardiovascular, 

respiratory and central nervous systems. 

RT2310 ANESTHESIA 

Prerequisites: Successful completion of fourth semester 

This is an introductory course in the principles and 

practices of anesthesia pertinent to the respiratory 

therapist. Major course topics include anesthesia 

machines, vaporizers, breathing circuits, anesthetic 

ventilators, preoperative procedures, monitoring an 

anesthetized patient and complications of anesthesia. 

RT2440 NEONATAL/PEDIATRIC 

RESPIRATORY CARE 


Co-requisite: RT2220 

This course introduces students to the impact 

of anatomical and physiological differences 

between infants, children and adults on the clinical 

management of these patients. Major areas of study 

are gestational lung development, fetal-neonatal 

transition, newborn assessment, thermoregulation, 

and neonatal and pediatric cardiopulmonary 

pathophysiology. 

PR3520 – RT2440

242 


RT2450 RESPIRATORY THERAPY PROCEDURES 


This course introduces students to the theory and 

application of clinical assessment and management 

skills requisite to the practice of respiratory therapy. 


RESPIRATORY CARE I 


Co-requisites: RT2220 

This course introduces the student to the anatomical 

and physiological differences of the neonate and the 

clinical management of these patients. Major areas of 

study are gestational lung development, fetal-neonatal 

transition, newborn assessment, thermoregulation, 

neonatal cardiopulmonary pathophysiology and 

neonatal ventilation. 


RESPIRATORY CARE ll 

This course introduces the student the clinical 

management of the pediatric patient. Major 

areas of study are neonatal resuscitation (NRP), 

pediatric advanced life support (PALS), pediatric 

cardiopulmonary pathophysiology, pediatric 

mechanical ventilation, and high frequency ventilation. 

Formal certification for NRP and PALS is not granted 

at the end of this course. 

RT2500 CARDIOPULMONARY DIAGNOSTICS 


This is a detailed course in the principles of 

pulmonary function testing and the significance of the 

various test data to the respiratory therapist. Basic 

electrocardiography with respect to recognition of 

standard arrhythmias from 3-lead ECG strips, clinical 

significance and basic treatment of arrhythmias is 

also studied. 

RT3401 COMPREHENSIVE RESPIRATORY CARE 


This course is designed to assist the student with the 

integration of knowledge obtained in the previous 

semesters necessary for respiratory therapy. Through 

problem-based learning and critical thinking skills the 

student will focus on the therapeutic management of 

various categories of patients, including the principles 

of trauma life support and venipuncture. 

RT3450 CLINICAL SKILLS III 


Co-requisites: All sixth semester courses 

This course is a continuation of Clinical Skills I and 

Clinical Skills II. As with the previous clinical courses, 

students will have the opportunity to demonstrate 

respiratory therapy procedures under direct 

supervision. Students will be expected to expand 

their knowledge and comprehension of respiratory 

therapy procedures in keeping with didactic theory 

and laboratory skills previously taught. Along with new 

clinical performance skills, students will be expected 

to demonstrate and refine clinical performance skills 

evaluated in Clinical Skills I and Clinical Skills II. 

Students may be given the opportunity to observe 

and/or participate in higher order skills as available in 

the clinical setting. Students will rotate through adult 

and pediatric clinical placements. 

RT3510 CLINICAL PRACTICUM I 

Prerequisites: Successful completion of the second 

year of studies of the Respiratory Therapy program and 

mandatory completion of RT1610 

This clinical practicum is designed to provide the third 

year respiratory student the opportunity to rotate 

through various healthcare sites/areas including 

emergency rooms, intensive care units, anesthesia 

rooms, cardiopulmonary laboratories, and other 

locations. By rotating through various adult, pediatric 

and neonatal clinical areas, the student will acquire 

the necessary competencies and clinical proficiencies 

in respiratory care to successfully complete this 

practicum. 

RT3520 CLINICAL PRACTICUM II 

Prerequisites: RT3510 

This clinical practicum is a continuation of RT3510. 

As with the previous clinical course, students will 

have the opportunity to rotate through various 

healthcare sites further acquiring and refining clinical 

skills in many different areas of adult, pediatric, and 

neonatal respiratory care. Because this course is the 

second clinical course for the third year respiratory 

therapy student, students are expected to refine 

the competencies and increase the proficiencies 

developed in the various clinical areas introduced in 

RT3510.

243 


RT3530 CLINICAL PRACTICUM ELECTIVE 

Prerequisites: RT1610, RT3510, RT3520 

After successful completion of Clinical Practicums I 

and II, students will have an additional seven weeks 

of training to gain clinical experience in respiratory 

care. Students will have the opportunity to return to a 

specific clinical area for further review or be assigned 

to a clinical area by clinical faculty. Students will be 

afforded the opportunity to complete a home care/ 

community component as well as have the option 

of carrying out a portion of this clinical placement 

at a rural hospital site. Overall, this elective will give 

students additional clinical/didactic review prior to 

writing the national certification exam. 

RX1100 PHARMACY REGULATIONS AND 

PROFESSIONALISM 

The student will develop a working knowledge of the 

various pharmacy regulations related to pharmacy 

technician practice. The role of the pharmacy 

technician and workplace professionalism will 

be illustrated. 

RX1140 PHARMACY MANAGEMENT AND 

INVENTORY CONTROL 

Part of the role of the pharmacist technician is 

inventory management of medications, equipment 

and devices. The student will develop a working 

knowledge of various pharmacy management 

techniques, pharmacy operations, financial and 

operational importance of purchasing and inventory 

control, as well as the risks involved with medication 

errors. 

RX1210 PHARMACEUTICAL CALCULATIONS 


The student will develop a working knowledge of the 

various systems of metric and imperial weights as 

well as measurements encountered in pharmacy. An 

overview of the apothecary system will be included for 

historical purposes. The student will become familiar 

with strength designations and will perform various 

dosage, compounding and conversion calculations. 

The student will be able to perform calculations 

required for various prescription types. Accuracy is 

stressed throughout. 

RX1250 PHARMACEUTICAL COMPUTER SYSTEMS 

Prerequisite: MC1830 

The student will become famMiliar with the 

fundamentals of both community and hospital 

pharmacy computer systems. The student will 

practice, under supervision, data entry, retrieval of 

information, and generation of computer labels using 

actual pharmacy computer systems. The student will 

develop skills in accurate and efficient data entry, 

retrieval, and generation of computer labels. 

RX2100 PRESCRIPTION PROCESSING I 

Prerequisites: RX1200, RX1250 

This course will introduce the student to the 

prescription process. Basic concepts in the 

dispensing process will be covered. These concepts 

will occur in the lab while simulating real-life 

situations. 

RX2101 PRESCRIPTION PROCESSING II 


This course is a continuation of concepts and 

techniques from Prescription Processing I. The 

student will need to be able to process prescriptions 

in a prescribed time frame to 95% accuracy. The 

student will also be introduced to compounding 

pharmaceutical items. Simulation of the doctor/ 

patient/pharmacist/pharmacy technician roles will 

be necessary for this course. 

RX2120 PHARMACY FUNDAMENTALS 

Prerequisite: BL1210, CH1210 

This is an introductory course to pharmacy practice. 

Basic concepts in pharmacy practice will be covered. 

RX2121 PHARMACY FUNDAMENTALS 

APPLICATION 

Prerequisite: RX2120 

This is a continuation of Pharmacy Practice I. The 

student will increase their level of proficiency in 

the monitoring of inventory control and medical 

terminology. As well, medication administration 

devices and auxiliary drug labels will be discussed. 

The pharmacy technician code of ethics will be 

examined and students will be required to devise 

statements based on various case studies. Students 

will require a minimum of 60% to pass this course. 

RX2150 PHARMACOLOGY I 

Prerequisites: BL1210, CH1210 

In this first of a two-part course, the student will 

be introduced to the subject of pharmacology – 

the study of drug-altered function. Students will 

be learning basic pharmacokinetics and various 

drug types such as the central nervous system, 

endocrine, chemotherapeutic, gastrointestinal, 

and anti-inflammatory drugs. Focus will be placed 

on the therapeutic use of these drugs and their 

adverse effects. 

RT2450 – RX2150

244 


RX2160 PHARMACOLOGY I 

In this first of a two-part course, the student will be 

introduced to the principles of pharmacology – the 

study of drug-altered function. Focus will be placed 

on drug classes, mechanics of action, disease 

types, and body systems. The goal is to provide 

pharmacy technicians with sufficient background 

information so that they will be able to play a key 

role in avoiding dispensing errors. Students will learn 

basic pharmacokinetics and various drug types, such 

as central nervous system, endocrine, antibiotics, 

gastrointestinal, muscle and joint disease, and 

pain drugs. 

RX2161 PHARMACOLOGY II 


This is the second course in pharmacology where 

the student will build on the knowledge gained in 

Pharmacology I by discussing additional drugs in a 

variety of drug classifications, major therapeutic uses, 

and their generic and trade names. 

RX2200 COMMUNITY PHARMACY 

Prerequisites RX1100 

Co-requisites: RX2100, RX2120 

This course introduces the student to aspects 

of community pharmacy. The student will focus 

on merchandising in the community pharmacy 

setting. As well, they will examine non-prescription 

medications and patient compliance aid. The nature 

of the pharmacy technician’s role in the healthcare 

system also requires them to work with topic areas 

such as healthy living, first aid, and CPR. Simulation 

of the patient, pharmacist, and pharmacy technician 

roles will be a necessary requirement for this course. 

RX2230 HOSPITAL PHARMACY 


This course introduces the student to the practice of 

hospital pharmacy and to the hospital’s organization. 

The course will focus the student into the operations 

of the hospital pharmacy in terms of medication 

distributions and policies and procedures. 

RX2300 ASEPTIC TECHNIQUE 


The student will learn to compound sterile products 

according to the appropriate technique. They will 

be introduced to the concepts of sterility and 

incompatibilities. They will use applicable quality 

assurance processes and will perform their work in 

accordance with the laws, regulations, and standards 

that govern the preparation of sterile products. 

Preparation of sterile products may include infusion 

pump cassettes, intravenous admixtures, total 

parenteral nutrition, eye preparations, and irrigation 

solutions. 

SD1170 TECHNOLOGY AWARENESS I 

This course (with Technology Awareness II) is 

designed to raise career awareness levels for 

engineering technology students by providing 

information regarding the engineering technology 

profession. This course will prepare students for the 

workplace by illustrating how the skills and practices 

of successful students parallel the skills and practices 

of successful professionals. 

SD1171 TECHNOLOGY AWARENESS II 

Prerequisite: SD1170 

This course (with Technology Awareness I) is designed 

to raise career awareness levels for engineering 

technology students by providing information 

regarding the engineering technology profession. This 

course will prepare students for the workplace by 

illustrating how the skills and practices of successful 

students parallel the skills and practices of successful 

professionals. 

SD1330 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS OF DENTAL 

ASSISTING 

This course enables the student to understand the 

ethical and legal expectations of the profession and 

workplace. Students will consider their role in their 

professional team and will develop an understanding 

of the standards of conduct and their obligation in the 

interaction with other professionals and clients. 

SD1340 STUDENT, CAREER AND PORTFOLIO 

DEVELOPMENT I 

This course is an introduction to the concepts of 

student development, career and education plans, 

and the development of a student portfolio. The 

student will explore business industry overview, self 

and career assessment, planning a career portfolio, 

service learning, and time management. This course 

is the first in a series of four courses and begins the 

development of a career portfolio that the student will 

continue to work with and maintain throughout their 

program of study. 


DEVELOPMENT II 

Prerequisites: SD1340 

This course is a continuation of the concepts of 

student development, career and education plans, 

and the development of a student portfolio. The 

student will continue their self and career assessment 

and planning a career portfolio, and will also explore 

ethics in the workplace, and interpersonal skills such 

as trust, conflict management and resolution, stress 

management, and teamwork. This course is the 

second in a series of four courses designed to develop 

a career portfolio that the student will continue to 

work with throughout their program of study.

245 


SD1420 WORKPLACE SKILLS 

This course develops sound customer service skills 

in the student and assists the student in preparing 

for job search and the office environment. Practical 

exercises, cases, and behavioural modelling are 

conducted to assist the student’s skill development 

and knowledge of customer service and expected 

work ethic, attitude, and skills. 

SD1570 EFFECTIVE LEARNING 

This course is designed to help Comprehensive Arts 

and Science students develop the skills, strategies 

and tools needed to ensure their success at the 

College. Students who successfully complete the 

course will have a better understanding of themselves 

as learners and of strategies for improving their 

learning potential. They will also have a greater 

appreciation of the need to define their educational 

and career goals clearly and to develop the habits 

and skills which will enable them to achieve those 

goals. The course will also provide an opportunity for 

students to become aware of the full range of campus 

resources available to support their learning and to 

learn how to use those resources effectively. Students 

will compile a portfolio during this course which 

should prove to be of value to them throughout their 

college life. 

SD1610 CLINICAL ORIENTATION 


Co-requisites: All fourth semester courses 

The Clinical Skills I course is designed to introduce 

the respiratory therapy student to the hospital setting. 

Under direct supervision of the clinical instructor, 

students will demonstrate respiratory therapy 

procedures introduced in the laboratory setting. This 

clinical course is designed to enhance the knowledge 

and skills concurrently being taught in the didactic 

and laboratory components of the fourth semester. 

Students may be given the opportunity to observe 


the clinical setting. 


Prerequisites: Successful completion of fourth 

semester • Co-requisites: All fifth semester courses 

This course is a continuation of Clinical Skills I. 

Students will have the opportunity to demonstrate 

respiratory therapy procedures under direct 

supervision. Students will be expected to expand 

their knowledge and comprehension of respiratory 

therapy procedures in keeping with didactic theory 

and laboratory skills previously or concurrently 

taught. Along with new clinical performance skills, 

students will be expected to demonstrate and refine 

clinical performance skills evaluated in Clinical Skills 

I. Students may be given the opportunity to observe 


the clinical setting. 


Prerequisites: Successful completion of 

third semester courses 

Co-requisites: All fourth semester courses 

The clinical orientation of the student during the 

fourth and fifth semesters is designed to reinforce, 

in a practical manner, the theoretical knowledge he/ 

she is acquiring during the didactic segment of their 

training program. For several hours each week, under 

the direction and supervision of a clinical instructor, 

students participate in a variety of basic routine 

radiographic procedures that present in accordance 

with their level of training. Students are also afforded 

the opportunity to enhance their knowledge of various 

basic and specialized radiographic equipment used 

in today’s modern diagnostic imaging departments. 

During their clinical orientation, students are also able 

to apply their understanding of the concepts used in 

providing quality patient care and radiation protection 

in a real-life setting. 

RX2160 – SD1620

246 



Prerequisites: Successful completion of fourth 

semester courses 

Co-requisites: All fifth semester courses 

The clinical orientation of the student during the 

fourth and fifth semesters is designed to reinforce, 

in a practical manner, the theoretical knowledge he/ 

she is acquiring during the didactic segment of their 

training program. For several hours each week, under 

the direction and supervision of a clinical instructor, 

students participate in a variety of basic routine 

radiographic procedures that present in accordance 

with their level of training. Students are also afforded 

the opportunity to enhance their knowledge of various 

basic and specialized radiographic equipment used 

in today’s modern diagnostic imaging departments. 

During their clinical orientation, students are also able 

to apply their understanding of the concepts used in 

providing quality patient care and radiation protection 

in a real-life setting. 

SD1630 WORKING IN HEALTHCARE 

This is an introductory course in healthcare ethics and 

workplace issues. Through course content, lectures, 

selected readings, and student discussions ethical 

theories will be examined and applied to current 

issues that arise in healthcare. 

SD1680 ETHICS IN HEALTHCARE 

This is an introductory course in health care ethics 

and workplace issues. Through course content, 

lectures, selected readings and student discussion, 

ethical theories will be examined and applied to 

current issues that arise in health care. 

SD2210 WORKPLACE PROFESSIONALISM 

This course is designed to provide students with the 

skills and knowledge necessary to effectively work 

in today’s work environment. Students will discuss 

professional ethics and conduct in the workplace and 

customer service methodologies. 


DEVELOPMENT III – HUMAN RESOURCE 

MANAGEMENT 


This course further explores the concepts of student 

skills development, career and education plans, and 

the student portfolio introduced and developed in 

SD1340 and SD1341. The student will explore self 

awareness and skill development, job search skills, 

employment processes, office politics, and work 

term reports. The student will continue to develop 

and refine his/her student portfolio and career and 

education plans. 


DEVELOPMENT IV – HUMAN RESOURCE 

MANAGEMENT 


This course synthesizes the concepts of student skills 

development, career and education plans, and the 

student portfolio introduced in SD1340 and further 

developed in SD1341 and SD2340. The student will 

discuss individual work term performance review, 

self and career assessments, employment research, 

and completion of career portfolio. This course is 

designed to allow the students to share the technical 

aspects of their work term, give students individual 

work term performance review and complete the 

career portfolio started in the first semester of 

their program. 


DEVELOPMENT III – MARKETING 



skills development, career and education plans, 

and the student portfolio that were introduced and 

developed in SD1340 and SD1341. The student will 

explore self awareness and skill development, job 

search skills, employment processes, office politics, 

and work term reports. The student will continue 

to develop and refine his/her student portfolio and 

career and education plans. 


DEVELOPMENT IV – MARKETING 




student portfolio that were introduced in SD1340 

and further developed in SD1341 and SD2350. The 

student will discuss individual work term performance 

review, self and career assessments, employment 

research, and completion of career portfolio. This 

course is designed to allow the students to share 

the technical aspects of their work term, give 

students individual work term performance review, 

and complete the career portfolio started in the first 

semester of their program.

247 



DEVELOPMENT III – ACCOUNTING 



skills development, career and education plans, and 

the student portfolios introduced and developed in 

SD1340 and SD1341. The student will explore self 

awareness and skill development, job search skills, 

employment processes, office politics, and work 

term reports. The student will continue to develop 

and refine his/her student portfolio and career and 

education plans. 


DEVELOPMENT IV – ACCOUNTING 




student portfolios introduced in SD1340 and further 

developed in SD1341 and SD2360. Topics covered in 

this course include: individual work term performance 

review, self and career assessments, employment 

research, and completion of career portfolio. This is a 

pass/fail course that is designed to allow the students 

to share the technical aspects of their work term, give 

students individual work term performance review 

and to complete the career portfolio started in the 

first semester of their program. 

SE1120 WORKPLACE SAFETY 


This is an introductory course that explores the nature 

and dimension of health, safety, and environment 

in the workplace and the role of both the employer 

and the employee in the process. Topics included 

are health, safety, and environment; hazardous 

communications; and safety awareness. 

SE1130 WORKPLACE SAFETY FOR HUMAN 

RESOURCES 

This is an introductory course that explores the 

nature and dimensions of a typical health, safety, and 

environment department. It also explores the role 

of both the employer and the employee in the safety 

process. Topics included are health, safety, and the 

environment; Qatar labor law as it relates to health 

and safety; and safety awareness. 

SE1160 PRINCIPLES OF OHS 

This course enables students to demonstrate 

knowledge of the basic principles of occupational 

health and safety. The student will be introduce 

to the knowledge frameworks and tools through 

which to minimize loss to life, health and property. 

Upon completion, students will be able to explain 

sources and techniques for hazard identification, 

risk assessment and risk control. 

SE1350 TOXICOLOGY 


This course emphasizes the life cycle of toxins 

in the human body. In addition to describing the 

genral principles of toxicology and dose-response 

relationship, a detailed analysis of the processes 

of absorption, distribution and storage, and 

biotransformation and elimination of toxins is 

completed. 

SE1400 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY I 

This course enables students to demonstrate 

knowledge of basic environmental principles 

and legislation and/or regulations governing the 

protection of the environment and workplace, 

together with understanding hazardous materials, 

how to control them, and learning the necessary 

skills to work safely. 

SE1520 FIRE PROTECTION 


This course is designed to give students an in-depth 

understanding of how to prevent fires and how to 

minimize loss in the event of a fire. A foundation is 

given to participants in the chemistry of combustion, 

basic fire science and sources of ignition before 

moving on to topics such as fire investigation, 

fire protection building design and automatic fire 

protection equipment and systems. 

SE1610 WORKPLACE HAZARDS AND CONTROLS 

This course covers health and safety hazards and 

controls in a variety of work environments. It includes 

building and plant layouts, lighting, ventilation, 

automated lines, systems and processes, sanitation 

and personal protective equipment (PPE), and use 

of PPE and basic decontamination methods for 

on-site work hazards. There will be a focus on building 

construction, excavations, blasting, ladders, work 

platforms, hoisting equipment, confined space 

entry, fall protection, mobile equipment, equipment 

guarding, lock-out, hand and power tools, welding, 

and cutting. Safety procedures and policies will be 

reviewed for the use of small hand tools, or for being 

in close proximity to large moving equipment and in 

known unsafe physical environments. 

SD1621 – SE1610

248 


SE2350 MEASUREMENT AND ANALYSIS I 

This is an introductory course that explores the 

principles and applications of occupational hygiene 

measurements. Understanding of terminology, 

concepts, equipment, and techniques of occupational 

health and safety will be covered. Topics included 

are occupational exposure limits, hygiene survey 

strategies, air sampling, air contaminants, gases and 

vapours, occupational exposure limits, air sampling, 

grab sampling, and direct reading instruments. 

SE2351 MEASUREMENT AND ANALYSIS II 

Prerequisite: SE2330 

This course is designed as a continuation of 

Measurement and Analysis I. Major topics include 

the principles, applications and use of direct reading 

instruments, basic applications of data evaluation, 

heat stress exposure, properties of noise, ventilation 

systems, lighting, and biological monitoring. 

SE2360 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MANAGEMENT 

This course explores the regulating legislation on 

hazardous material used and stored in the workplace 

and the environment. It discusses transportation 

requirements of dangerous goods and hazardous 

material. It also focuses on lead abatement and 

asbestos management options at the worksite and 

explores the training and education components 

for hazardous material management. This course 

introduces a material safety data sheet (MSDS) 

regarding the properties of a particular substance and 

how to provide workers and emergency personnel 

with procedures for handling or working with that 

substance in a safe manner that includes information 

such as physical data, storage, disposal, protective 

equipment, and spill handling procedures. 

SE2420 INSPECTION AND INVESTIGATION 


This course explores two key components of an 

effective occupational health and safety management 

system: workplace inspections and incident 

investigations. Students will learn the principles of 

how to develop, prepare, and conduct workplace 

inspections. Canadian laws and international 

standards will be used to demonstrate best practices 

with respect to workplace inspections. Students 

will also learn the principles of how to carry out an 

effective incident investigation. 

SE2450 ERGONOMICS 

This course will emphasize strategies and techniques 

that address the interface between human, machine, 

tasks, and tools. Strategies and techniques for 

improving worker safety, health, efficiency, and 

comfort will be the major focus. Exploration will 

provide the basics of conducting an ergonomic 

assessment and recommending control measures for 

both the office and material handling environments. 

The importance of involving the workers and 

management in all ergonomics program efforts will be 

included in this course. 

SE2520 OHS MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 


This course introduces students to occupational 

health and safety management systems (OHSMS). The 

most recent versions of OHSAS 18001 and 18002 are 

reviewed three elements of which are analyzed. The 

tools necessary to conform to each element of the 

standard are addressed. Therefore, participants will 

gain experience in the efforts involved in developing, 

implementing and maintaining and effective OHSMS 

in accordance with an internationally recognized 

standard. Because OHSAS 18001 is compatible with 

ISO14001 (environmental management system) and 

ISO9011 (quality management system), students will 

experience the framework of integrated management 

systems. 

SI3100 MATERIALS SCIENCE 

Prerequisites: CH1120, PH1100 


student with production and fabrication processes 

and practices used in the industrial environment. The 

course provides an understanding of the physical 

properties of materials used in industry and the 

effects of heat treating on metals. 

SP1200 MACHINE SHOP PRACTICE 

This is an introductory course designed to give 

students a knowledge and understanding of the 

fundamental metal removal and general machine shop 

concepts that will form the basis for further studies in 

science and technology.

249 


SP2300 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

This course is designed to introduce the concepts, 

philosophy, and application of total quality 

management, statistical process control, and the 

International Organization for Standardization 

(ISO) 9000 quality standards. Emphasis will be on 

the integration of the total quality management 

philosophy into the production process. Development 

of quality control procedures and documentation will 

be discussed including reference to existing industry 

quality control specifications. The implementation 

process for quality assurance manuals and their 

auditing procedures will be outlined. 

SP2700 COMPUTER NUMERICAL CONTROL/ 

COMPUTER-AIDED MANUFACTURING 

Prerequisites: SP1200, EG3100 

This is an advanced course in mechanical design and 

manufacture that builds on practical skills acquired 

in SP1200 and EG3100. This course introduces the 

student to an automated machining process called 

computer numerical control (CNC) and integrates 

CATIA (or other substitute) as a 3-D drafting and 

computer-aided manufacturing (CAM) package to 

design and manufacture a product. The student will 

also be involved in initial setup, design, program 

generation, drafting, and machining of a final product. 

TD3130 APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS 


This course presents a review of the laws of 

thermodynamics and applications to the oil and gas 

processing industry. It has been designed to apply 

theory to the applications as taught in the program 

and to aid further study. 

TD3200 THEORETICAL THERMODYNAMICS AND 

FLUID MECHANICS 


This course presents the review of the laws of 

thermodynamics and the principles governing fluid 

mechanics. It has been designed to discuss the theory 

behind the practical applications of thermodynamics 

and fluid mechanics. 

WD1420 WELDING FUNDAMENTALS 

This introductory course deals with welding 

technology and processes. Safety practices are 

emphasized in all aspects of welding applications in 

the shop. Applications include welding equipment, 

procedures, oxy-fuel cutting and joining, shielded 

metal arc welding (SMAW) processes, gas metal arc 

welding (GMAW) processes, tungsten inert gas (TIG) 

processes, and practice in welding basic joints. 

WT1160 WORK TERM 

Prerequisites: Successful completion of all courses 

Semesters 1 through 5 

The work term is a required portion of the program. 

The work term provides a unique learning experience 

in a real work place setting for Network and Systems 

Administration students. Participation in the work 

term is determined through a competitive process, 

and successful completion of all courses in Semesters 

1 through 5. This work term follows the successful 

completion of the preceding academic term. For 

most students, it represents their first professional 

work experience in a business environment; as 

such, it represents their first opportunity to evaluate 

their choice of pursuing a career in information 

technology. Students are expected to learn, develop, 

and demonstrate the high standards of behaviour 

and performance normally expected in the work 

environment. During the on-the-job experience 

students develop their employability and technical 

skills, further enhancing their personal growth. 

Through the work term students will experience 

different business cultures (e.g. public, private, and 

not-for-profit sector, small and large organizations). 

They are learning from the new network of contacts 

and widening their perception of life and career choices. 

SE2350 – WT1160

250 


WT1170 WORK TERM 


semesters 1 through 5 

The work term is a required portion of the program. 

The work term provides a unique learning experience 

in a real work place setting. Participation in the work 

term is determined through a competitive process, 

and successful completion of all courses prior to the 

work term is mandatory for work term eligibility. 

This work term follows the successful completion of 

the preceding academic term. For most students, it 

represents their first professional work experience in 

a business environment; as such, it represents their 

first opportunity to evaluate their choice of pursuing 

a career in information technology. Students are 

expected to learn, develop, and demonstrate the high 

standards of behaviour and performance normally 

expected in the work environment. During the 

on-the-job experience students develop their 

employability and technical skills, further enhancing 

their personal growth. Through the work term 

students will experience different business cultures 

(e.g. public, private, and not-for-profit sector, small 

and large organizations). They are learning from 

the new network of contacts and widening their 

perception of life and career choices. 

WT1460 WORK PLACEMENT 

Prerequisite: Completion of all courses in the first three 


A minimum seven-week placement is a required 

portion of the program. The Work Placement Study 

Program provides students with the opportunity to 

gain practical experience in the working environment 

of a power plant and with the life and work of a power 

engineer. Employers are provided the opportunity 

to train and assess students for possible future 

employment. The program builds on the range of 

tasks laid down in the Occupational Analysis of power 

engineers and familiarizes the student with all the 

machinery and systems that power engineers are 

required to maintain and operate. The course is mainly 

concerned with safety, operation, and maintenance of 

plant and equipment. The plant in which the engineer 

is serving acts as a real-life teaching aid, augments 

knowledge already acquired, and assists students 

with studies leading to a Certificate of Competency, 

Third Class. 

WT1480 CHEMICAL LABORATORY TECHNICIAN 

PRACTICUM 

Prerequisites: Completion of all academic courses in 

the Chemical Laboratory Technician program and a 

minimum cumulative GPA above 2.0 

This course refers to the comprehensive on-the-job 

training for Chemical Laboratory Technician students 

in a setting within any lab environment. The duration 

of this course is seven weeks and will be scheduled 

at the end of the third semester of the program. 

Students will choose positions in any lab environment 

in companies in the oil and gas energy sector, within 

educational institutions, or the private sector. The 

practicum allows the student to gain work experience 

that demonstrates their skills learned from the 

Chemical Laboratory Technician program. Student 

abilities will be assessed by the employer and 

College staff. 

WT1660 COMMUNITY PHARMACY CLINICAL 

PLACEMENT 

Prerequisite: Successful completion of all 

program courses 

This four-week work term is designed to enable 

the student to apply the fundamental principles of 

pharmacy technology in the field. It will ensure that a 

graduating student has the opportunity of practicing 

in the community setting while under close 

supervision. Students are placed with one of the 

many pharmacy health-related agencies and their 

performance is evaluated by the employer. As part 

of their duties, students will be required to prepare 

medicines, maintain inventory, receive payments, 

complete records, and perform other duties related 

to their program under the supervision and direction 

of a pharmacist.

College of the North Atlantic – Qatar 

68 Al Tarafa, Duhail North 

P.O. Box 24449 

Doha, Qatar 

Phone +974 4495 2222 

Fax +974 4495 2200 

Email info@cna-qatar.edu.qa 

CNA-QAtAr.Com 

Follow us on: 

facebook.com/cnaqa 

twitter.com/cnaq 

youtube.com/cnaqsa

251 


WT1670 HOSPITAL PHARMACY CLINICAL 

PLACEMENT 

Prerequisite: Successful completion of all program 

courses prior to work term 

This eleven-week work term is designed to enable 

the student to apply the fundamental principles of 

the pharmacy technician learned within the program 

to the workplace. It will ensure that a graduating 

student has the opportunity to practice in the hospital 

setting while under close supervision. Students are 

placed with one of the many pharmacy health-related 

agencies and their performance is evaluated by the 

employer. As part of their duties, students will be 

required to prepare outpatient medicines, intravenous 

admixtures, and unit dose medication carts, as well 

as maintain inventory, receive payments, complete 

records, and perform other duties related to their 

work term under the supervision and direction of a 

pharmacist. 

WT1720 CLINICAL PLACEMENT 

Prerequisite: Successful completion of all 

program courses 

This work term course is designed to assist the 

student in obtaining occupational experience. During 

this fifteen-week course the student will receive 

workplace experience in a variety of dental practice 

settings including private clinics and hospital facilities. 

The student will have the opportunity to apply the 

knowledge and skills acquired in class to a dental 

assistant position in a dental practice. 

WT1170 – WT1720

252

Industrial Maintenance - College of the North Atlantic Qatar

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?